• Author / Uploaded
• Reynaldo Macario

Citation preview

BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer

Service Manual (Volume 1)

© 2010 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved. For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2010-10 (Version: 1.0).

i

Intellectual Property Statement SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties. Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden. Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden. , , , , , are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their respective owners.

ii

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice. All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual. Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the condition that: •

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;

•

the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local requirements;

•

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit diagrams, calibration illustration list and other information to help qualified technician to maintain and repair some parts, which Mindray may define as user serviceable.

Note This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.

Warning It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.

iii

Warranty THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel. This warranty shall not extend to: •

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;

•

any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product identification markings have been altered or removed;

•

any product of any other manufacturer.

iv

Return Policy Return Procedure In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray, the following procedure should be followed: 1

Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial number, and a brief description of the reason for return.

2

Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).

3

Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by Customer Service department

Company Contact Manufacturer:

Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Address:

Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park, Nanshan, ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,

Tel:

+86 755 26582479 26582888

Fax:

+86 755 26582934 26582500

v

vi

Table of Contents Intellectual Property Statement .................................................................................................................... ii Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party................................................................................................... iii Warranty ...................................................................................................................................................... iv

Exemptions ................................................................................................................................. iv Return Policy ................................................................................................................................................v

Return Procedure ........................................................................................................................ v Company Contact........................................................................................................................ v Table of Contents ······················································································ I 1 System Description ·············································································· 1-1 1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1-2 1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit........................................................................................................... 1-3 1.3 Functions ............................................................................................................................................. 1-5

2 System Performance and Workflow ························································· 2-1 2.1 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.1.1 Common .......................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System ................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System ................................................................................ 2-4 2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System ............................................................................... 2-5 2.1.5 Specifications of Operation .......................................................................................... 2-6 2.2 Workflows ........................................................................................................................................... 2-8

2.2.1 Common Workflows ...................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.2 Workflow Descriptions .................................................................................................. 2-8 2.2.3 Measuring Points ............................................................................................................. 2-9 3 Installation ························································································ 3-1 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 3-2 3.2 Before Installation ............................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2.1 Environment Check ....................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.2 System Configuration ..................................................................................................... 3-3 3.3 Installation Requirements ................................................................................................................... 3-4

I

3.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements ......................................................................... 3-4 3.3.2 Power Supply and Noise ................................................................................................ 3-4 3.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage ........................................................................................... 3-4 3.4 Computer Configuration (for International Customers)...................................................................... 3-6

3.4.1 CPU................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.4.2 RAM.................................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.4.3 Network Adapter ............................................................................................................ 3-6 3.4.4 Serial Port ......................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.4.5 Hard Disk Defragment .................................................................................................. 3-6 3.4.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby ................................................................. 3-7 3.4.7 Screen Display Properties .............................................................................................. 3-8 3.4.8 Auto Awake/Shutdown Setup ...................................................................................... 3-9 3.5 Installation steps................................................................................................................................ 3-12

3.5.1 Unpacking ...................................................................................................................... 3-12 3.5.2 Installation...................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.5.3 Fluidic Connection ....................................................................................................... 3-16 3.5.4 Connection of Chemistry Analyzer ........................................................................... 3-19 3.5.5 Installation of Hub (optional)..................................................................................... 3-19 3.5.6 Installation of Data Management Software .............................................................. 3-20 3.5.7 Powering On .................................................................................................................. 3-22 3.5.8 Fluidic Prime.................................................................................................................. 3-25 3.5.9 Initial Maintenance Logs.............................................................................................. 3-29 3.5.10 Startup Initialization ................................................................................................... 3-29 3.5.11 Parameter Import and Chemistry Configuration ................................................... 3-31 3.5.12 Activation and Installation of ISE Electrodes (optional) ..................................... 3-33 3.5.13 Installation of Operating Software .......................................................................... 3-37 4 Overview of Modules and Units ······························································ 4-1 4.1 Shells Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 4-2

4.1.1 Functions.......................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.2 Locations and FRU Details ........................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Front & Back Shielding Covers .................................... 4-4 4.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Side Plates ........................................................................ 4-4 4.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel....................................................................... 4-5 4.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Cover ................................................. 4-5 4.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring ............................................................................................ 4-6 4.1.8 Replacement of Lock Catch .......................................................................................... 4-6 4.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly .............................................................................................................. 4-7

4.2.1 Functions.......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.2.2 Locations and FRU details ............................................................................................ 4-8 4.2.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables ....................................................... 4-9 4.2.4 Replacement of Metal Plate for Cuvette ................................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Replacement of Carousel Home Sensor and Encoder Sensor Cables ................. 4-13 II

4.2.6 Replacement of High-speed Motor ........................................................................... 4-15 4.2.7 Replacement of Slip Ring Cables ............................................................................... 4-16 4.2.8 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette .............................................................................. 4-18 4.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly.............................................................................................................. 4-19

4.3.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-19 4.3.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-19 4.3.3 Replacement of Inner Ring of Reagent Carousel Body ......................................... 4-20 4.3.4 Replacement of Outer Ring of Reagent Carousel Body ........................................ 4-22 4.3.5 Replacement of Reagent Cuvette Base ...................................................................... 4-23 4.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Chamber Assembly .......................................................... 4-24 4.3.7 Replacement of Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor Cables .................... 4-26 4.3.8 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor Cables ....................................................... 4-27 4.3.9 Replacement of High-speed Motor ........................................................................... 4-28 4.4 Sample Carousel Assembly ............................................................................................................... 4-30

4.4.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-30 4.4.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-30 4.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Body and Cuvette Holder Base 2 ........ 4-32 4.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Body, 16 Cuvette Holder and 13 Cuvette Holder Adapter ....................................................................................................................... 4-33 4.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly ................................................ 4-34 4.4.6 Replacement of Encoder Sensor and Carousel Home Sensor Cables ................. 4-36 4.5 Syringe Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 4-40

4.5.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-40 4.5.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-40 4.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250μl and Reagent Syringe 1ml ......................... 4-40 4.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules ..................................... 4-42 4.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly .................................................. 4-44 4.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece................................................................... 4-46 4.6 Mixer Assembly ................................................................................................................................ 4-48

4.6.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-48 4.6.2 Locations and FRU Details ......................................................................................... 4-48 4.6.3 Replacement of Mixers ................................................................................................ 4-49 4.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Motor Assembly ................................................................... 4-49 4.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler Conversion Board ....... 4-51 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly ....................................................... 4-53 4.6.7 Replacement of 3-probe/mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly ............................... 4-54 4.6.8 Replacement of Synchronous Cog Belt (Endless Belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm Wide)4-55 4.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly .................................................................... 4-56 4.6.10 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ......................................... 4-58 4.6.11 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4................................................. 4-59 4.6.12 Replacement of Mixer Vertical Motor Assembly .................................................. 4-60 4.6.13 Replacement of Mixer Rotary/Vertical Sensor Cables ......................................... 4-61 4.7 Sample Probe Assembly.................................................................................................................... 4-62 III

4.7.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-62 4.7.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-62 4.7.3 Replacement of Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Sample Probe Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 4-63 4.7.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M) ......................................................................................................4-65 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly ...................................................... 4-66 4.7.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ........................................... 4-68 4.7.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4................................................... 4-68 4.7.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly ................................................................ 4-69 4.7.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 4-70 4.8 Probe R1 Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 4-72

4.8.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-72 4.8.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-72 4.8.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R1 Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 4-73 4.8.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M)....................................................................................................................... 4-75 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly .............................................................. 4-77 4.8.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ........................................... 4-78 4.8.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4................................................... 4-79 4.8.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly ................................................................ 4-80 4.8.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 4-81 4.9 Probe R2 Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 4-82

4.9.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-82 4.9.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-82 4.9.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R2 Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 4-83 4.9.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M)....................................................................................................................... 4-85 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly .............................................................. 4-87 4.9.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ........................................... 4-88 4.9.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4 ................................................... 4-89 4.9.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly ................................................................ 4-90 4.9.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 4-91 4.10 Bar Code Reader ............................................................................................................................. 4-92

4.10.1 Tools ............................................................................................................................. 4-92 4.10.2 Maintenance of Sample Bar Code Assembly ......................................................... 4-92 4.10.3 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader .............................................................. 4-94 4.10.4 Maintenance of Reagent Bar Code Assembly ........................................................ 4-97 4.10.5 Replacement of Reagent Bar Code Reader...........................................................4-100 IV

4.10.6 Replacement of Antifogging Temperature Switch Cables .................................4-102 4.10.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater Cables .........................................................4-107 4.11 Photoelectric Unit.......................................................................................................................... 4-112

4.11.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-112 4.11.2 Components and Structure .....................................................................................4-112 4.11.3 Assembly Locations and Replacement Solutions.................................................4-115 4.11.4 Adjustment of Photometer .....................................................................................4-124 4.12 ISE Module (Optional).................................................................................................................. 4-131

4.12.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-131 4.12.2 Components of ISE Unit ........................................................................................4-131 4.12.3 Troubleshooting of ISE Tube ................................................................................4-136 4.12.4 ISE Buffer Resorption Volume Confirmation and Alignment ..........................4-139 4.12.5 Electrode’s O-shape Washer (801-BA80-00185-00) Check ................................4-140 4.12.6 Removing and Reinstalling ISE Module (801-BA80-00168-00) ........................4-141 4.12.7 Removing and Reinstalling SIC Assembly ............................................................4-145 4.12.8 Removing and Reinstalling SIC ..............................................................................4-146 4.12.9 Removing and Reinstalling Solenoid Valve ...........................................................4-148 4.12.10 Removing and Reinstalling Degassing Membrane (801-BA80-00213-00) .....4-150 4.12.11 Removing and Reinstalling CPU Board (801-BA80-00214-00) .......................4-150 4.12.12 Removing and Reinstalling Syringe Washer (801-BA80-00184-00).................4-152 4.12.13 Removing and Reinstalling Temperature Stabilizer (801-BA80-00215-00) ....4-154 4.12.14 Removing and Reinstalling Motor (801-BA80-00199-00) of Temperature Stabilizer Unit........................................................................................................................4-155 4.13 Refrigeration Unit ......................................................................................................................... 4-158

4.13.1 Locations and FRU Details .....................................................................................4-158 4.13.2 Replacement of Refrigerant ....................................................................................4-160 4.13.3 Removing/Installation of Reagent Refrigeration Module ..................................4-165 4.13.4 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Circulating Pump................................4-167 4.13.5 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Fans ......................................................4-169 4.13.6 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Temperature Sensors .........................4-171 Table of Contents ······················································································ I 5 Hardware Circuits ··············································································· 5-1 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 5-2 5.2 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.3 Summary of PCBAs ............................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.4 Locations of the PCBAs ...................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.5 Removing PCBAs ............................................................................................................................... 5-9 5.6 Functions of PCBAs ......................................................................................................................... 5-10

5.6.1 Main Control Board .....................................................................................................5-10 5.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board ............................................................................. 5-15 5.6.3 BA80 Sample Control Drive Board............................................................................ 5-22 5.6.4 BA80 Reagent Control Drive Board .......................................................................... 5-28

V

5.6.5 AC Drive Board ............................................................................................................ 5-34 5.6.6 Reagent Refrigeration Board ....................................................................................... 5-38 5.6.7 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board ........................................................................ 5-45 5.6.8 External Air Pump Drive Board ................................................................................. 5-48 5.6.9 Communication Conversion Board ........................................................................... 5-49 5.6.10 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board................................................. 5-50 5.6.11 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board ....................................................... 5-54 5.6.12 AD Collection Board ................................................................................................. 5-57 5.6.13 Preamplifier Board...................................................................................................... 5-60 5.6.14 Level Sense Board ....................................................................................................... 5-64 5.6.15 Pressure Detection Board .......................................................................................... 5-67 5.6.16 Clog Detection Board ................................................................................................ 5-70 5.6.17 Water Quality Detection Board ................................................................................ 5-74 5.7 Power Supply System ....................................................................................................................... 5-76

5.7.1 Description of Power Supply System ........................................................................ 5-76 5.7.2 Performance Indices .....................................................................................................5-77 5.7.3 Functional Diagram ......................................................................................................5-78 5.7.4 BA40 Power Supply Assembly .................................................................................... 5-79 5.7.5 12V/30A Power Supply Board ................................................................................... 5-87 5.7.6 24V/6A Power Supply Board ..................................................................................... 5-89 5.7.7 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board .................................................................. 5-91 5.7.8 DC Power Supply Conversion Board ........................................................................ 5-92 5.7.9 Tips for Troubleshooting Power Supply System ...................................................... 5-95 5.8 Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................................................... 5-96

6 Hydropneumatic System ······································································· 6-1 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.2 Hydropneumatic Diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System ................................................................................................ 6-5

6.3.1 Sampling Unit .................................................................................................................. 6-5 6.3.2 Cuvette Wash Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Water Supply Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-7 6.3.4 Waste Unit ........................................................................................................................ 6-8 6.3.5 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit............................................................................................. 6-9 6.3.6 Other ............................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.4 Removing and Installation of Hydropneumatic Components ........................................................... 6-11

6.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 6-11 6.4.2 Sampling Unit ................................................................................................................ 6-12 6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit ........................................................................................................ 6-13 6.4.4 Water Supply Unit ......................................................................................................... 6-20 6.4.5 Waste Unit ...................................................................................................................... 6-23 6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit........................................................................................... 6-26 6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials .................................................................................................... 6-28

VI

6.5.1 Pumps ............................................................................................................................. 6-28 6.5.2 Solenoid Valves ............................................................................................................. 6-28 6.5.3 Connectors ..................................................................................................................... 6-29 6.5.4 Tubes............................................................................................................................... 6-32 7 Alignment and Maintenance ··································································· 7-1 7.1 Basic Operations ................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.2 Alignment Procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-4

7.2.1 Photoelectric Unit ........................................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.2 Reaction Carousel Unit .................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.3 Sample Carousel Unit ..................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.4 Reagent Carousel Unit.................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units ................................................................................................... 7-9 7.2.6 Bar Code Units .............................................................................................................. 7-13 7.2.7 Hydropneumatic Unit .................................................................................................. 7-16 7.2.8 Pyrology Unit ................................................................................................................ 7-19 8 Alarms and Troubleshooting ··································································· 8-1 9 Scheduled Maintenance List ·································································· 9-1

VII

VIII

1

1-1

System Description

1.1 Overview The BS-800/BS-820 is a fully automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer designed for the in vitro determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) samples.BS-800/BS-820 consists of the analyzing unit and operation unit.

Figure 1.1 Overview of instrument

1-2

1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit BS-800/BS-820 has a throughput of 800 tests per hour for single- or double- reagent analysis, and its maximum throughput is 1200 tests per hour with ISE module. The working period is 4.5 seconds. This instrument is composed of the following components: one reaction carousel, two coaxial sample carousels, two coaxial reagent carousels, two reagent probes, one sample probes, two mixing stations and one automatic cuvette wash station, one photometric detection system and one ISE module (optional).The photometric system, which is composed of gratings and diode array, perform photometric measurement to the reaction cuvettes that hold sample/reagent mixture. After testing, an eight-phase automatic cuvette washing will be completed by the automatic cuvette wash station.

Figure 1.2 Layout of analyzer’s operation panel

1-3

1. Pressure gauges for vacuum, deionized water and diluted wash solution pump; 2. Outer sample carousel; 3. Inner sample carousel; 4. Reagent mixer; 5. Cuvette wash station; 6. Reaction carousel; 7. Sample mixer; 8. Probe R2; 9. Sample probe; 10. Probe R1; 11. Inner reagent carousel; 12. Outer reagent carousel; 13. ISE module; 14. Water tank; 15. ISE buffer; 16. Concentrated wash solution tank; 17. Diluted wash solution tank; 18. Syringes for three probes Figure 1.3 Overall structure of analyzer

1-4

1.3 Functions The following content describes the main procedures of the analyzer. 1. Reset the system, initialize all the mechanical units and wash the exterior and interior of the three probes and the mixers; 2. Perform 8-phase automatic washing for each reaction cuvette, and after phase 6, water blank is analyzed automatically; 3. Rotate the reagent carousel to the first specified reagent position, and lower the first reagent probe to aspirate the reagent; 4. Rotate reaction cuvette to the reagent addition position after completing 8-phase washing; then rotate reagent probe with R1 added to the reaction carousel and dispense R1 into the reaction cuvette; 5. Incubate the first reagent in the reaction cuvette for several periods; 6. Rotate the sample carousel to the specified sample addition position, and lower the sample probe into the sample carousel to aspirate a specified amount of sample; 7. Rotate the reaction cuvette with R1 added to the sample addition position, and rotate the sample probe with sample aspirated to the reaction carousel and dispense samples into the reaction cuvette; 8. Rotate the reaction cuvette with samples added to the sample mixing position for mixing; 9. For double-reagent tests, rotate the reagent carousel to the second specified reagent position after a fixed period, and lower the reagent probe into the reagent carousel to aspirate reagents; 10. Rotate the reaction cuvette to the second reagent addition position, then rotate reagent probe with R2 added to the reaction carousel and lower it into the reaction cuvette to dispense R2; 11. With R2 added, the reaction cuvette will rotate to the reagent mixing position for stirring; 12. During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement (absorbance reading taking) when passing by the photometric unit; 13. Triple-/quadruple-reagent analysis is similar to single-/double-reagent analysis stated above; (As for triple- or quadruple-reagent tests, the reaction cuvette with R2 dispensed will not be washed when passing by the wash unit.) 14. The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished will be washed automatically when they pass by the cuvette wash station. Table 1.1 Main functions of each unit

Unit Name Sample probe

Descriptions Perform aspiration and dispensing for all biochemistry and ISE testings

1-5

Unit Name

Descriptions

The first and the second sample carousels

140 positions are available for loading samples. The two carousels are coaxial; 90 positions for the outer two rings of the outer carousel and 50 positions for the inner two rings of the inner carousel. The inner ring of the inner carousel provides a refrigerating environment. All the positions in the two rings of the outer carousel and the outer rings of inner carousel support bar code scanning. A fixed position for intensive washing solution for the sample probe is available which can hold 62ml reagent bottle.

Probe R1

Perform aspiration and dispensing of R1 and R3 for all biochemistry testings

Probe R2

Perform aspiration and dispensing of R2 and R4 for all biochemistry testings

The first and the second reagent carousels

The two carousels are coaxial designed for loading testing reagents and intensive washing solution. There are 70 R1/R3 reagent positions in the outer ring, and 50 R2/R4 reagent positions in the inner ring. The inner and outer rings are driven separately. All the positions support built-in reagent bar code reader. Both 20ml and 62ml reagent bottles are supported. 70ml reagent bottles (for HITACHI) are also supported. The reagent carousel provides a refrigerating environment which is constant within 2°C-8°C for 24 hours a day.

Reaction carousel

165 positions and reaction testing container are available

Sample and reagent mix unit

Two mix units; each has three mixers; each mixer will be washed twice with water

Photometric unit

Reversed optics; Support 12 wavelength: 340, 380, 412, 450, 505, 546, 570, 605, 660, 700, 740, 800nm

Automatic wash

Eight-phase automatic washing for each reaction cuvette

ISE module (optional)

Realize the function of ISE measurement

1-6

2

System Performance and Workflow

2-1

2.1 Technical Specifications 2.1.1 Common •

System

Random, multi-channel, multi-test •

System Structure

Analyzer and computer •

Sample type

Serum, urine, plasma •

Maximum concurrent tests

50 double-reagent tests/70 single-reagent tests •

Throughput

800 tests/hour, Maximum: 1,200 tests/hour (with ISE module) •

Analytical method

Endpoint, Kinetic and Fixed-time measurements; support single-/double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent tests, and single-/double-wavelength tests •

Reaction time

The longest reaction time for single-reagent is 9 minutes, and 5 minutes for double-reagent. •

Reaction temperature

37±0.3°C •

Test scope

Clinical chemistries, Immunoassays, Therapeutic Drug Monitoring (TDM) •

Predilution

Dilution ratio: 2~200; dilution is done in reaction cuvette. •

Operation mode

System and tests are configured via the operating software; test one by one; profiles and calculation tests are allowed. •

Calibration math model

Single-point linear, two-point linear, multi-point linear; Logit-Log 4P; Logit-Log 5P; spline curve, exponential function; polynomial expression; parabola. •

Control

Westgard rules, Cumulative sum check, Twin plot •

Data processing

Store and output various data and diagrams and calculate among different tests.

2-2

•

Dimensions

l×b×h: 1580 mm×850 mm×920 mm •

Weight

425kg •

STAT samples

Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority. •

Networking

Allow to connect with LIS (Laboratory Information Management System).

2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System •

Sample loading

Samples are loaded via sample carousel. •

Sample cuvette type The first and the second rings of the sample carousel (from the outer to the inner) are compatible with the following sample containers: •

Microtube: Hitachi Φ12×37mm and Beckman Φ14×25mm

•

Primary tube or plastic tube: Φ12×68.5mm, Φ12×99mm, Φ12.7×75mm, Φ12.7×100mm, Φ13×75mm, Φ13×95mm, Φ13×100mm

Besides containers mentioned above, the third ring of the sample carousel (from the outer to the inner) is also compatible with the following sample containers: Φ16.5X 92mm, Φ16X 75mm, Φ16X 100mm The fourth ring of the sample carousel (from the outer to the inner) is compatible with the following sample containers:

•

•

Microtube: Hitachi Φ12×37mm and Beckman Φ14×25mm

•

Primary tube or plastic tube: Φ12×68.5mm, Φ12.7×75mm, Φ13 X 75mm

Sample Inventory

Hitachi sample container (Φ12×37mm): the sample volume ≥ 100μl; Beckman microtube (Φ14×25mm, 0.5ml): the sample volume ≥ 50μl; Beckman microtube (Φ14×25mm, 2ml), the sample volume ≥ 150μl. For primary tube or plastic tube, the sample should be kept 8mm higher than the unacceptable sample level height. •

Sample carousel

The common sample carousels are the two coaxial carousels, and each carousel has two rings; the inner ring of the inner carousel provides a refrigerating environment; rings of the outer carousel and the outer ring of the inner carousel support bar code scanning. •

Sample positions on sample carousel

140 sample positions are available; 90 positions for the outer two rings of the outer carousel and 50 positions for the inner two rings of the inner carousel. Standard, 2-3

control, STAT and dilution positions are included. •

STAT samples

Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority. •

Sample volume

1.5μl ~ 35μl, with an increment of 0.1μl ISE sample: 22μl •

Sample probe

One sample probe available, featuring level sense, horizontal/vertical bump detection, clog detection and level tracking. •

Sample probe wash

Wash the exterior and interior of the probe; carryover contamination rate < 0.1%. •

Sample input mode (bar code) Name

Value

Symbology Minimum density

Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93 bar

code

0.19mm

Data bits

3~27

Format and content

User defined

Maximum width

55mm

Maximum height

10mm

Maximum inclination angle

±5°C

Print quality

No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M Print Quality Specification.

Width and narrowness

2.5:1 to 3.0:1

2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System •

Reagent loading

R1 and R3 are placed in the outer ring of reagent carousel, and R2 and R4 are placed in the inner ring. •

Reagent bar code

Code128 is supported; bar code density: 0.19mm; Width and narrowness: 2.5:1. Name

Value

Symbology

Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93

Minimum bar code density

0.25mm

Data bits

3~27

Format and content

User defined

Maximum width

55mm

Maximum height

10mm

2-4

Name

•

Value

Maximum inclination angle

±5°C

Print quality

Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)

Width and narrowness

2.5:1 to 3.0:1

Reagent refrigeration

Refrigeration temperature: 2~8°C •

Reagent addition approach

Reagent addition, level sense and remaining volume check are performed precisely by syringes. •

Supported reagent types

R1, R2, R3 and R4. •

Reagent volume

15μl ~300μl, with increment of 0.5μl. •

Reagent carousel

The common reagent carousels are the two coaxial carousels, and the inner and outer rings are driven separately; all the positions support built-in bar code scanning. •

The number and volume of reagent bottle

There are 70 R1/R3 positions in the outer ring and 50 R2/R4 positions in the inner ring. Each reagent position can hold Mindray 20ml, 62ml reagent bottles and Hitachi 70ml bottles. •

Reagent probe

Two separate reagent probes are available, featuring level sense, horizontal/vertical bump detection. •

Reagent probe wash

Wash the exterior and interior of the probe; carryover contamination rate < 0.1%. •

Reagent inventory Bottle specification Dead volume

•

20ml 2ml

62ml 3.5ml

Prevention of cross contamination

User defined; wash the exterior and interior of the reagent probe; wash the probe intensively.

2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System •

Optical pathlength of reaction cuvette

5mm •

Specification and material of reaction cuvette

5mm×5mm×29mm; made of permanent glass

2-5

•

Number of reaction cuvettes

165 •

Mixing procedure

There are two mix assemblies for reagent and sample, and each assembly has three mixers. The mixers will start to work after adding the sample, R2, R3 and R4. •

Reactant volume

100~360μl •

Photometric system

Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings; Photodiode detects each wavelength. •

Range of wavelengths

12 wavelengths: 340, 380, 412, 450, 505, 546, 570, 605, 660, 700, 740 and 800nm. •

Light source

12V/20W tungsten-halogen lamp; direct lighting. •

Gratings type

Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings •

Wavelength accuracy

±2nm •

Minimum reaction volume

100μl •

Photometric measurement method

Photodiode •

Concurrent wavelengths for each test

One or two wavelengths •

Absorbance range

0-3.4A, optical path: 10mm •

Resolution of photometer

0.001OD

2.1.5 Specifications of Operation •

Monitor

ELO 17-inch, touchscreen •

Operating system

Windows XP (professional/home) SP1 or later; compatible with Vista •

Communication interface

RS232; compatible with TCP/IP 2-6

•

Printer

The system supports three types of printer, which include inkjet printer, laser (black and white) printer and stylus printer. •

Data input

Keyboard; mouse; 17-inch touchscreen; bar code reader; RMS (communicating through the TCP/IP interface of static IP address); LIS: HL7, ASTM1394 (communicating through the TCP/IP or serial interface of static IP address) •

Data output

Monitor, printer, RMS (communicating through the TCP/IP interface of static IP address), LIS •

Data storage

Hard disk; USB

2-7

2.2 Workflows 2.2.1 Common Workflows

Figure 2.1 Analysis workflows

2.2.2 Workflow Descriptions Sequential actions of sample probe in each period Lower into the sample cuvette -> aspirate sample -> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> dispense sample -> raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash reservoir -> start to wash -> rotate to the sample rack or the sample carousel -> go to next period

Sequential actions of probe R1 in each period Lower into the reagent cuvette -> aspirate reagent -> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> deliver reagent -> raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash reservoir -> start to wash -> rotate to the reagent carousel -> go to next period

Sequential actions of probe R2 in each period Lower into the reagent cuvette -> aspirate reagent -> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> deliver reagent -> raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash reservoir -> start to wash -> rotate to the reagent carousel -> go to next period

Sequential actions of reagent and sample mixers in each period Both sample and reagent mix module has three mixers which perform phase-I wash, phase-II wash and mix actions separately in each period. Two periods are required by each mixer to complete washing. The mixer will start to work after the reaction carousel stops.

2-8

The sequence is: Lower into the reaction carousel/wash reservoir -> clean during mixing -> raise to the upper position of the reaction carousel/wash reservoir -> rotate the mixer to washing/mixing position.

Sequential actions of reaction carousel BS-800 chemistry analyzer provides 165 positions for reaction cuvettes; 4.5 seconds for one cycle; one stop after one rotation. In one cycle (4.5 seconds), the carousel will stop after 41 cuvettes rotated counterclockwise, complete adding samples, R1 and R2.Altogether, four cycles are required for 164 reaction cuvettes; the cuvettes will rotate one by one clockwise.

2.2.3 Measuring Points Add R1 Add sample Stir sample Add R2 Stir R2 8-phase washing

About 1 min

1 5 9 1 3 17 21 25 29 31

About 5 min

About 4 min

End 44

46

95

97

159

Measuring points for single-/double-reagent

Figure 2.2 Measuring points for single-/double-reagent Add R1 Add sample Stir sample Add R3 Stir R3

Add R2 Stir R2 8-phase washing

1min

5 9 1 3 17 21 25 2931

44 46

7.5min Stop washing

3.5min 95 97

166

1min

3.5min

End 194

196

211

Measuring points for triple-/quadruple-reagents

Figure 2.3 Measuring points for triple-/quadruple-reagents

2-9

Add R4 Stir R4 5min

260 262

331

2-10

3

3-1

Installation

3.1 Overview This chapter mainly describes the working environment, installation procedures and some precautions of BS-800/BS-820 to guide the installation.

3-2

3.2 Before Installation 3.2.1 Environment Check •

Altitude: -400-4,000. (An external air pump is required when the instrument is used at a an altitude over 2,000m, and the maximum altitude is 4,000m) (106kPa-63.2kPa).

•

The system is for indoor use only.

•

The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).

•

The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 450Kg weight.

•

The installation site should be well ventilated.

•

The installation site should be free of dust.

•

The installation side should not be in direct sun.

•

The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.

•

The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.

•

The bearing platform (of ground) should be free of vibration.

•

The installation site should be kept away from large noise and power supply interference.

•

Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact device that is frequently switched on and off.

•

Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitter near the system.

•

Operating temperature: 15°C-30°C with fluctuation Automatic Power On to enable automatic power on.

BIOS setup step 2: Set Wake on LAN as Primary.

Integrated network adapter setup step 1: Set the wake link to compulsive. Integrated network adapter setup step 2: Set Enable PME to Enabled. Integrated network adapter setup step 3: Set Wake-on-Lan Capabilities to Pattern Match & Magic Pack.

3-10

Independent network adapter setup step 1: Enable Shutdown Wake-on-Lan. Independent network adapter setup step 2: Set the Wake-on-Lan mode. Independent network adapter setup step 3: Set the WOL & Shutdown Link Speed. To use Wake-on-Lan based on the independent network adapter, you should disable the integrated network adapter in BIOS settings. Wake-on-Lan cannot be enabled simultaneously on the integrated and independent network adapters. To disable the integrated network adapter in BIOS: Devices - > Network Setup - > Onboard Ethernet Controller = “Disabled” After you finish the settings as instructed above, the auto awake/shutdown function of the instrument can be used.

3-11

3.5 Installation steps 3.5.1 Unpacking 1

Before unpacking, check the packing list and see if the following items are included: chemistry analyzer, accessory kit, high-concentration waste tank, wash solution, ISE module (accessory kit), water supply module (optional), remote maintenance system (RMS), and hub (optional).

2

The chemistry analyzer is about 465kg. Unload it from the truck with a forklift.

3

Use an adjustable wrench to loosen the retaining screws on the upper cover and slope cover of the package, remove the two covers and keep 3m space in front of the slope cover (1.4m for the slope cover and 1.6m for the instrument).

Slope cover

Figure 3.2 Before and after removing instrument package

Figure 3.3 Screw down anchors and screw up retaining screws

3-12

Remove the mounting plate, and then screw up the anchors carefully.

Figure 3.4 Remove chemistry analyzer from package

4

Remove the two strengthening ribs from the slope board and then place it on the pallet.

Strengthening rib

3.5.2 Installation Set the chemistry analyzer in an appropriate place and then finish the following installation.

3-13

Figure 3.5 Install the 3 probes and 6 mixers

Figure 3.6 Connect tubes, chemistry analyzer and computer

Install probes 1

Insert the probe downwards into the hole on the probe arm while aligning the screw hole on the probe plate to the rod inside the arm.

2

Install the washer in the tube connector. To replace the washer, remove the old one from the tube connector and install the new one. Connect the tube connector to the probe and then tighten it.

3

Fix the earthing wire of the probe to the earthing terminal inside the arm; connect the probe connector to the liquid level detection board.

4

Sleeve the spring on the rod and tighten the retaining screw. Pay attention to the spring direction and make the thread opening face downwards.

5

Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. If not, check if the spring is clamped or fixed too tightly.

6

After installation, power on the chemistry analyzer, and then check if the No.D2 LED indicator on the circuit board inside the probe arm is lit. If it is, it indicates that the level detection system works normally.

3-14

7

Install the probe arm cover properly until you hear a click.

8

Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. If not, it indicates that the arm cover is not installed correctly. Reinstall the arm cover and check the spring until it can move freely.

9

Perform the installation according to the figure below.

Keep the washer steady

Washer

Retaining screw and spring

Level detection board connector

Figure 3.7 Installation of 3 probes

3-15

Earthing wire

Install mixers Install the mixer by inserting it from the top of the arm. Rotate the mixer to make it better contact the hole on the arm. See the figure below.

Figure 3.8 Install mixers

3.5.3 Fluidic Connection Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Unit

Maximum of 1200mm

Chemistry analyzer

High-conc waste sensor High-conc waste Low-conc waste

1

2

3

4

5

6

DI water

Inlet filter

7 8 9 High-concentration waste tank

Water-purifying equipment

Drain outlet

Figure 3.9 Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Unit

1

Use the PVC tube in the accessory kit to connect the chemistry analyzer with the water unit. Install the water inlet filter between the water unit outlet and the analyzer inlet and make sure that the filter will not be influenced by external force and is convenient for replacement.

2

The arrow on the filter shell indicates the water flow. Make sure that the arrow points at the analyzer inlet. Do not perform any operations on the air vent of

3-16

the filter. 3

To prevent leaks, fix all tubes and connectors properly with the tube clamps in the accessory kit.

4

Ensure that the water inlet tube between the water unit and the analyzer is less than 10m long. When installing the tube, prevent it from being bent, twisted, or pressed, and keep it away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch the tube.

5

If the tube is not installed correctly, remove it from the water unit and the analyzer, cut off the part that has contacted the connectors, and then reinstall the tube properly.

Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Supply Module (optional)

Chemistry analyzer DI water tank

Fixed by tube clamps 1

2

3

4

5

6

Water supply inlet filter

7: Water inlet DI water inlet Inlet filter

7

8

9

8: Air vent 9: Water outlet

Water supply module

Figure 3.10 Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Water Supply Module (optional)

1

Use the PVC tube in the accessory kit to connect the chemistry analyzer with the water supply module. Install the water supply module between the deionized water tank and the analyzer inlet. Install the water inlet filter between the water supply module outlet and the analyzer inlet, and make sure that the filter will not be influenced by external force and is convenient for replacement.

2

Install the water supply module filter at the end of the inlet tube and then place the tube at the bottom of the deionized water tank.

3

The arrow on the filter shell indicates the water flow. Make sure that the arrow points at the analyzer inlet. Do not perform any operations on the air vent of the filter.

4

To prevent leaks, fix all tubes and connectors properly with the tube clamps in 3-17

the accessory kit. 5

Ensure that the water inlet tube between the deionized water tank and the analyzer is less than 10m long. When installing the tube, prevent it from being bent, twisted, or pressed, and keep it away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch the tube.

6

If the tube is not installed correctly, remove it from the water unit and the analyzer, cut off the part that has contacted the connectors, and then reinstall the tube properly.

Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Waste Drainage Facilities

Maximum of 1200mm

Chemistry analyzer

High-conc waste sensor

Low-conc waste

1

2

3

4

5

6

Water unit

High-conc waste

DI water Inlet filter

High-conc waste tank Drain outlet Figure 3.11 Connect Chemistry Analyzer with Waste Drainage Facilities

1

Circuit the high-/low-concentration waste tubes independently.

2

Connect the high-concentration waste tube and sensor to the high-concentration waste tank, and ensure the tube is about 2m long.

3

Insert the low-concentration waste tube into the sewer, and make sure that the tube is about 2-10m long.

4

Make sure that the low-concentration waste outlet is no less than 50mm wide and less than 1.2m high.

5

Ensure that the waste tube outlet is higher than the liquid level in the sewer in order to prevent bubbles overflow.

6

Enclose the low-concentration waste outlet to eliminate noise and prevent

3-18

bubbles overflow. 7

To prevent leaks, fix all tubes and connectors properly with the tube clamps in the accessory kit.

8

When installing the tubes, prevent them from being bent, twisted, or pressed, and keep them away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch the tubes.

9

Ensure that all electric connectors are higher than and away from fluidic parts and prevent fluidic connectors from facing electric components.

3.5.4 Connection of Chemistry Analyzer 1

Prepare new concentrated wash solution and ISE buffer solution (in case that the ISE module is configured), and then place them in the front cabinet of the analyzer. Make sure the two solutions are capped properly.

ISE buffer solution

Concentrated wash solution

2

If you are using an UPS, install it and make it properly grounded.

3

Connect the analyzer, computer, printer, monitor, water unit (or water supply module), power cord and data cable. Do not switch on the power before finishing all connections.

4

Connect computers with the analyzer through the serial port and network port. If the computer is connected with the analyzer through the serial port, choose the port COM1 for the computer. Use the network cable to connect the operating software computer with the data management software computer.

3.5.5 Installation of Hub (optional) 1

Connect the hub with the network cables, WAN port to the local area network and LAN port to the computer.

2

Run the Internet Explorer and then enter http://192.168.1.1 in the address box. 3-19

Enter the username and password of administrator: admin. 3

Choose setup guide and perform the settings according to the guide.

4

Select dynamic address.

5

Enter the IP address of the local area network, through which you may visit and configure the hub. You are allowed to change the IP address, and you should ensure that it is in the same network segment as the hub.

6

Set the DHCP service and assign IP address for the computer. Make sure that the computer’s ID address is in the same network segment as the hub.

3.5.6 Installation of Data Management Software Instructions •

Do not install the data management software and BS-800 application program on the same computer.

•

Hardware requirements: Dual Core CPU 2.0G; 2G RAM; 250G hard disk; 17-inch screen. These are the lowest configurations of a computer to install the data management software.

•

OS supported: Windows XP SP3

•

If Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or Microsoft SQL Server 2008 has already been installed on the computer, please uninstall it first.

•

It will take 30 minutes to complete the whole installation procedure. The computer will be restarted once during the installation and then it will continue with the installation automatically.

•

The available space of the installation disk should be greater than 10G.

•

Resolution: 1280*1024 or above. The report input interface may not be fully displayed with a lower resolution.

•

Do not install the data management software together with other LIS software or any other types of data management software on one computer.

•

Connect the analyzer computer and the data management software computer. Exit Windows firewall on data management software computer or add the network port used by the data management software in the firewall exceptions.

Installation steps The data management software installation pack includes three parts: .Net Framework 3.5, database 2005, and data management software. If the first two have existed on your computer, the system will skip them automatically and directly install the data management software. 1

Double click the Setup.exe file in the installation file folder.

2

Install .Net Framework 3.5. − Select Next.

3-20

− Accept the license agreement and then select Install. 3

− The .Net Framework 3.5 is installed successfully. Install the SQL 2008. Select Next for each step and then select Finish.

4

When the data management software installation window is displayed, select Next.

NOTE Install the data management software in the default directory rather than Program Files of the system drive.

5

The data management software is installed successfully.

6

The system initialization is started and will take about 10 seconds.

7

The login page is displayed. Enter the default password “111111” of Admin. After logging on the system, you are allowed to change the password by selecting Menu -> Setup -> Change Password.

3-21

3.5.7 Powering On 1 Turn on the power switch of the water unit or the water supply module(optional) and the water drainage module(optional). 2

Turn on the analyzing unit power switch and the main power switch. Turn on the ball valve in the front cabinet of the analyzer as shown in the figure below. The water inlet valve in the back of the analyzer is turned on automatically to supply water for the water tank. In normal conditions, the water tank can be filled full in 10-15 minutes.

Ball valve

3

Start the computer. The BS-800 operating software is run automatically when the Windows is started. You are also allowed to run the operating software by selecting the shortcut icon on the desktop or in the Start menu. See the figure below. The system checks if the fluidic prime is performed and then skips the initialization procedure. When the login window is displayed, enter the username “ServiceUser” and password “#BS8A#SEU”.

3-22

4

When the main screen is shown, select Utility -> System Setup -> Factory F2. Select Optional Modules, enable/disable ISE module, sample bar code and reagent bar code, and then select OK.See the figure below:

3-23

5

To set the local atmospheric pressure, select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit, select the Pump Check button, enter the atmospheric pressure as indicated in the figure below, and then select Config to save the input. Check the altitude of the installation site of the analyzer, and then find the corresponding atmospheric pressure in Appendix A.

3-24

Select the Config button

6

Perform the Fluidic Prime procedure.

3.5.8 Fluidic Prime 1

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit. The screen is displayed as follows.

3-25

2

Select 3 Fluidic Prime to display the following window. The check of solenoid valve, level floater and pump has been finished by default. Select Continue.

3

Select Continue to prime the water tank. When the priming is finished, select OK, and then select Continue. The water circulating pump P03 is turned on.

4

Observe the water pressure gauge and make sure that the water supply pressure is within 40-45kPa. Select Continue to go to the next step.

3-26

5

Prime the system with diluted wash solution. This step will take about 5 minutes. Check if the diluted wash solution pressure is within 0.015-0.025MPa. When the auto dilution is finished, select OK and then select Continue. The 3 probes automatically move to the top of their wash reservoirs.

6

Select Continue to go to step 7, cleaning and priming the probe interior. Check if the cleaning liquid is sprayed out straightly from the probes. Loosen the screws on the sample syringe fixing block and remove the syringe. Pull and push the syringe plunger until there is no air bubbles in the syringe. Install the syringe back and make the V-shape slot level to scale 7.5 of the syringe.

7

Loosen the screws on the R1 syringe fixing block and remove the syringe. Pull and push the syringe plunger until there is no air bubbles in the syringe. Install the syringe back and make the V-shape slot level to scale 15 of the syringe. Repeat this step for R2 syringe.

8

In step 8, check if water comes out of the wash wells of the 3 probes and 4 mixers without air bubbles.

9

In step 9, please remember to remove the cuvette wash station and put it in an opening container. In step 10, check if diluted wash solution is dispensed straightly from phase 1 and 2 wash probes.

10 In step 11, check if deionized water is dispensed straightly from phase 3-6 wash 3-27

probes without air bubbles. 11 Lift up the cuvette wash station and then check if the primary vacuum pressure is normal. The pressure check will take about 30 seconds. In step 14, sense the wash probes and check if there is suction force at the probe end.

12 Reinstall the cuvette wash station. 13 The cuvettes are cleaned for 10 times in step 14. Check that there is no liquid overflowing the cuvettes and the liquid level in cuvettes is 5-10mm from the cuvette opening. 14 The system is homed for 3 times, and there should be no failure alarms. The containers and pressure gauges should be in correct status as indicated in the following figure. 15 The fluidic prime is finished.

3-28

Figure 3.12 Containers status and pressure gauges

3.5.9 Initial Maintenance Logs Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance to display the maintenance window, on which all scheduled maintenance procedures should be confirmed for the first time. The maintenance frequencies include Daily, Weekly, Two-Week, Monthly, 3-Month, 6-Month, and Other. Select the Select All button on each scheduled maintenance tab page, and then select OK. The current date and time appears in the Date Performed column of each maintenance procedure.

3.5.10 Startup Initialization When the fluidic prime is finished, exit the operating software and reboot the computer. The operating software is automatically run, and the system starts initializing. When the login window is displayed, enter the user name “ServiceUser” and password “#BS8A#SEU”. 3-29

When the main screen is shown, select Rgts/Cal -> Reagent/Calibration, and then load concentrated wash solution and ISE buffer solution through the Load option.

3-30

3.5.11 Parameter Import and Chemistry Configuration Start the software and click Utility -> Chemistries -> Config, and click Options to display the Option window.

Click Import to display the Import window. Click Load Default, then all the Mindray reagents will be displayed in the left column. Click Add All, all the chemistries will be added to the right column. Click Exit to close this window. 3-31

All the Mindray chemistries will be displayed in Available Chemistries column. Users can either select all the chemistries or select the specific chemistries as required

Click OK to complete the chemistry configuration.

3-32

3.5.12 Activation and Installation of ISE Electrodes (optional) Activation of Na and K Electrodes Prior to use, new Na and K electrodes need to be activated by being soaked in buffer solution for 1 day. Activation should be done on the day before the electrodes are installed. REF and Cl electrode needs not to be activated before use.

NOTE Ref electrode cannot be activated. Exercise caution and avoid drastic vibration when installing or removing electrodes, especially Cl electrode.

Tools and materials: 2mL serum, 30mL ISE buffer solution, 2mL or 3mL disposable pipette Operating Procedure: 1

Take out ISE electrodes from the package and wipe off the liquid on the electrode surface.

2

Remove the sponge from the electrode case and put the electrodes in it for activating.

3-33

NOTE Do not remove the cap on the electrode connector to prevent liquid ingression. Two electrodes can be put simultaneously in an electrode case for processing.

3

Add 0.5mL serum into the flow cell to fill the entire measuring channel.

4

Add about 25mL buffer solution to the electrode case until the electrodes get soaked completely. Keep the electrodes soaked overnight.

5

Before installing the electrodes, clean them with deionized water and dry them for later use. If the measuring data are unstable after the electrodes are preprocessed for quite a long time, perform the Clean Electrodes procedure.

NOTE If there is not enough time to activate the Na and K electrodes, install them directly on the ISE module. After the installation, run 20 ISE tests with serum sample and reject the test results so that the electrodes can quickly enter normal working status. Recalibrate the electrodes to confirm their performances.

See the figure below:

3-34

Figure 3.13 Procedure of activating electrodes

NOTE If there is not enough time to activate the Na and K electrodes, install them directly on the ISE module. After the installation, run 20 ISE tests with serum sample and reject the test results so that the electrodes can quickly enter normal working status. Recalibrate the electrodes to confirm their performances.

ISE Module Configuration Select Optional Modules on the factory settings window, and then mark the checkbox in front of Enable/Disable ISE Module. As shown in the figure below.

3-35

Electrode Installation 1

Prepare the electrodes. The Na and K electrodes should be activated in advance. Take out the Cl and Ref electrodes from the high-concentration salt solution, and then clean and dry them.

2

Remove the caps from the electrode connectors. If there is liquid left on the electrode connectors, wipe it off to prevent corroding the connectors.

3

Open the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel.

4

Loosen the retaining screw and take out the spacer.

5

Install the electrodes from left to right in the following order: Ref, Na, K, and Check that an O-shape washer exists between every two electrodes, between the reference electrode and the module, and between the Cl electrode and the module. Lost of washers may cause liquid leaks and unreliable test results, and even damage the ISE module.

6

Use the mounting template to fix the electrodes and tighten the thumbscrew.

7

Connect the electrode connectors to corresponding terminals. Connect the electrodes to terminals of corresponding color:

8

•

Yellow: Na electrode

•

Red: K electrode

•

Blue: Cl electrode

•

Black: Ref electrode

Perform the Buffer Prime maintenance procedure and set the prime cycle to 20.Observe the sample injection cup and check if buffer solution is correctly injected and discharged, and if the electrode connectors are free of leaks or overflow.

3-36

Checks after Installing Electrodes 1

Assign positions for ISE calibrators. Select Cal Options F7 on the Reagent/Calibration screen, and then assign positions for ISE calibrators.

2 Calibrate the ISE serum. The calibration may be failed due to the new electrodes. Try again for several times. 3

Calibrate the ISE urine. The calibration may be failed due to the new electrodes. Try again for several times.

4

Perform the precision test. Prepare 1mL serum sample, request Na, K and Cl for serum sample measurement for 20 replicates. The precision will be calculated when the measurement is complete. Check if the precision meets the following requirements: Na: 1.0%; K: 1.5%, Cl: 1.5%.

3.5.13 Installation of Operating Software Check if the operating software is in the latest version, if not, please upgrade it. The BS-800 operating software can be installed in two ways: complete installation and upgrading. Complete installation is chosen when the computer has no BS-800 operating software installed or the BS-800 operating software has been uninstalled from it; upgrading is chosen when the computer has the BS-800 operating software installed and the software version needs to be updated. The two installation methods are described in detail in the following sections.

Complete Installation Run the setup.exe file in the Setup folder and then finish the following steps. 1

Click Next. 3-37

2

Wait until the computer is rebooted.

3

Choose a language that is used to display the software screens and printed reports, and then click Next.

4

Click Finish to end the installation. 3-38

Upgrading Run the setup.exe file in the Setup folder and then finish the following steps. 1

Click Next.

2

Choose one from the following two options: “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and “No, I will restart my computer later”. You are recommended to choose the first option. And then click Finish.

3-39

3-40

4

Overview of Modules and Units

4-1

4.1 Shells Assembly 4.1.1 Functions Shells assembly indicates the apparent structures of the whole analyzer designed for protecting the internal assemblies. The shell is used as an interface of each module which is also a representation of the industrial design.

4.1.2 Locations and FRU Details Shells assembly consists of the front shielding cover, the rear shielding cover, supporter of the shielding cover, various panels, carousel covers, the front panel, side plates, the front door and the rear panel.

1 5

3

2

4-2

8

6 7

4

Table 4.1 FRU Details

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

1

801-BA80-00116-00

Damping washer

2

801-BA80-00117-00

SWITCH, Button switchφ16mm, with yellow light, AC/DC24V

4-3

Remarks

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name carousel

Remarks

3

801-BA80-00118-00

Reagent assembly

cover

4

801-BA80-00119-00

Rubber cover

5

801-BX50-00138-00

Air spring, YQ8/18-90-272(B-B)-180N

6

801-BA80-00120-00

Buffer cushion

7

801-BA80-00218-00

Air spring, YQ6/15-84-235(B-B)-80N (±10N)

8

801-BX50-00050-00

Lock catch, MC-37, white

4.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Front & Back Shielding Covers Maintenance time The front and the back shielding cover should be removed if the shielding cover is damaged or the reagent chamber has to be replaced. Tools Cross screwdriver, Hex wrench, M8 solid wrench Steps: 1

Cut off the power of the analyzer to ensure all the assemblies are not in the work status.

2

Open the shielding cover and push outward the circlip on the air spring head with a flathead screwdriver to the position that it cannot be dropped.

3

Hold the body of the shielding cover and remove the air spring.

4

Remove M4X10 screws on the hinge of the shielding cover to remove the cover.

5

To reinstall the shielding cover, please follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse order.

Alignment and confirmation You need to adjust the hinge of the shielding cover to ensure that the front and the back covers have been reinstalled in a proper position.

4.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Side Plates Maintenance time The side plates should be removed if the host PCB or the assemblies at left and right sides of the analyzer need to be maintained. Tools Cross screwdriver Steps: 1

Unscrew the four M4X8 combination screws on the side plates. 4-4

2

Hold the upper rim of the plate and pull it back and lift it slightly to remove the side plates.

3

To reinstall the side plates, please follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse order.

Alignment and confirmation None

4.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel Maintenance time The front panel should be removed if the assemblies in the analyzer need to be maintained. Tools Cross screwdriver Steps: 1

Unscrew rubber plugs of the three screws on the panel, and loosen the three M4X12 combination screws to the position that they cannot be dropped.

2

Open the front door and unscrew the four M4X8 combination screws on the front panel to remove it by pulling it upward and outward.

3

To reinstall the side plates, please follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse order.

Alignment and confirmation You can adjust the gaps between the panels through the three screw holes (long) on the front panel.

4.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Cover Maintenance time The reagent carousel cover should be removed if the reagent carousel assembly needs to be repaired or some of the parts are damaged. Tools Cross screwdriver Steps: 1

Remove all the panels on the reagent carousel cover and unscrew the four screws around the cover.

2

Remove the whole reagent carousel cover with hinges of the front and the rear cover.

4-5

Alignment and confirmation Since the screw holes are long, please note their positions when reinstalling the reagent carousel cover. Try to install the screws to the original position to ensure that the sample injection port is placed correctly.

4.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring Maintenance time The air spring should be replaced if it loses elasticity. Tools Flathead screwdriver Steps: 1

Open the shielding cover and push outward the circlips on both heads of the air spring with a flathead screwdriver to the position that it cannot be dropped.

2

Hold the air spring and pull it out.

3

Install a new air spring.

Alignment and confirmation None

4.1.8 Replacement of Lock Catch Maintenance time The lock catch should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Cross screwdriver Steps: 1

Unscrew the two M4X8 screws to remove the lock catch assembly.

2

Unscrew the M3X8 retaining screws on the lock catch to remove it.

3

Install a new lock catch.

4

Place the new lock catch to the original position.

Alignment and confirmation None

4-6

4.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly 4.2.1 Functions Reaction carousel assembly is situated at the middle and rear of the analyzer, including the body of the reaction carousel, reaction carousel drive assembly, reaction carousel chamber and the reaction carousel sensor. It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the reaction cuvette to the specified position, adding sample/reagent to the cuvette, mixing and washing, together with the sample probe, reagent probe, the mixer and the 8-phase wash probes. It, as well as, provides a constant temperature for the reaction cuvette for analysis. Moving parts for probe R1

Moving parts for probe R2

Mix assembly (sample)

Reagent carousel assembly

Reaction carousel assembly

Auto wash assembly

Mix assembly (reagent)

Moving parts for sample probe

Sample carousel assembly

Syringe assembly

4-7

4.2.2 Locations and FRU details

11

3

No.

2

1

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

1

801-BA80-00051-00

Cables of reaction carousel encoder sensor

2

801-BA10-00097-00

Cables sensor

3

801-BA80-00053-00

High-speed motor assembly

4

801-BX50-00073-00

Cables of slip ring

5

801-BA80-00054-00

Metal plate for cuvette

6

801-BA80-00056-00

Heater wire carousel)

7

801-BA80-00057-00

Temperature sensor wire 1 (for reaction carousel) + parameter

8

801-BA80-00058-00

Temperature sensor wire 2 (for reaction carousel) + parameter

9

801-BA80-00059-00

Temperature sensor wire 3 (for reaction carousel) + parameter

10

801-BA80-00060-00

Temperature switch wire carousel)

11

801-BA80-00164-00

Glass cuvette

4-8

of

carousel

(for

(for

Remarks

home

reaction

protection reaction

Note: 1. For locations of FRU 4~10, please refer to the related descriptions of replacement. 2. For the replacing method of glass cuvette (FRU 11), please refer to the descriptions of optical assembly in this manual.

4.2.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables Maintenance time If the temperature of the reaction carousel is abnormal, please replace the temperature sensor wire 1~3, heater wire and temperature protection switch wire for the reaction carousel. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

/

1

Medical gloves

rubber

Exploded view for installation Skylight cover

M4X8 cross pan head combination screw

M5X12 hexagon socket cap head screws

Reaction carousel body

Please note that these eight 4X10 hexagon socket head screws with glue on the screw head should not be removed

4-9

Lower clamping device M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw

Heater wire for reaction carousel 801-BA80-00056-00

M2.5X12 cross pan head screw Upper clamping device “Temperature sensor wire 2 for reaction carousel” + “Parameter 2” 801-BA80-00058-00

Wire clamping ring

Reaction cuvettes

Temperature protection switch wire for reaction carousel 801-BA80-00060-00 M3X8 cross countersunk head screw

“Temperature sensor wire 3 for reaction carousel” + “Parameter 3” 801-BA80-00059-00

“Temperature sensor wire 1 for reaction carousel” + “Parameter 1” 801-BA80-00057-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the back shielding cover and unscrew the two M5-20 spring screws to remove the shield of the wash station.

3

Open the front shielding cover and remove the mixers and auto wash station on the mix assembly and store them properly to protect the mixer and the wash probe.

4

Rotate the reagent probe to the reagent aspiration position and rotate the sample probe to the sample aspiration position to remove the reaction carousel cover and all the panels around the reaction carousel assembly.

5

Unscrew the three M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the reaction carousel’s skylight cover to remove it. 4-10

6

Unscrew the four M5X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the body of the reaction carousel to remove it. Please take the carousel carefully in order not to damage the reaction cuvettes.

7

Remove all the reaction cuvettes and store them properly.

8

Place the carousel body with the bottom surface upward and unscrew the eight M3X8 cross countersunk head screws on the wire clamping ring to remove it.

9

Remove the temperature sensor wire 1, 2 and 3 for the reaction carousel.

10 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the connectors of the new temperature sensor wire 1, 2 and 3 and the installation holes and place the three sensors into the holes on the body of the reaction carousel. Please ensure the positions of the three sensors are correct, the joints should not be higher than the slot surface of the reaction carousel. Write down the serial numbers and the corresponding parameters of the three sensors which will be used to query the electric resistance value during the alignment. 11 Unscrew the M3X6 cross pan head screw with washer of the ground terminal of temperature protection switch on the reaction carousel to remove the switch wire. 12 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the new switch wire and put it into the slot of the carousel body, and tighten the ground terminal with one M3X6 cross pan head screw with washer (with little threaded glue) onto the carousel body. Traverse the connector of the temperature protection switch wire and the ground terminal through slot of the heat-insulating ring and put it at the front of the carousel. 13 Unscrew the 11 M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on the lower clamping device to remove it. 14 Remove the heater wire for reaction carousel. 15 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the root of the heater wire and place it on the upper clamping device, and align the connector with the slot. Traverse the cable connector of the heater through slot of the heat-insulating ring and put it at the front of the carousel. 16 Put the lower clamping device on the heater and tighten the lower clamping device onto the upper one with 11 M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with

4-11

spring washer. Push the ledge of the heater along the center of a circle as much as possible when tighten the screws. Tighten the screws by the order of across corners to bind the clamping device and the heater seamlessly, so that the heat can be transmitted evenly. 17 Press cables of the heater, the temperature protection switch and the three sensors into the slot of the carousel body, and then install the wire clamping ring onto the carousel body with eight M3X8 countersunk head screws. 18 Install the body of the reaction carousel and the skylight cover by steps mentioned above in a reverse order. Alignment and confirmation Re-configure the related parameters of the sensors after replacing the cables of the sensor, the heater and the temperature protection switch and test the performance of heat-insulating.

NOTE Please be careful when removing the body of reaction carousel to protect the cuvettes and the top of the carousel’s rotary shaft. It is not suggested to remove the upper clamping device. If it is difficult to clean the stains in the cuvette slot, you should remove the parts and clean the interior of the cuvette slot. Do not pull the cables during the installation, especially pay much attention to protect cables of the three sensors. Further decomposition may invalidate the functions of the reaction carousel. The eight M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws shown in the figure cannot be removed; otherwise, the functions of the reaction carousel will become invalid.

4.2.4 Replacement of Metal Plate for Cuvette Maintenance time If the metal plate has no elasticity and cannot retain a cuvette, then it should be replaced. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Sharp nose pliers

/

1

Blade

/

1

/

1

Medical gloves

rubber

Exploded view for installation

4-12

Metal plate of reaction cuvette 801-BA80000054-00 Reaction cuvette slot

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove the reaction carousel body according to the descriptions in 4.2.3 .

3

Remove the cuvette which metal plate needs to be replaced and eight cuvettes on its right and left sides (four for each side), and store them properly.

4

Extract the metal plate about 3~5mm with a blade and grip it out with a sharp nose pliers.

5

Press a new metal plate into the cuvette slot in a correct direction and fix it.

6

Install the parts of reaction carousel body according to the descriptions in 4.2.3 .

Alignment and confirmation None.

NOTE The metal plate should be pressed to the bottom. Please do not do this with a sudden force to avoid bending of the metal plate. Edges of the metal plate may have some small burrs, please be careful when replacing it.

4.2.5 Replacement of Carousel Home Sensor and Encoder Sensor Cables Maintenance time If reaction carousel sensor becomes invalid, please replace cables of the carousel home sensor and the encoder sensor.

4-13

Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation Cables of encoder sensor 801-BA80-00051-00

Sensor bracket

M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw

M3X6 cross pan head screw

Cables of carousel home sensor 801-BA10-00097-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Unscrew the ten M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear panel to remove it.

3

Unscrew the three M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the reaction carousel sensor assembly to remove it. Do not drop the screws into the analyzer.

4

Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head screws retaining cables of the carousel home sensor and the encoder sensor to remove them.

5

Fix cables of the new carousel home sensor and the encoder sensor on the sensor’s bracket using two M3X6 cross pan head screws.

6

Fix the reaction carousel sensor assembly on the large bottom plate using three M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers.

7

After the alignment and the validation, fix the right rear panel on the joint parts of bracket using ten M4X8 cross pan head combination screws.

4-14

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the carousel home sensor and the encoder sensor, you should align and validate the following positions: position of photoelectric collection (according to the descriptions in 7.2.1); positions of the sample probe, reagent probe, mixers and wash probe in the reaction carousel (according to the contents described from 7.2.2 to 7.2.6); positions of sample probe, reagent probe and mixers in the wash reservoir; positions of sample probes in the sample carousel; positions of reagent probes in the reagent carousel; and the positions of sample/reagent bar code reader.

NOTE Please install the sensor according to the identifications of the cable. Do not tighten the screws with a sudden force, in order to protect the sensor.

4.2.6 Replacement of High-speed Motor Maintenance time The high-speed motor should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation

Damping board Large bottom plate High-speed motor assembly 801-BA80-00053-00

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw

WARNING Do not drop a screw into the analyzer. Do not remove the two screws on the damping washer; otherwise, the transmission function will become invalid.

4-15

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Unscrew the ten M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear panel to remove it.

3

Disconnect the motor and unscrew the two M4X10 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer on the high-speed motor to remove it. Do not drop a screw into the analyzer.

4

Fix a new motor on the damping board using two M4X10 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer. Keep the interface direction the same as that in the figure. Please check if the gears are meshed properly before tightening the screws. Coat the teeth of the two meshing gears with grease lubricant (A90-000070---), rotate the gears in opposite directions to distribute the lubricant evenly, and then wipe off the excessive lubricant from the top of the gears.

5

Connect cables of the motor.

6

Fix the right rear panel on the joint parts of bracket using ten M4X8 cross pan head combination screws.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.2.7 Replacement of Slip Ring Cables Maintenance time The cables of the slip ring should be replaced if they are damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation

4-16

M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screw

Driver of slip ring

Cables of slip ring 801-BX50-00073-00

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw Rotating shaft

Figure 4.1 Schematic diagram of replacing cables of slip ring

WARNING The driver of the slip ring should not be installed at the bottom of the cables, it should be kept about 2mm distance from the cables; otherwise, the slip ring may be damaged. Do not tighten screws forcefully to avoid distortion; otherwise, cables of the slip ring will be damaged.

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the back shielding cover and unscrew the two M5-20 spring screws to remove the shield of the wash station.

3

Open the front shielding cover and remove the mixers and auto wash station on the mix assembly and store them properly to protect the mixer and the wash probe.

4

Rotate the reagent probe to the reagent aspiration position and rotate the sample probe to the sample aspiration position to remove the reaction carousel cover and all the panels around the reaction carousel assembly.

5

Unscrew the three M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the reaction carousel’s skylight cover to remove it.

6

Unscrew the four M5X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the

4-17

body of the reaction carousel to remove it. Please take the carousel carefully in order not to damage the reaction cuvettes. 7

Unscrew the three M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer and disconnect the four terminals under the bottom plate of the analyzer to remove the cables of the slip ring.

8

Unscrew the one M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screw on the driver of the slip ring to remove it.

9

Install the driver of the slip ring onto the new cables of slip ring using one M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screw. Please lift the driver about 2mm from the cables and then tighten the screw.

10 Fix the cables of the slip ring to the rotating shaft using the three M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and connect the four terminals under the bottom plate of the analyzer. 11 Install the body of the reaction carousel, the skylight cover, reaction carousel cover assembly, shielding cover of auto wash station and the right rear panel by steps mentioned above in a reverse order.

4.2.8 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette To replace the reaction cuvettes, please refer to the related descriptions in 4.11 .

4-18

4.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly 4.3.1 Module Functions Reagent carousel assembly is situated at the left front of the analyzer, including the outer/inner ring of carousels, reagent chamber, drive assembly and the reagent bar code reader. It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the reagent cuvette to the specified position, add samples together with sample addition assembly. It provides a refrigerating environment, and the reagents stored in such environment can be kept stable with little volatilization. For details, please refer to the following contents. Place reagent: Install a certain number of the reagent cuvettes in authorized specifications onto the reagent carousel and add reagent into the reagent cuvettes, then the sample addition station will aspirate the reagent and dispense it into the reaction cuvette. Refrigerating reagent: Provide 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature environment (2-8°C) to keep the reagent stable with little volatilization. Sequential rotation: With the drive assembly, the reagent carousel sends the specific reagent cuvette to the collection position for aspiration in a certain order. The outer and the inner carousels can be rotated independently. Input reagent data automatically: Bar code reader (optional).

4.3.2 Locations and FRU details 1

2

No. 1

3

4

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00070-00

7

Material Name Outer ring of carousel body

4-19

reagent

Remarks

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

Remarks

2

801-BA80-00072-00

Inner ring of carousel body

reagent

3

801-BA80-00071-00

Base of reagent cuvette

4

801-BA80-00073-00

Reagent assembly

5

801-BX50-00076-00

Cables of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor

Note 1

6

801-BX50-00080-00

Cables of carousel cover sensor

Note 2

7

801-BA80-00053-00

High-speed assembly

chamber

motor

Note: 1. For the position of cables of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor (5), please refer to the related descriptions in 4.3.7 . 2. For the position of the carousel cover sensor (6), please refer to the related description in 4.3.8 .

4.3.3 Replacement of Inner Ring of Reagent Carousel Body Maintenance time The inner ring of the reagent carousel body should be replaced if it is damaged or cannot meet the operation requirements. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation

4-20

Inner reagent carousel body assembly 801-BA80-00072-00

Spring screw PF42-M5-20

Cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel

Stop bolt

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent carousel, left panel, and top panel.

3

Unscrew the two PF42-M5-20 spring screws on the inner ring of reagent carousel body.

4

Lift the handlebars to remove the inner ring of the reagent carousel body assembly.

5

Align the locating hole on the inner reagent carousel body with the stop bolt, and install it onto the cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel, and then tighten it using two PF42-M5-20 spring screws.

6

Reinstall panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent carousel, left panel, and top panel.

NOTE M5 spring screws should be tightened by a cross screwdriver.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4-21

4.3.4 Replacement of Outer Ring of Reagent Carousel Body Maintenance time The outer ring of the reagent carousel should be replaced if it damaged or lots of reagent cuvette bases are damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation Inner ring of reagent carousel body assembly

Spring screw PF42-M5-20

Reagent cuvette base 801-BA80-00071-00

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw

Cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel

Outer ring of reagent carousel body assembly 801-BA80-00072-00

Cover of rotating shaft

M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screw

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent

4-22

carousel, left panel, and top panel. 3

Unscrew the two PF42-M5-20 spring screws on the inner ring of reagent carousel body to remove it.

4

Unscrew the four M4x10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on the cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel to remove it.

5

Unscrew the four M4x20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on the outer ring of reagent carousel body to remove it.

6

Align the locating hole on the outer ring of the reagent carousel body with the stop bolt, and install it onto the cover of rotating shaft, and then tighten it using four M4x20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.

7

Fix the cover on the rotating shaft of reagent carousel using four M4x10 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer.

8

Align the locating hole on the inner reagent carousel body with the stop bolt, and install it onto the cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel, and then tighten it using two PF42-M5-20 spring screws.

9

Reinstall panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent carousel, left panel, and top panel.

NOTE Use stainless screws. Screws should be tightened.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.3.5 Replacement of Reagent Cuvette Base Maintenance time The base of reagent cuvette should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools None. Steps of replacement 1

Remove the reagent cuvette base with your hands.

2

Replace with a new base and install the new one to a proper position.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4-23

4.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Chamber Assembly Maintenance time The reagent chamber should be replaced if it leaks or gets serious rustiness. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation Figure 4.2 Exploded view of reagent chamber assembly Inner ring of reagent carousel body assembly Cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screw

Outer ring of reagent carousel body assembly

Plug

Reagent chamber assembly 801-BA80-00073-00

O-shape washer

Reagent carousel drive assembly Small bottom plate welding part M5X16 hexagon socket cap head screw

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as cover of reagent carousel, left panel, and top panel, and left/right covers of sample carousels and 4-24

the small sample carousel cover, to lift the inner sample carousel body. 3

Remove the two plugs of reagent chamber and the one plugs of sample chamber.

4

Discharge the coolant in reagent chamber completely.

5

Remove the outer/inner rings of reagent carousel body.

6

Disconnect cables of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor and carousel cover sensor.

7

Loosen the clamp on the tubes connected to reagent chamber, pull out liquid feeding/discharging tubes and the two waste tubes.

8

Unscrew the three M5x16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers and lift the reagent chamber to remove it.

9

Fix the new reagent chamber on the small bottom plate welding part using three M5x16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Do not tighten the screws.

10 Position the outer ring of reagent carousel body and adjust the position of the reagent chamber to ensure the circumferential spaces between the two assemblies are distributed uniformly and the outer ring can rotate freely. Then tighten the screws. 11 Install outer ring of reagent carousel body, cover of rotating shaft of reagent carousel and the inner ring of reagent carousel body. 12 Connect liquid feeding/discharging tubes, and the two waste tubes. Fasten the clamps and wrap the joints with heat preservation sponge. 13 Connect cables of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor and carousel cover sensor. 14 Prime with coolant and insert plugs of the reagent and the sample chambers. 15 Install panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as inner sample carousel body, over of reagent carousel, left panel, and top panel, and left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel cover. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the reagent chamber, you need to align and validate positions of reagent probe and bar code reader according to the descriptions in 7.2.4.

4-25

4.3.7 Replacement Sensor Cables

of

Reagent

Refrigeration

Temperature

Maintenance time If the refrigeration does not work, then replace the cables of temperature sensor. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Sharp nose pliers

/

1

Blade

/

1

Exploded view for installation Figure 4.3 Exploded view of cables of refrigeration temperature sensor

Outer sponge

Slash a breach on the sponge with a blade

Cables of temperature sensor 801-BX50-00076-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove panels around the reagent carousel assembly, such as left panel and top panel.

3

Unscrew the ten M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear panel to remove it.

4

Slash a breach on the sponge with a blade and expose the cables of the sensor.

5

Clamp the cable with the sharp nose pliers and unscrew it out from M5 mounting screw.

6

Daub heat-conducting glue on the surface of reagent refrigeration temperature sensor and the threaded position, screw the sensor into the threaded hole with your hands and tighten it using the sharp nose pliers.

4-26

7

Coat some glue on the split on sponge for adhering and wrap it with adhesive tapes to avoid any leaks.

8

Reinstall the parts, such as right rear panel, left panel and top panel.

NOTE Please tighten the sensor carefully to avoid any damages. Do not pull the cables forcefully.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.3.8 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor Cables Maintenance time If the carousel cover sensor does not work, then replace the cables of it. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Blade

/

1

Exploded view for installation Figure 4.4 Exploded view of carousel cover sensor Sponge on carousel cover

Locking ring of chamber

Cables of carousel cover sensor 801-BX50-00080-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove panels, such as left lower panel.

3

Reveal cables of the carousel cover sensor.

4

Disconnect the sensor and remove it.

5

Chuck the new sensor into the reagent chamber along the slot of the mounting

4-27

ring, and seal it with sponge. 6

Connect cables of the sensor.

7

Reinstall parts, such as left lower panel.

NOTE Do not tear the sponge. Do not pull the cables forcefully during the installation.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.3.9 Replacement of High-speed Motor Maintenance time The high-speed motor should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation Figure 4.5 Exploded view of high-speed motor

Damping board of motor

High-speed motor assembly 801-BA80-00053-00

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

4-28

2

Remove panels, such as left side panel and left front panel.

3

Unscrew the two M4x10 hexagon socket cap head screws on the high-speed motor to remove it.

4

Fix the new motor on the damping board using two M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and ensure the gears are meshed properly. Tighten the screws. Coat the teeth of the two meshing gears with grease lubricant (A90-000070---), rotate the gears in opposite directions to distribute the lubricant evenly, and then wipe off the excessive lubricant from the top of the gears.

NOTE Please note the direction of the connector. Do not drop a screw into the analyzer during the replacing procedures. Do not remove the two screws on the damping washer; otherwise, the transmission function will become invalid. Screws should be tightened.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4-29

4.4 Sample Carousel Assembly 4.4.1 Module Functions Sample carousel assembly is situated at the right front of the analyzer, including the outer and inner sample carousel body, sample refrigeration assembly, drive assembly, sample chamber, outer/inner sample carousel sensor and the sample bar code reader. It is used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the sample cuvette to the specified position, completing sample aspirations together with sample probe. For details, please refer to the following contents. Carry samples: Sample containers (cuvettes or micro tubes) with samples are located on the sample carousel, and the sample collection station will aspirate samples and dispense them to the reaction cuvettes. Sequential rotation: With the drive assembly, the sample carousel sends the specific sample cuvette to the collection position for aspiration in a certain order. The outer and the inner carousels can be rotated independently. Auto sample identification: Bar code reader. Refrigeration of the fourth ring of sample carousel: Provide 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature environment.

4.4.2 Locations and FRU details 1

3

4-30

6

8 No.

FRU/Material Code

7 Material Name

1

801-BA80-00061-00

Outer sample carousel body

2

801-BA80-00062-00

Cuvette holder base 2

3

801-BA80-00063-00

Inner sample carousel body

4

801-BA80-00064-00

16 cuvette holder

5

801-BA80-00065-00

13 cuvette adapter

holder

6

801-BA80-00066-00

Sample assembly

motor

7

801-BA10-00096-00

Cables sensor

8

801-BA10-00097-00

Cables of carousel home sensor

of

Remarks

encoder

Note: 1. For the position of cuvette holder base (2), please refer to the descriptions in 4.4.3 . 2. For the positions of 16 cuvette holder (4) and 13 cuvette holder adapter (5), please refer to the descriptions in 4.4.4 .

4-31

4.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Body and Cuvette Holder Base 2 Maintenance time If the outer sample carousel body is damaged or rusted, or the cuvette holder base 2 is damaged, please replace them. Tools Name

Code

Cross screwdriver

/

Qty 1

Exploded view for installation Handlebars on outer sample carousel

M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw

Cuvette holder base 2 801-BA80-00062-00

Outer sample carousel body 801-BA80-00061-00

Lower outer sample carousel

Supporting plate for outer carousel

Stop bolt

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel cover.

3

Lift the handlebars to remove the outer sample carousel body assembly.

4

Unscrew the M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw on the cuvette holder base 2 to remove it.

5

Place the new cuvette holder base 2 to the proper place and fix it on the lower of outer sample carousel using one M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw. 4-32

6

Align the two locating holes on the outer sample carousel body with the stop bolt and place it on the supporting plate.

7

Reinstall left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel cover. Note: If the whole outer sample carousel body has been replaced, perform step 1 to step 4.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Body, 16 Cuvette Holder and 13 Cuvette Holder Adapter Maintenance time If the inner sample carousel body or corresponding parts are damaged or rusted, or the 16 cuvette holder and 13 cuvette holder adapter are damaged, please replace them. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code

Qty

/

1

Exploded view for installation Inner sample carousel body assembly 801-BA80-00063-00

M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw

Upper inner sample carousel

16 cuvette holder 801-AB80-00064-00

Lower inner sample carousel

13 cuvette holder adapter 801-AB80-00064-00

Stop bolt

Adapter board on inner ring

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel 4-33

cover. 3

Lift the handlebars to remove the inner sample carousel body assembly.

4

Loosen 13 cuvette holder adapter and push it upward to remove it.

5

Install a new 13 cuvette holder adapter onto the inner sample carousel properly until you hear a click.

6

Unscrew the M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw on 16 cuvette holder to remove it.

7

Place the new 16 cuvette holder to the proper place and fix it on the lower of inner sample carousel using one M3X8 stainless cross countersunk head screw.

8

Align the two locating holes on the inner sample carousel body with the stop bolt and place it on the supporting plate.

9

Reinstall left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel cover. Note: •

If the whole inner sample carousel body has been replaced, perform step 1 to step 6.

•

If only 13 cuvette holder adapter has been replaced, perform step 1, 2, 3, and 6.

•

If only 16 cuvette holder has been replaced, perform step 1, 4, 5, and 6.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly Maintenance time The sample carousel motor should be replaced if it is damaged or it does not work properly. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Synchronous belt of tension alignment tool

BA30-K24

1

Synchronous belt of tension alignment tool

BA40-K02

1

4-34

Exploded view for installation

Large bottom plate

Inner sample carousel motor assembly

M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screw

Outer sample carousel motor assembly

Mounting plate for inner motor

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw

Mounting plate for outer motor

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw

Sample carousel motor assembly 801-BA80-00066-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Unscrew the four M4X8 stainless cross pan head combination screws on right side panel to remove it.

3

Unscrew the two M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers from the upper of large bottom plate and unscrew the two M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers from the lower of 4-35

large bottom plate on inner/outer sample carousel motor. 4

Loosen the synchronous belt and disconnect the inner/outer sample carousel motor.

5

Remove inner/outer sample carousel motor.

6

Unscrew the two M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on sample carousel motor to remove it from inner/outer sample carousel motor.

7

Fix the new sample carousel motor onto the motor’s mounting plate using two M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.

8

Set the side of the motor far from the center of sample carousel onto the large bottom plate using two M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with large flat and spring washers, and set the other side of the motor using two M4X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with flat and spring washers. Do not tighten the screws.

9 Sleeve synchronous belt TBN340XL037 on big pulley (on outer sample carousel) and small pulley (on outer sample carousel motor) and sleeve synchronous belt 220XL037 on big pulley (on inner sample carousel) and small pulley (on inner sample carousel motor) to adjust the tension with BA30-K24 (for inner tension) and BA40-K02 (for outer tension) to a specific value, and then tighten the screws. 10 Connect inner/outer sample carousel motor. 11 Fix the right side panel on the bracket welding parts using four M4X8 stainless cross pan head combination screws. 12 Reinstall left/right covers of sample carousels and the small sample carousel cover. Note: Sample carousel motors are used in both inner and outer sample carousels. The replacement methods for them are the same. Alignment and confirmation None.

4.4.6 Replacement of Encoder Sensor and Carousel Home Sensor Cables Maintenance time If sample carousel sensor becomes invalid, please replace cables of the encoder sensor and the carousel home sensor. 4-36

Tools Name

Code

Cross screwdriver

/

Qty 1

Exploded view for installation

Inner sample carousel sensor

Outer sample carousel sensor

M4X12 cross pan head combination screw

4-37

Bracket for inner carousel sensor

Bracket for outer carousel sensor

Mounting plate for sensor

Mounting plate for sensor

M3X6 cross pan head combination screw M3X6 cross pan head combination screw

Cables of encoder sensor 801-BA10-00096-00 M3X6 cross pan head screw

M3X6 cross pan head screw

Cables of carousel home sensor 801-BA10-00096-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Unscrew the four M4X8 stainless cross pan head combination screws on right side panel to remove it.

3

Disconnect cables of carousel home sensor and encoder sensor.

4

Unscrew the three M4X12 cross pan head combination screws on inner sample carousel sensor (two screws on outer sample carousel sensor) from the lower of the large bottom plate.

5

Remove the inner (or the outer) sample carousel sensor from the large bottom plate.

6

Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head combination screws on the sensor’s mounting plate to remove it from the bracket of inner (or outer) sensor together with the encoder sensor.

7

Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head screws on cables of encoder sensor to remove it from the sensor’s mounting plate.

8

Fix the new cables of encoder sensor on the sensor’s mounting plate using two 4-38

M3X6 cross pan head screws. 9

Install the sensor’s mounting plate together with cables of the encoder sensor onto the bracket of inner (or outer) sensor using two M3X6 cross pan head screws.

10 Unscrew the two M3X6 cross pan head screws on the cables of carousel home sensor to remove it from the bracket of inner (or outer) sensor. 11 Fix the new cables of carousel home sensor onto the bracket of inner (or outer) sensor using two M3X6 cross pan head screws. 12 Fix inner (or outer) sample carousel sensor onto the large bottom plate using three M4X12 cross pan head combination screws (two screws on outer sample carousel sensor). 13 Connect cables of the sensor. 14 Fix the right side panel on the bracket welding parts using four M4X8 stainless cross pan head combination screws. Note: •

Cables of the encoder sensor and the carousel home sensor are used in both inner and outer sensor assemblies. The replacement methods for them are the same.

•

If only the encoder sensor has been replaced, do not perform step 10 to step 11.

•

If only the carousel home sensor has been replaced, do not perform step 6 to step 9.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing cables of the encoder sensor and the carousel home sensor, you need to align and validate them according to the descriptions in 7.2.3.

4-39

4.5 Syringe Assembly 4.5.1 Module Functions The syringe assembly is situated at the right front side of the analyzer, including sample syringe drive module, reagent syringe drive module and the clog detection T-piece. It is mainly used to provide motivity for aspirating and dispensing the samples/reagents through perfect pulling and pushing actions of the plunger.

4.5.2 Locations and FRU details 2

6 No.

4 FRU/Material Code

5

1

3 Material Name

1

801-BA80-00074-00

Sample module

syringe

2

801-BA80-00075-00

Reagent syringe drive module

3

801-BA80-00076-00

Syringe 42 step motor assembly

4

801-3101-00001-00

Syringe 250μl

5

801-BA80-00047-00

Syringe 1ml

6

801-BX50-00088-00

Clog detection T-piece

Remarks

drive

4.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250μl and Reagent Syringe 1ml Maintenance time The sample or the reagent syringe should be replaced if leaks/damages occur or it’s 4-40

time for scheduled maintenance. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code

Qty

/

1

Exploded view for installation Syringe T-piece

Anchor plate

Screw tightener

Sample syringe 250ul 801-3101-00001-00

Reagent syringe 1ml 801-BA80-00047-00

Retaining screws

Steps of replacement 1

Open the left front door of the analyzer and unscrew the six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the left front panel to remove it.

2

Loosen the retaining screws on sample (reagent) syringe. Do not remove the screws.

3

Loosen screws on anchor plate of sample (reagent) syringe to remove the anchor plate and screws. Store them properly.

4

Loosen the sample (reagent) syringe to be replaced and remove it. Do not drop the plastic washer between T piece and the syringe.

5

Screw the new sample (reagent) syringe into the T piece tightly.

6

Install the sample (reagent) syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it using two anchor plates and four screws. Make the top of V-shape bracket level to

4-41

scale 7.5 and scale 15 of the syringe during the installation. 7

Rotate the motor pulley of the syringe assembly to move the syringe plunger to the uppermost end, and then rotate the motor pulley counterclockwise to move the syringe plunger downwards for 1 to 2 scales. Gently tighten the syringe plunger screw to fix the front end of the plunger on the driver. Exercise caution to prevent the syringe plunger rod from deviating while tightening the retaining screw.

8

Fix the right front panel on the welding parts of bracket using six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws. Note: •

The replacement methods for the sample syringe and the reagent syringe are the same.

•

Tighten the four screws alternately. Do not tighten them forcefully.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules Maintenance time The sample or the reagent syringe drive module should be replaced if errors occur or it cannot work properly. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Exploded view for installation

4-42

M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw

Syringe T-piece

Anchor plate

Screw tightener

Reagent syringe 1ml

Sample syringe 250ul

Reagent syringe drive module 801-BA80-00075-00

Sample syringe drive module 801-BA80-00074-00

Welding parts of syringe bracket M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screw

Retaining screw

Steps of replacement 1

Open the left front door of the analyzer and unscrew the six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the left front panel to remove it.

2

Loosen the retaining screws on sample (reagent) syringe to remove the screws.

3

Loosen screws on anchor plate of sample (reagent) syringe to remove the anchor plate and screws. Store them properly.

4

Remove the sample (reagent) syringe together with T piece.

5

Disconnect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module.

6

Unscrew the four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on sample (reagent) syringe drive module.

7

Remove the sample (reagent) syringe drive module.

8

Fix the new sample (reagent) syringe drive module on the welding parts of syringe bracket using four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.

9

Connect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module.

10 Install the sample (reagent) syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it using two anchor plates and four screws. Make the top of V-shape bracket level to

4-43

scale 7.5 and scale 15 of the syringe during the installation. 11 Rotate the motor pulley of the syringe assembly to move the syringe plunger to the uppermost end, and then rotate the motor pulley counterclockwise to move the syringe plunger downwards for 1 to 2 scales. Gently tighten the syringe plunger screw to fix the front end of the plunger on the driver. Exercise caution to prevent the syringe plunger rod from deviating while tightening the retaining screw. 12 Fix the right front panel on the welding parts of bracket using six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws. Note: •

The replacement methods for the sample and reagent syringe drive modules are the same.

•

Tighten the four screws alternately. Do not tighten them forcefully.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly Maintenance time The syringe 42 step motor should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Synchronous belt of tension alignment tool for syringe

BA31-K01

1

Exploded view for installation

4-44

M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw

Synchronous belt

Wheel of synchronous

Syringe 42 step motor assembly 801-BA80-00076-00

Steps of replacement 1

Open the left front door of the analyzer and unscrew the six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the left front panel to remove it.

2

Loosen the retaining screws on sample (reagent) syringe to remove the screws.

3

Loosen screws on anchor plate of sample (reagent) syringe to remove the anchor plate and screws. Store them properly.

4

Remove the sample (reagent) syringe together with T piece.

5

Disconnect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module.

6

Unscrew the four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on sample (reagent) syringe drive module.

7

Remove the sample (reagent) syringe drive module.

8

Unscrew the four M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the syringe 42 step motor.

4-45

9

Remove the syringe 42 step motor.

10 Fix the new syringe 42 step motor on the syringe base using four M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, adjust the tension of the synchronous belt to a proper value using BA31-K01, and tighten the screws. 11 Fix the sample (reagent) syringe drive module on the welding parts of syringe bracket using four M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. 12 Connect cables of sample (reagent) syringe drive module. 13 Install the sample (reagent) syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it using two anchor plates and four screws. Make the top of V-shape bracket level to scale 7.5 and scale 15 of the syringe during the installation. 14 Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the screws on the far side of syringe plunger (15~20mm from syringe). 15 Fix the right front panel on the welding parts of bracket using six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws. Note: •

Syringe 42 step motors are used in both sample and reagent syringe drive modules, and the replacement methods for them are the same.

•

Tighten the four screws alternately. Do not tighten them forcefully.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece Maintenance time The clog detection T-piece assembly should be replaced if leaks/damages occur or it cannot work properly. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code /

Qty 1

Exploded view for installation

4-46

Welding parts of syringe bracket M3X8 cross pan head screws with washers

Clog detection T-piece 801-BX50-00088-00

Steps of replacement 1

Open the left front door of the analyzer and unscrew the six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the left front panel to remove it.

2

Disconnect the clog detection sensor.

3

Loosen the two connectors and pull out tubes.

4

Unscrew the two M3X8 cross pan head screws with washers on clog detection T-piece assembly to remove it.

5

Install the new clog detection T-piece assembly on the welding parts of syringe bracket using two M3X8 cross pan head screws with washers.

6

Connect cables of the sensor and the tubes again.

7

Fix the right front panel on the welding parts of bracket using six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws. Note: Do not splash water on the clog detection board.

Alignment and confirmation None.

4-47

4.6 Mixer Assembly 4.6.1 Module Functions The mixer assembly, located in the middle back part of the whole unit, consists of the mixer drive assembly, mixer transmission assembly, mixers, shell, and other parts. It is mainly used to: •

Stir the reaction liquid in each cuvette.

•

Move to specified positions according to the sequencing of the whole unit.

4.6.2 Locations and FRU Details

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

1

801-BA80-00024-00

Mixer drive assembly

2

801-BA80-00149-00

Synchronous belt B175MXL6.4

3

801-BA20-00116-00

Synchronous copper

4

801-BA80-00023-00

Mixer transmission assembly

5

801-BA80-00022-00

Mixer motor assembly

6

801-BA80-00162-00

Mixer

7

801-BX50-00122-00

Mixer rotary sensor cable

4-48

pulley

P16MXL6.4DF

Remarks

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

8

801-BA80-00148-00

3-probe/mixer assembly

horizontal

9

801-BX50-00121-00

Mixer vertical sensor cable

10

801-BA80-00025-00

Vertical motor assembly

Remarks motor

4.6.3 Replacement of Mixers Maintenance time The mixers should be replaced if they are bent or damaged. Tools Name Medical gloves

rubber

Code /

Qty 1 pair

Removing steps 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Grab the upper part of the mixer and then pull the mixer upwards to remove it.

4

Grab the upper part of the new mixer, align the mixer with the installation hole, and then press the mixer until you cannot proceed any more.

NOTE When removing the mixer, keep it vertical and do not apply force from an inclining direction to prevent the mixer from being scratched or deformed. Put the removed mixer in a mixer package. After removing the mixer, do not touch the paddle with your hands. When installing a mixer, make sure that it is fixed in place and pressed downwards until it can no longer proceed.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing a mixer, you are not required to adjust the horizontal or vertical parameters but to check if it has been installed properly. Press the mixer gently and check if it can no longer proceed. If yes, it means that the mixer has been installed properly.

4.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Motor Assembly Maintenance time The mixer motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged.

4-49

Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common cross screwdriver

/

1

Short cross screwdriver

/

1

Medical rubber / 1 pair gloves Figure 4.6 Exploded view for installation

Mixer 801-BA80-00162-00 Cross pan head screw M3X6 with washer Mixer upper cover assembly Cross pan head combination screw M3X8

Mixer upper cover assembly Mixer transmission assembly 801-BA80-00xxx-00

Mixer motor assembly 801-BA80-00022-00

Optical coupler adapter board

Mixer lower cover assembly

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X20

Cross pan head anti-off screw M3X10

Spline shaft

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover. 4-50

3

Grab the upper part of the mixer and then pull the mixer upwards to remove it. Put the removed mixer in a mixer package or in other appropriate places.

4

Loosen the three M3X10 cross pan head anti-off screws on the lower mixer cover assembly, and then remove the lower mixer cover assembly.

5

Loosen the three M3X6 cross pan head screws on the upper mixer cover assembly, and then remove the upper mixer cover assembly.

6

Unplug the mixer motor cable.

7

Loosen the three M3X8 cross pan head combination screws fixing the mixer motor assembly, and then remove the mixer motor assembly.

8

Coat the gear of the new mixer motor assembly with little high-speed long-time oil MI-SETRAL-LI/PD1, and then fix the new mixer motor assembly on the mounting plate with three M3X8 cross pan head combination screws.

9

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the motor cable, upper/lower mixer cover assemblies, mixers, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the mixer motor assembly, choose one of the following two methods to check the replacement: 1

Execute the Stir/Wash instruction on the Macro Instruction window, and then check for noise and alarms while the mixer transmission assembly is working.

2

Running a clinical chemistry, and then check for noise and alarms while the mixer transmission assembly is working.

NOTE While replacing the mixer motor assembly, exercise caution to prevent the motor gear teeth from being damaged. Do not apply too much oil on the motor gear; otherwise, the motor may lose steps. To solve this problem, execute the Stir/Wash instruction for several times until the error disappears. If an alarm is given indicating abnormal rotation speed, check if the motor cable and mixer motor assembly have been installed correctly.

4.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler Conversion Board Maintenance time The mixer rotation speed optical coupler conversion board should be replaced if it is 4-51

impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common cross screwdriver

/

1

Short cross screwdriver

/

1

Medical gloves

/

1 pair

rubber

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Grab the upper part of the mixer and then pull the mixer upwards to remove it. Put the removed mixer in a mixer package or in other appropriate places.

4

Loosen the three M3X10 cross pan head anti-off screws fixing the lower mixer cover assembly, and then remove the lower mixer cover assembly.

5

Loosen the three M3X6 cross pan head screws fixing the upper mixer cover assembly, and then remove the upper mixer cover assembly.

6

Unplug the cable of the rotation speed optical coupler conversion board.

7

Loosen the M2.5X4 cross pan head screw fixing the optical coupler conversion board, and then remove the conversion board.

8

Fix the new conversion board on the mounting plate with an M2.5X4 cross pan head screw.

9

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the optical coupler conversion board cable, upper/lower mixer cover assemblies, mixers, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the mixer rotation speed optical coupler conversion board, choose one of the following two methods to check the replacement: 1

Execute the Stir/Wash instruction on the Macro Instruction window, and then check for alarms during the stirring/washing process.

2

Running a clinical chemistry, and then check for alarms during the measurement.

4-52

NOTE If an alarm is given indicating abnormal rotation speed, check whether the mixers can rotate or not. If yes, it indicates that the sensor cable or sensor itself goes wrong; otherwise, check if the mixer motors are working normally.

4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly Maintenance time The mixer transmission assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common cross screwdriver

/

1

Short cross screwdriver

/

1

Medical gloves

/

1 pair

rubber

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Grab the upper part of the mixer and then pull the mixer upwards to remove it. Put the removed mixer in a mixer package or in other appropriate places.

4

Loosen the three M3X10 cross pan head anti-off screws fixing the lower mixer cover assembly, and then remove the lower mixer cover assembly.

5

Loosen the three M3X6 cross pan head screws fixing the upper mixer cover assembly, and then remove the upper mixer cover assembly.

6

Unplug the cables of the rotation speed optical coupler and step motor, and then remove the straps.

7

Loosen the two M3X20 hexagon socket cap head screws fixing the supporting flange and spline shaft, and then remove the mixer transmission assembly.

8

Fix the new mixer transmission assembly on the spline shaft with two M3X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.

9

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the optical coupler conversion board cable, step motor cable, upper/lower mixer cover

4-53

assemblies, mixers, and other parts. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the mixer transmission assembly, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.6.7 Replacement of 3-probe/mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly Maintenance time The 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly rotary transmission belt S3M tension alignment tool

BA80-TF25

1

Medical rubber gloves

/

1 pair

Figure 4.7 Exploded view for installation

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X12 Mixer motor support Mixer 801-BA80-00162-00 Synchronous cog belt, endless belt, 84-tooth, S3M 6mm wide

Steps of replacement

4-54

1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Remove the panels around the mixer assembly, such as upper panel, diluted wash position panel, etc.

4

Unplug the mixer motor cable.

5

Loosen the four M3X12 hexagon socket head screws with spring and flat washers on the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the assembly.

6

Use four M3X12 hexagon socket head screws with spring and flat washers to fix the 3-probe/mixer horizontal assembly on the support. Do not tighten the screws until you used the S3M tension alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

7

Connect the mixer motor cable.

8

Install the upper panel, diluted wash position panel, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the 3-probe mixer horizontal motor assembly, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.6.8 Replacement of Synchronous Cog Belt (Endless Belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm Wide) Maintenance time The mixer transmission assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common screwdriver

cross

/

1

Short screwdriver

cross

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly rotary transmission belt S3M tension alignment tool

BA80-TF25

1

Medical rubber gloves

/

1 pair

4-55

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Remove the panels around the mixer assembly, such as upper panel, diluted wash position panel, etc.

4

Remove the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

5

Loosen the four M3X12 socket head screws with spring and flat washers on the 3-mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) while leaving over the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly and other retaining screws.

6

Sleeve the new cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) on the synchronous pulley, use the S3M tension alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then tighten the retaining screws on the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly.

7

Install the mixer drive assembly, upper panel, diluted wash position panel and other parts according to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous cog belt, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly Maintenance time The mixer drive assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common screwdriver

cross

/

1

Short screwdriver

cross

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Medical rubber gloves

/

1 pair

4-56

Figure 4.8 Exploded view for installation

Mixer drive assembly 801-BA80-00024-00 Mixer rotary sensor 801-BX50-00122-00

Mixer vertical sensor 801-BX50-00121-00

Anchor plate Cross countersunk head screw M3X6

Cross pan head screw M3X6 Support Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X16

Mixer vertical motor assembly 801-BA80-00025-00

Synchronous pulley .P16MXL6.4DF 801-BA20-00116-00 Synchronous belt .175MXL6.4 801-BA80-00149-00 Hexagon socket cap head screw M5X20

Cross pan head screw M3X6 with washer

Shielding cover

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Remove the panels around the mixer assembly, such as upper panel, diluted wash position panel, etc.

4

Loosen the six M4X8 cross pan head combination screws on the left rear panel, and then remove the left rear panel.

5

Loosen the ten M4X10 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear panel, and then remove the right rear panel.

6

Remove the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

7

Remove the connectors on the motor cable and sensor cable of the mixer transmission assembly.

8

Unplug all motor cables and sensor cables on the mixer drive assembly.

9

Loosen the three M5X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the mixer drive assembly, and then remove the mixer drive assembly.

10 Fix the new mixer drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three M5X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure to lead the motor cables and sensor cables through the spline shaft prior to the

4-57

installation. 11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the motor and sensor cables of the mixer drive assembly and mixer transmission assembly, mixer transmission assembly, left/right rear panels, upper panel, and so on. Note: Connect connectors to the mixer transmission assembly motor and sensor cables after leading the cables through the supporting flange. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the mixer drive assembly, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.6.10 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF Maintenance time The synchronous pulley should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common screwdriver

cross

/

1

Short screwdriver

cross

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Medical rubber gloves

/

1 pair

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer on the synchronous pulley, and then remove the synchronous pulley.

3

Fix the new synchronous pulley on the small pulley axle using one M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer, use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then tighten the screw.

4

Install the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

4-58

Note: Prior to installing the new pulley, clean the new small pulley axle and apply new grease lubricant on it. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous pulley, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.6.11 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4 Maintenance time The synchronous belt should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common screwdriver

cross

/

1

Short screwdriver

cross

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Medical rubber gloves

/

1 pair

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with wash on the mixer vertical motor assembly.

4

Loosen the two M3X6 cross countersunk head screws on the anchor plate and then remove the synchronous belt.

5

Sleeve the new synchronous belt on the pulley of the mixer vertical motor assembly, and then fix the mixer vertical motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

6

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate,

4-59

mixer drive assembly, and other parts. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous belt, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.6.12 Replacement of Mixer Vertical Motor Assembly Maintenance time The mixer vertical motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common screwdriver

cross

/

1

Short screwdriver

cross

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Medical rubber gloves

/

1 pair

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the mixer vertical motor assembly.

4

Fix the new mixer vertical motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the synchronous belt on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

5

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate, mixer drive assembly, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation

4-60

After replacing the mixer vertical motor assembly, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.6.13 Replacement of Mixer Rotary/Vertical Sensor Cables Maintenance time The mixer rotary/vertical sensor cables should be replaced when they are damaged. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Common screwdriver

cross

/

1

Short screwdriver

cross

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Medical rubber gloves

/

1 pair

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X6 cross pan head screw on the mixer rotary or vertical sensor cable, and then remove the cable.

3

Fix the new mixer rotary or vertical sensor cable on the mixer drive assembly using one M3X6 cross pan head screw.

4

Install the mixer transmission assembly according to section 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the sensor cables, adjust and check the horizontal and vertical positions of the mixers according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4-61

4.7 Sample Probe Assembly 4.7.1 Module Functions The sample probe unit, located in the right front of the whole unit, consists of the sample probe drive assembly, arm assembly and sample probe assembly. It is mainly used to aspirate/dispense samples in reaction cuvettes and get washed according to the sequencing of the while unit.

4.7.2 Locations and FRU details 5

4

3

6 12

11 7

10

8

9

No.

2 1

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

Remarks

1

801-BA80-00034-00

Sample probe drive assembly

2

801-BA40-00179-00

Probe vertical sensor cable

3

801-BA80-00037-00

Sample probe arm assembly

4

801-BA80-00174-00

Sample probe assembly

5

801-BA80-00029-00

Anticollision spring

6

245H031-000040-00

Synchronous cog belt (endless belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm wide)

7

801-BA80-00148-00

3-probe/mixer motor assembly

8

801-BX50-00129-00

59 step motor assembly

9

801-BA80-00149-00

Synchronous belt B175MXL6.4

10

801-BA20-00116-00

Synchronous P16MXL6.4DF copper

4-62

horizontal

pulley

No code

FRU

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

Remarks

11

C-BA40-21-61735

Probe horizontal obstruct detection sensor cable

No code

FRU

12

C-BA40-21-61733

Probe rotary sensor cable

No code

FRU

4.7.3 Replacement of Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Sample Probe Arm Assembly Maintenance time The sample probe should be replaced if it is bent or rusted; and the anticollision spring should be replaced if it is impaired. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Figure 4.9 Exploded view for installation

Washer Sample probe arm assembly 801-BA80-00037-00

Arm cover Spring guide post Anti-collision spring 801-BA80-00029-00

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X12

Sample probe assembly 801-BA80-00174-00

Removing steps 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

4-63

2

Open the front shielding cover.

3

Grab the probe arm cover by its middle part with your hands and then pull the two long edges from opposite directions to remove the cover.

4

Loosen the tube connector and unplug the fluid level sensor cable. If you are going to replace the entire arm assembly, remove the connector from the sensor cable.

5

Remove the spring guide post and the anticollision spring.

6

Remove the sample probe assembly.

7

Loosen the two M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the sample probe arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly.

8

Fix the new sample probe arm assembly on the spline shaft using two M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.

9

Lead the new sample probe assembly through the mixer arm and support sleeve.

10 Fix the new anticollision spring on the mixer arm using the spring guide post. 11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the tube connector, sensor cable and mixer arm cover. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the sample probe assembly, anticollision spring and arm assembly, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

NOTE When installing/removing the probe assembly and tube connector, exercise caution to prevent dropping off the white washer at connection joint. Exercise caution to prevent dropping off the anticollision spring into the instrument during installation/removing. Handle the sample probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being bent or damaged. Prevent dropping off screws and spring washers into the instrument during installation/removing. To install the sample probe assembly, insert the sample probe into the support sleeve, and then install the anticollision spring and guide post. Exercise caution to prevent the probe riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of the guide post. Move the sample probe up and down and check if it can move smoothly. If it fails to move smoothly, readjust the spring guide post. To install the arm cover, first lower its end part to make the foam touch the arm base, push the arm cover forwards without touching the front strengthening rib, and then press the arm cover to the arm until you hear a click.

4-64

4.7.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M) Maintenance time The 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6mm wide) should be replaced if they are impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly rotary transmission belt S3M tension alignment tool

BA80-TF25

1

Figure 4.10 Exploded view for installation

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

4-65

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Remove the panels around the sample probe assembly, such as ISE module cover, diluted wash position panel, etc.

4

Unplug the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable.

5

Loosen the four M3X12 socket head screws with spring and flat washers on the 3-mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the 3-mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6mm wide).

6

Fix the new 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly on the support using three M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, and then sleeve the new cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) on the synchronous pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the S3M tension alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

7

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable, ISE module cover, and diluted wash position panel.

Alignment and confirmation N/A.

4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly Maintenance time The sample probe drive assembly or its part should be replaced if they are impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Figure 4.11 Exploded view for installation

4-66

Vertical sensor 801-BA40-00179-00

Horizontal obstruct detection sensor

Cross pan head screw M3X6 Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X16

59 step motor assembly 801-BX50-001295-00

Sample probe drive assembly 801-BA80-00034-00 Cross Anchor countersunk plate head screw M3X6 Cross pan head screw M3X6 with washer

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X8 Synchronous Hexagon socket cap pulley .P16MXL6.4DF head screw M5X20 801-BA20-00116-00

Shielding cover Synchronous belt .175MXL6.4 801-BA80-00149-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover and left/right front doors, and then remove the ISE module cover, diluted wash position panel and front panel.

3

Remove the sample probe arm assembly according to section 4.7.3 Replacement of Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Sample Probe Arm Assembly.

4

Unplug the motor cable, sensor cable, and fluidic tube.

5

Loosen the three M5X20 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer on the sample probe drive assembly, and then remove the sample probe drive assembly.

6

Fix the new sample probe drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three M5X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure to lead the fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the installation.

7

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to connect the motor cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the sample probe arm assembly, ISE module cover, diluted wash position panel, front panel and other parts. Note: Connect connectors to the sample probe drive assembly sensor cable after leading the cable through the supporting flange.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the sample probe drive assembly, align the sample probe to the 4-67

reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.7.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF Maintenance time The synchronous pulley should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer on the synchronous pulley, and then remove the synchronous pulley.

3

Fix the new synchronous pulley on the small pulley axle using one M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer, use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then tighten the screw.

4

Install the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly.

Note: Prior to installing the new pulley, clean the new small pulley axle and apply new grease lubricant on it. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous pulley, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.7.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4 Maintenance time The synchronous belt should be replaced if it is damaged.

4-68

Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with wash on the mixer vertical motor assembly.

4

Loosen the two M3X6 cross countersunk head screws on the anchor plate and then remove the synchronous belt.

5

Sleeve the new synchronous belt on the pulley of the 59 step motor assembly, and then fix the 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

6

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate, sample probe drive assembly, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous belt, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.7.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly Maintenance time The 59 step motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools 4-69

Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the 59 step motor assembly.

4

Fix the new 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the synchronous belt on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

5

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate, sample probe drive assembly, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the 59 step motor, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.7.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor Maintenance time The cables of the probe rotary sensor, obstruct detection sensor and vertical sensor should be replaced if they are damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

4-70

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X6 cross pan head screw on the cable of the probe rotary sensor, obstruct detection sensor or vertical sensor, and then remove the cable.

3

Fix the new sensor cable on the sample probe drive assembly using one M3X6 cross pan head screw.

4

Install the sample probe drive assembly according to section 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the sensor cables, align the sample probe to the reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and diluted wash solution according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4-71

4.8 Probe R1 Assembly 4.8.1 Module Functions The probe R1 unit, located in the middle front of the whole unit, consists of the probe drive assembly, probe R1 arm assembly, and reagent probe assembly. It is mainly used to aspirate/dispense R1/R3 in reaction cuvettes and get washed according to the sequencing of the whole unit.

4.8.2 Locations and FRU details 5

4

3

6

12 11 7

10 2

8

9 1

Table 4.2 FRU details of probe R1 assembly

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

Remarks

1

801-BA80-00031-00

Probe drive assembly

2

801-BX50-00059-00

Probe vertical sensor cable

3

801-BA80-00027-00

Probe R1 arm assembly

4

801-BA80-00175-00

Reagent probe assembly

5

801-BA80-00029-00

Anticollision spring

6

246H031-000040-00

Synchronous cog belt (endless belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm wide)

7

801-BA80-00148-00

3-probe/mixer assembly

4-72

horizontal

motor

No code

FRU

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

8

801-BX50-00129-00

59 step motor assembly

9

801-BA80-00149-00

Synchronous belt B175MXL6.4

10

801-BA20-00116-00

Synchronous copper

11

801-BX50-00057-00

Probe horizontal obstruct detection sensor cable

12

801-BX50-00058-00

Probe rotary sensor cable

pulley

Remarks

P16MXL6.4DF

4.8.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R1 Arm Assembly Maintenance time The reagent probe should be replaced if it is bent or rusted; and the anticollision spring should be replaced if it is impaired. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

4-73

Figure 4.12 Exploded view for installation

Washer Probe R1 arm assembly 801-BA80-00027-00

Arm cover Spring guide post Anticollision spring 801-BA80-00029-00

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X12

Reagent probe assembly 801-BA80-00175-00

Removing steps 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the front shielding cover.

3

Grab the probe arm cover by its middle part with your hands and then pull the two long edges from opposite directions to remove the cover.

4

Loosen the tube connector and unplug the fluid level sensor cable. If you are going to replace the entire arm assembly, remove the connector from the sensor cable.

5

Remove the spring guide post and the anticollision spring.

6

Remove the reagent probe assembly.

7

Loosen the two M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the probe R1 arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly.

8

Fix the new reagent probe arm assembly on the spline shaft using two M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.

9

Lead the new reagent probe assembly through the mixer arm and support sleeve.

4-74

10 Fix the new anticollision spring on the mixer arm using the spring guide post. 11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the tube connector, sensor cable and mixer arm cover. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the reagent probe assembly, anticollision spring and arm assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

NOTE When installing/removing the reagent probe assembly and tube connector, exercise caution to prevent dropping off the white washer at connection joint. Exercise caution to prevent dropping off the anticollision spring into the instrument during installation/removing. Handle the reagent probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being bent or damaged. Prevent dropping off screws and spring washers into the instrument during installation/removing. To install the reagent probe assembly, insert the reagent probe into the support sleeve, and then install the anticollision spring and guide post. Exercise caution to prevent the probe riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of the guide post. Move the reagent probe up and down and check if it can move smoothly. If it fails to move smoothly, readjust the spring guide post. To install the arm cover, first lower its end part to make the foam touch the arm base, push the arm cover forwards without touching the front strengthening rib, and then press the arm cover to the arm until you hear a click.

4.8.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M) Maintenance time The 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6mm wide) should be replaced if they are impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly rotary transmission belt S3M tension alignment tool

BA80-TF25

1

4-75

Figure 4.13 Exploded view for installation

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X12

Motor support

3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly 801-BA8000148-00

Synchronous cog belt, endless belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6MM wide

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Remove the panels around the probe R1 assembly, such as light source cover, ISE module cover, etc.

4

Unplug the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable.

5

Loosen the four M3X12 socket head screws with spring and flat washers on the 3-mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the 3-mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6mm wide).

6

Fix the new 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly on the support using three M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, and then sleeve the new cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) on the synchronous pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the S3M tension alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

7

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable, ISE module cover, and diluted wash

4-76

position panel. Alignment and confirmation N/A.

4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly Maintenance time The probe R1 drive assembly or its part should be replaced if they are impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Figure 4.14 Exploded view for installation

Probe rotary sensor 801-BX50-00058-00 Horizontal obstruct detection sensor 801-BX50-00057-00

Vertical sensor 801-BX50-00059-00 Probe drive assembly 801-BA80-00031-00 Anchor plate

Cross pan head screw M3X6 Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X16

59 step motor assembly 801-BX50-001295-00

Cross countersunk head screw M3X6 Cross pan head screw M3X6 with washer

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X8 Synchronous Hexagon socket cap pulley .P16MXL6.4DF head screw M5X20 801-BA20-00116-00

Shielding Synchronous cover belt .175MXL6.4 801-BA80-00149-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover and left/right front doors, and then remove the light source cover, ISE module cover, and front panel.

3

Remove the probe R1 arm assembly according to section 4.8.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R1 Arm Assembly.

4

Unplug the motor cable, sensor cable, and fluidic tube. 4-77

5

Loosen the three M5X20 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer on the probe drive assembly, and then remove the probe drive assembly.

6

Fix the new probe drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three M5X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure to lead the fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the installation.

7

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to connect the motor cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the probe R1 arm assembly, ISE module cover, diluted wash position panel, front panel and other parts. Note: Connect connectors to the probe drive assembly sensor cable after leading the cable through the supporting flange.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the probe drive assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.8.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF Maintenance time The synchronous pulley should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer on the synchronous pulley, and then remove the synchronous pulley.

3

Fix the new synchronous pulley on the small pulley axle using one M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer, use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then 4-78

tighten the screw. 4

Install the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly.

Note: Prior to installing the new pulley, clean the new small pulley axle and apply new grease lubricant on it. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous pulley, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.8.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4 Maintenance time The synchronous belt should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the 59 step motor assembly.

4

Loosen the two M3X6 cross countersunk head screws on the anchor plate and then remove the synchronous belt.

5

Sleeve the new synchronous belt on the pulley of the 59 step motor assembly, and then fix the 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous

4-79

belt to the specified value. 6

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate, probe drive assembly, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous belt, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.8.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly Maintenance time The 59 step motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the 59 step motor assembly.

4

Fix the new 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the synchronous belt on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

5

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate, probe drive assembly, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation

4-80

After replacing the 59 step motor, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.8.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor Maintenance time The cables of the probe rotary sensor, obstruct detection sensor and vertical sensor should be replaced if they are damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X6 cross pan head screw on the cable of the probe rotary sensor, obstruct detection sensor or vertical sensor, and then remove the cable.

3

Fix the new sensor cable on the probe drive assembly using one M3X6 cross pan head screw.

4

Install the probe drive assembly according to section 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the sensor cables, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4-81

4.9 Probe R2 Assembly 4.9.1 Module Functions The probe R2 unit, located in the middle front of the whole unit, consists of the probe R2 drive assembly, probe R2 arm assembly, and reagent probe assembly. It is mainly used to aspirate/dispense R2/R4 in reaction cuvettes and get washed according to the sequencing of the whole unit.

4.9.2 Locations and FRU details 5

4

3

6

12 11 7

10 2

8

9 1

Table 4.3 FRU details of probe R2 assembly

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

1

115-005498-00

Probe R2 drive assembly

2

801-BX50-00059-00

Probe vertical sensor cable

3

801-BA80-00033-00

Probe R2 arm assembly

4

801-BA80-00175-00

Reagent probe assembly

5

801-BA80-00029-00

Anticollision spring

6

247H031-000040-00

Synchronous cog belt (endless belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm wide)

4-82

Remarks No code

FRU

No code

FRU

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name horizontal

Remarks

7

801-BA80-00148-00

3-probe/mixer assembly

8

801-BX50-00129-00

59 step motor assembly

9

801-BA80-00149-00

Synchronous belt B175MXL6.4

10

801-BA20-00116-00

Synchronous copper

11

801-BX50-00057-00

Probe horizontal obstruct detection sensor cable

12

801-BX50-00058-00

Probe rotary sensor cable

pulley

motor

P16MXL6.4DF

4.9.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R2 Arm Assembly Maintenance time The reagent probe should be replaced if it is bent or rusted; and the anticollision spring should be replaced if it is impaired. Tools Name

Code

Qty

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

4-83

Figure 4.15 Exploded view for installation

Washer Arm cover

Probe R2 arm assembly 801-BA80-00027-00

Spring guide post Anticollision spring 801-BA80-00029-00

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X12

Reagent probe assembly 801-BA80-00175-00

Removing steps 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the front shielding cover.

3

Grab the probe arm cover by its middle part with your hands and then pull the two long edges from opposite directions to remove the cover.

4

Loosen the tube connector and unplug the fluid level sensor cable. If you are going to replace the entire arm assembly, remove the connector from the sensor cable.

5

Remove the spring guide post and the anticollision spring.

6

Remove the reagent probe assembly.

7

Loosen the two M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the probe R2 arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly.

8

Fix the new probe R2 arm assembly on the spline shaft using two M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.

9

Lead the new reagent probe assembly through the mixer arm and support sleeve.

4-84

10 Fix the new anticollision spring on the mixer arm using the spring guide post. 11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the tube connector, sensor cable and mixer arm cover. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the reagent probe assembly, anticollision spring and arm assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

NOTE When installing/removing the reagent probe assembly and tube connector, exercise caution to prevent dropping off the white washer at connection joint. Exercise caution to prevent dropping off the anticollision spring into the instrument during installation/removing. Handle the reagent probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being bent or damaged. Prevent dropping off screws and spring washers into the instrument during installation/removing. To install the reagent probe assembly, insert the reagent probe into the support sleeve, and then install the anticollision spring and guide post. Exercise caution to prevent the probe riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of the guide post. Move the reagent probe up and down and check if it can move smoothly. If it fails to move smoothly, readjust the spring guide post. To install the arm cover, first lower its end part to make the foam touch the arm base, push the arm cover forwards without touching the front strengthening rib, and then press the arm cover to the arm until you hear a click.

4.9.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M) Maintenance time The 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6mm wide) should be replaced if they are impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly rotary transmission belt S3M tension alignment tool

BA80-TF25

1

4-85

Figure 4.16 Exploded view for installation

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover.

3

Remove the panels around the probe R2 assembly, such as light source cover, ISE module cover, etc.

4

Unplug the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable.

5

Loosen the four M3X12 socket head screws with spring and flat washers on the 3-mixer horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the 3-mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6mm wide).

6

Fix the new 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor assembly on the support using three M3X12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, and then sleeve the new cog belt (endless belt with 84 teeth, S3M, 6MM wide) on the synchronous pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the S3M tension alignment tool (BA80-TF25) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

7

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the 3-probe/mixer horizontal motor cable, ISE module cover, and diluted wash position panel. 4-86

Alignment and confirmation N/A.

4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly Maintenance time The probe R2 drive assembly or its part should be replaced if they are impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Figure 4.17 Exploded view for installation

Probe rotary sensor 801-BX50-00058-00 Horizontal obstruct detection sensor 801-BX50-00057-00

Vertical sensor 801-BX50-00059-00

Cross pan head screw M3X6 Hexagon socket cap head screw M4X16

59 step motor assembly 801-BX50-001295-00

Probe R2 drive assembly 801-BA80-xxxxx-00 Anchor Cross plate countersunk head screw M3X6 Cross pan head screw M3X6 with washer

Hexagon socket cap head screw M3X8 Synchronous Hexagon socket cap pulley .P16MXL6.4DF head screw M5X20 801-BA20-00116-00

Shielding Synchronous cover belt .175MXL6.4 801-BA80-00149-00

Steps of replacement 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Open the shielding cover and left/right front doors, and then remove the light source cover, ISE module cover, and front panel.

3

Remove the probe R2 arm assembly according to section 4.9.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R2 Arm Assembly.

4

Unplug the motor cable, sensor cable, and fluidic tube.

5

Loosen the three M5X20 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer on the 4-87

probe drive assembly, and then remove the probe drive assembly. 6

Fix the new probe drive assembly on the large bottom plate using three M5X20 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure to lead the fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the installation.

7

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to connect the motor cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the probe R2 arm assembly, ISE module cover, diluted wash position panel, front panel and other parts. Note: Connect connectors to the probe R2 drive assembly sensor cable after leading the cable through the supporting flange.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the probe R2 drive assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.9.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF Maintenance time The synchronous pulley should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer on the synchronous pulley, and then remove the synchronous pulley.

3

Fix the new synchronous pulley on the small pulley axle using one M3X8 hexagon socket cap head screw with flat washer, use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then tighten the screw. 4-88

4

Install the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly.

Note: Prior to installing the new pulley, clean the new small pulley axle and apply new grease lubricant on it. Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous pulley, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.9.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4 Maintenance time The synchronous belt should be replaced if it is damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the 59 step motor assembly.

4

Loosen the two M3X6 cross countersunk head screws on the anchor plate and then remove the synchronous belt.

5

Sleeve the new synchronous belt on the pulley of the 59 step motor assembly, and then fix the 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value. 4-89

6

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate, probe drive assembly, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the synchronous belt, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4.9.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly Maintenance time The 59 step motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

3-probe/mixer assembly vertical synchronous belt tension alignment tool

BA30-K21

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the four M3X6 cross pan head screws with wash on the shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover.

3

Loosen the three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the 59 step motor assembly.

4

Fix the new 59 step motor assembly on the support using three M4X16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the synchronous belt on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA30-K21) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified value.

5

Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the anchor plate, probe drive assembly, and other parts.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the 59 step motor, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units. 4-90

4.9.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor Maintenance time The cables of the probe rotary sensor, obstruct detection sensor and vertical sensor should be replaced if they are damaged. Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Code head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Cutting pliers

/

1

Steps of replacement 1

Remove the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly.

2

Loosen the M3X6 cross pan head screw on the cable of the probe rotary sensor, obstruct detection sensor or vertical sensor, and then remove the cable.

3

Fix the new sensor cable on the probe drive assembly using one M3X6 cross pan head screw.

4

Install the probe R2 drive assembly according to section 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly.

Alignment and confirmation After replacing the sensor cables, align the reagent probe to the reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to section 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units.

4-91

4.10 Bar Code Reader 4.10.1 Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

1

Hex wrench

1

Sample bar code alignment tool on outer sample carousel

BA80-J16-01

1

Sample bar code alignment tool on inner sample carousel

BA80-J17-01

1

Reagent bar code alignment tool on carousel R1

BA80-J26-01~02

1

Reagent bar code alignment tool on carousel R2

BA80-J23-01~02

1

4.10.2 Maintenance of Sample Bar Code Assembly Overview The sample bar code module is composed of bar code reader and sample carousel, which is shown as below. Since the sample carousel is separated into the outer and inner ones, the two carousels should be aligned separately when installing and aligning this module. Sample bar code assembly is located in the middle of assemblies of sample & reaction carousels and sample probe, under laser warning label.

4-92

Figure 4.18 Sample bar code module structure

4-93

2

1

Figure 4.19 Location of sample bar code assembly

No.

Material Description

FRU

1

Sample bar code scan assembly (upgrade package)

801-BA80-00035-0 0

2

Built-in bar code (maintenance parts)

801-BA20-00001-0 0

reader

Remarks

4.10.3 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader The sample bar code reader should be replaced if it cannot work properly. Removing built-in sample bar code reader 1

Remove sample carousel cover, panel and panel with position of intensive wash solution.

2

Disconnect the built-in bar code reader, loosen coil of wire, and unscrew two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws, to remove the reader.

Installing built-in sample bar code reader

4-94

Sponge cushion 2

Dust shield for reader

Glass window Sponge cushion 2

Small bracket for reader

Built-in bar code reader 801-BA20-00001-00 Large bracket for reader

Sample conductive brush Bracket for conductive brush

Sponge cushion

Sample chamber

Figure 4.20 Descriptions and locations for each component

3

Please assemble sample bar code components according to the figure above. Fix the bar code components on the large bottom plate using three M5X16 hexagon socket head screws with flat and spring washers, and fix the reader on the small bracket for it with two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Connect the reader, and fix it on bar code reader bracket with coil of wire. The built-in bar code reader should be installed on the top of the bracket.

4

Fix components of sample carousel to its drive assembly; place sample bar code alignment tool on outer carousel (BA80-J16-01) in position #46 on outer sample carousel and place sample bar code alignment tool on inner carousel (BA80-J17-01) in position #93 on inner sample carousel.

5

Check if the instrument is correctly connected, and then start and reset it.

6

Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance -> Sample bar code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures prompted by the software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the aperture on the sample bar code alignment tool on outer carousel, and fix the reader with four M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Then perform the alignment procedures to adjust the scan position of the inner sample carousel, making the emergent ray just present to the aperture on the sample bar code alignment tool on inner sample carousel, and determine the scan position.

4-95

Figure 4.21 Sample bar code alignment interface

Sample bar code alignment tool on outer sample carousel

Ray from bar code reader

Figure 4.22 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on outer sample carousel

4-96

Sample bar code alignment tool on inner sample carousel

Ray from bar code reader

Figure 4.23 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on inner sample carousel

NOTE Do not let the sponge cushion (4) shield the emergent ray from bar code reader (3).

7

Install the cover of the panel, front panel, and restore the cover of the sample carousel.

4.10.4 Maintenance of Reagent Bar Code Assembly Overview The reagent bar code module is composed of bar code reader and reagent carousel, which is shown as below. Since the reagent carousel is separated into outer and inner ones, the two carousels should be aligned separately when installing and aligning this module. Reagent bar code assembly locates at left front of the analyzer, lower-left corner of the reagent carousel, and under the laser warning label of the panel.

4-97

Figure 4.24 Reagent bar code module structure

4-98

2

1

Figure 4.25 Location of reagent bar code assembly

Figure 4.26 Locations of antifogging assembly

No.

Material description bar

FRU

Remarks

1

Reagent reader

code

801-BA80-00028-00

2

Built-in bar code reader

801-BA20-00001-00

3

Cables of antifogging temperature switch

801-BX50-00078-00

Installed in reagent bar code assembly

4

Cables of antifogging heater wire

801-BA40-00171-00

Installed in reagent bar code assembly

4-99

4.10.5 Replacement of Reagent Bar Code Reader The reagent bar code reader should be replaced if it does not work properly. 1

Unscrew the three retaining screws on the panel near the laser warning label, open the cover of the reagent carousel, and remove the panel at the lower-left corner of the reagent carousel.

2

Disconnect the bar code reader, loosen coil of wire, and unscrew two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws, to remove the built-in bar code reader.

Antifogging assembly

Small bracket for reader Bracket for reader

Built-in bar code reader 801-BA20-00001-00

Sponge cushion

Figure 4.27 Locations of reagent bar code reader assemblies

3

Install the built-in bar code reader on the small bracket for it with two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws with flat and spring washers.

4

Place R1 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the outer reagent carousel, and place R2 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the inner reagent carousel.

5

Check if the instrument is correctly connected, and then start and reset it.

6

Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance -> Reagent bar code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures 4-100

prompted by the software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the aperture on the reagent bar code alignment tool on the outer reagent carousel, and fix the reader with four M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Then perform the alignment procedures to adjust the scan position of the inner reagent carousel, making the emergent ray just present to the aperture on the bar code alignment tool on the inner reagent carousel, and determine the scan position.

Figure 4.28 Reagent bar code alignment interface

Figure 4.29 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on outer reagent carousel 4-101

Reagent bar code alignment tool on inner reagent carousel

Ray from bar code reader

Figure 4.30 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on inner reagent carousel

7

Install the cover of the panel, front panel, and restore the cover of the reagent carousel.

4.10.6 Replacement of Antifogging Temperature Switch Cables The cables of antifogging temperature switch should be replaced if the switch is damaged or it cannot work properly because of overheat. 1

Unscrew the three retaining screws on the panel near the laser warning label, open the cover of the reagent carousel, and remove the panel at the lower-left corner of the reagent carousel.

2

Unscrew the two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws on the built-in bar code reader to remove the reader.

4-102

Small bracket for reader

Bracket for reader

Built-in bar code reader 801-BA2000001-00

Antifogging assembly

Sponge cushion

Figure 4.31 Reagent bar code assembly

3

Unscrew the four M3X6 cross pan head screws from interior of the reagent chamber, to remove the antifogging assembly.

4-103

Figure 4.32 Antifogging assembly of reagent bar code

4

Unscrew the four M3X10 retaining screws between the mounting plate for antifogging device and the dust shield for bar code reader, to remove the dust shield and sponge cushion.

5

Unscrew bolts on overheat switch plate, to remove cables of the antifogging temperature switch and the overheat switch plate. And remove cables of the antifogging temperature switch to be replaced.

6

Daubing some heat-conducting glue on the bottom surface of the new wire and place it on the heating element. Then fix it on the overheat switch plate with one M3X12 hexagon socket head screws.

7

Fasten the dust shield for bar code reader and the mounting plate for antifogging device with four M3X10 retaining screws.

8

Press mounting plate for antifogging device on the hermetic sponge and fix it on the side of refrigeration chamber, and then fix the dust shield pasted with sponge cushion with four M3X6 cross pan head screws on the mounting plate. Now, the antifogging assembly is fixed.

4-104

Antifogging assembly

Small bracket for bar code reader Bracket for reader

Built-in bar code reader 801-BA2000001-00

Sponge cushion

Figure 4.33 Reagent bar code assembly

9

Install built-in bar code reader onto the small bracket with two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws with flat and spring washers. Please keep the glass surface of the reader clean to avoid any influences on the reader’s performance. You can keep screws loosen until the alignment is complete. Place R1 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the outer reagent carousel, and place R2 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the inner reagent carousel.

10 Check if the instrument is correctly connected, and then start and reset it. 11 Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance -> Reagent bar code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures prompted by the software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the aperture on the reagent bar code alignment tool on the outer reagent carousel, and fix the reader with four M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Then perform the alignment procedures to adjust the scan position of the inner reagent carousel, making the emergent ray just present to the aperture on the bar code alignment tool on the inner reagent carousel, and determine the scan position.

4-105

Figure 4.34 Reagent bar code alignment interface

Figure 4.35 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on outer reagent carousel

4-106

Reagent bar code alignment tool on the inner reagent carousel

Ray from bar code reader

Figure 4.36 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on inner reagent carousel

12 Install the cover of the panel, front panel, and restore the cover of the reagent carousel.

4.10.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater Cables The cables of antifogging heater should be replaced if the heater cannot work properly for heating, or condensate water or fogging occurs on glass window. 1

Unscrew the three retaining screws on the panel near the laser warning label, open the cover of the reagent carousel, and remove the panel at the lower-left corner of the reagent carousel.

2

Unscrew the two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws on the built-in bar code reader to remove the reader.

3

Unscrew the four M3X6 cross pan head screws from interior of the reagent chamber, to remove the antifogging assembly.

4-107

Figure 4.37 Antifogging assembly of reagent bar code

4

Unscrew the four M3X10 retaining screws between the mounting plate for antifogging device and the dust shield for bar code reader, to remove the dust shield and sponge cushion.

5

Unscrew bolts on overheat switch plate, to remove cables of the antifogging temperature switch and the overheat switch plate. Remove cables of the antifogging heater you want to replace from the groove of heat conductive aluminum plate.

6

Place a new one in the right place instead.

7

Daubing some heat-conducting glue on the bottom surface of the wire and place it on the heating element. Then fix it on the overheat switch plate with one M3X12 hexagon socket head screw.

8

Fasten the dust shield for bar code reader and the mounting plate for antifogging device with four M3X10 retaining screws.

9

Press mounting plate for antifogging device on the hermetic sponge and fix it on the side of refrigeration chamber, and then fix the dust shield pasted with sponge cushion with four M3X6 cross pan head screws on the mounting plate. Now, the antifogging assembly is fixed.

4-108

Small bracket for bar code reader

Antifogging assembly

Bracket for reader

Built-in bar code reader 801-BA20-0000100

Sponge cushion

Figure 4.38 Reagent bar code assembly

10 Install built-in bar code reader onto the small bracket with two M3X8 hexagon socket head screws with flat and spring washers. Please keep the glass surface of the reader clean to avoid any influences on the reader’s performance. You can keep screws loosen until the alignment is complete. Place R1 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the outer reagent carousel, and place R2 bar code alignment tool in position #1 on the inner reagent carousel. 11 Check if the instrument is correctly connected, and then start and reset it. 12 Run the operation software, and select Utilities -> Maintenance -> Reagent bar code alignment. Adjust the reader according to the procedures prompted by the software, to make the emergent ray just pass through the aperture on the reagent bar code alignment tool on R1 carousel, and fix the reader with four M3X8 hexagon socket head screws. Then perform the alignment procedures to adjust the scan position of the inner reagent carousel, making the emergent ray just present to the aperture on the bar code alignment tool on the inner reagent

4-109

carousel, and determine the scan position.

Figure 4.39 Reagent bar code alignment interface

Figure 4.40 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on outer reagent carousel

4-110

Reagent bar code alignment tool on the inner reagent carousel

Ray from bar code reader

Figure 4.41 Usage of barcode reader alignment tool on inner reagent carousel

13 Install the cover of the panel, front panel, and restore the cover of the reagent carousel.

4-111

4.11 Photoelectric Unit 4.11.1 Functions Chemistry analyzer is a typical precision instrument which features in optics, mechanics, electronics and logarithm. The spectrophotometer is one of the key components of the instrument and determines directly the precision and accuracy of measurement by the system. The BS-800 inherits the technology of reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings. The holographic concave flat-field gratings are used for optical dispersion and imaging. It can not only simplify the optical design to compact the optical structure, but also eliminate the stray light. A combined light passing through the entrance slit projects on the PDA(Photodiode Array) via the concave flat-field gratings. One or multiple light-activated elements on different positions receive the monochromatic light at certain wavelength. During operation, the photometric system controlled by the computer receives the electric signals produced by the light-activated elements of corresponding wavelength and then converts them into absorbance. In case the spectrum is defined, the absorbance at multiple wavelengths can be calculated quickly.

4.11.2 Components and Structure The BS-800/BS-820 applies direct lighting, the holographic concave flat-field gratings and PDA(Photodiode Array) for photometric measurement. See the figure below. The front lens converges the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp to the reaction cuvette via the fiber bundle. The light beam passes through the reaction cuvette and then converges at the entrance slit via the lens group 2. The gratings divide the light beam from the entrance slit and then converge them to the slit array. Finally the PDA behind the slit array converts the light signals into electric signals and then outputs them. Slits array

PDA

Optical filter

Tungstenhalogen lamp

Lens

Lens

Reaction cuvette

Lens

Lens

Entrance slit

Gratings

Figure 4.42 Photometric structure

4-112

Optical measurement assembly The optical measurement assembly is composed of optical assembly, power supply, lamp, patch cord for lamp housing fan and the supporter.

Power supply assembly

Lamp 801-BA80-00001-00

Supporter Figure 4.43 Optical measurement assembly (1)

Patch cord for lamp housing fan 801-BA80-00136-00

Figure 4.44 Optical measurement assembly (2)

4-113

Figure 4.45 Optical assembly (801-BA80-00137-00)

AD housing assembly AD housing assembly is used to receive and process analog signals transmitted from pre-amp board, and to transmit the converted signals. AD housing

Bracket housing Figure 4.46 AD housing assembly

4-114

of

AD

4.11.3 Assembly Locations and Replacement Solutions Locations and FRU details 4

3

1

2

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material name

1

801-BA80-00001-00

Lamp

2

801-BA80-00136-00

Patch cord for lamp housing fan

3

801-BA80-00137-00

Optical assembly

4

801-BA80-00164-00

Glass cuvette

5

BA40-20-61320

0.1 optical adjustment washer

4-115

Remarks

Used together with optical assembly

No. 6

FRU/Material Code 042-001722-00

Material name

Remarks

0.3 optical adjustment washer

Used together with optical assembly

Note: For locations and replacement methods of 0.1 and 0.3 optical adjustment washers, please refer to the contents below.

Replacing optical assembly When to do The optical assembly should be replaced if some of functions are disabled or its performance cannot meet the requirements. Tools •

Cross screwdriver, Hex wrench, Adjustable wrench

Exploded view for installation

Supporting post for lamp panel

Left side plates of lamp replacement window Right side plates of lamp replacement window

Optical assembly 801-BA80-00137-00

Lamp 801-BA80-00001-00

0.1 optical adjustment washer BA40-20-61320

Lamp base retaining screw

0.3 optical adjustment washer 042-001722-00

Supporting post

4-116

NOTE Please remove the reaction carousel carefully to protect the reaction cuvettes. After removing the optical assembly, place it in the package, and then bring the package back or mail it to our company for repair. Do not touch the lamp housing after removing the lamp. In case of touching, please clean your hands with clean ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze. Use a new lamp to align gains of each channel after replacing the optical assembly, to avoid strong light of the lamp. Do not lose the washers on the supporting post when removing the optical assembly. Each supporting post has the same quantity of washers of the two types, and the quantity should be determined by the actual requirement.

Replacing steps 1

Switch off the power of the analyzer.

2

Remove the mixer from mix station and the cuvette wash station and put them in place, to avoid any bend.

3

Remove the top cover of reaction carousel and all the side plates; remove the lamp and the top cover of ISE, to make the heat chamber of the reaction carousel easy to take out. Rotate the reagent probe to the sample aspiration position, and rotate the sample probe to the position over the sample carousel.

4

Remove the lamp, and demount the right and the left side plates of lamp replacement window in the correct order.

5

Remove the reaction carousel by the tool. Please be careful to do this to protect the glass cuvettes.

6

Loosen the drain line of heat chamber of reaction carousel and remove the heat chamber.

7

Remove AD housing and open its upper cover; unplug the pre-amplification-AD collection cable from the AD collection board, and unplug the parallel port connector from the bottom of the AD housing assembly.

8

Loosen the connector of lamp fan and three retaining screws on the small bottom plate, to remove the optical assembly to be changed. Please note that there are several adjustment washers on each supporting post which should not be removed together with the optical assembly.

9

Unscrew the supporting post fixed on the old optical assembly using adjustable wrench, and install it in the place where a new optical assembly should be 4-117

installed. 10 Check if the number of 0.1 and 0.3 optical adjustment washers on each of the three supporting posts are the same before installing the new optical assembly. If there is any difference, please determine the quantity according to that on another two supporting posts. 11 Install the new optical assembly following the above steps reversely. 12 After replacement, switch on the power of the analyzer and the analyzing unit, and run the operation software. Set the target voltage to 11.8V with the function of alignment, to adjust the light intensity of the lamp. (For details, please refer to 4.11.4 .)When the light becomes stable, please confirm again if the photometric collection position and gains of each channel can meet the requirements. (For details, please refer to 4.11.4 .) If the optical coupler bracket has been adjusted during the alignment, then you need to re-adjust all the sample probes, reagent probes, mixers and the wash station in the horizontal direction on the reaction carousel. 13 When all the alignments complete, check if the performance of the analyzer can meet the operation requirements with method of metal breakout.

Replacing lamp Maintenance time •

Warning that the light intensity is insufficient or the lamp is not turned on.

•

The lamp has been used over 2,000 hours.

Tools •

Cross screwdriver

Exploded view for installation

4-118

Light source assembly

Lamp 801-BA80-00001-00

Lamp base retaining screw

NOTE • Please replace the lamp according to the descriptions of lamp replacement. • Please wait for at least five minutes (considering that the lamp fan works properly) after turn off the lamp to avoid any injury. • Do not touch the lamp housing when installing the new lamp. In case of touching, please clean your hands with clean ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze.

Steps of replacement 1

Click Utility -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance, and select Replace Lamp.

2

Following the instructions prompted by the software and wait for five minutes until the lamp cools down.

3

Remove the lamp cover plate with cross screwdriver.

4

Unscrew O-ring connector fixed on the cable terminal and lamp base retaining screws with hands, to remove the lamp.

5

Install the lamp and panel in a reversed order. Please ensure that the lamp has been installed properly in the right place and there is no space between the lamp and the lamp base before mounting the panel. (For details, please refer to the contents of installation notice.)

6

Click Continue on Replace Lamp window, and then wait for ten minutes to start Lamp Check to check if it can work properly.

Replacing lamp fan Maintenance time

4-119

The fan does not work properly and has confirmed it is not the problem with PCB or joint parts. Tools Cross screwdriver Exploded view for installation Patch cord for lamp housing fan 801-BA80-00136-00

Light source assembly

WARNING • Do not touch the optical surface of the lamp after removing the lamp. In case of touching, please clean your hands with clean ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze. • Please wait for at least ten minutes until the lamp cool down before replacing the lamp, to avoid any injury. • Do not drop nuts into the analyzer device when removing the fan. • When installing the fan, please make sure that the wind blow to the light source assembly and the tab of the fun face to the light source assembly.

Steps of replacement 1

Turn off the power of the analyzer and wait for ten minutes until the lamp cools down, to avoid any injury.

2

Rotate the reagent probe to the position over the reagent carousel, and remove panels of lamp, reagent wash reservoir and ISE.

3

Remove the lamp and store it properly. Do not touch the bulb of the lamp to avoid any contamination.

4

Remove the left and right side plates, and remove the connector of lamp fan.

5

Unscrew the four screws of the fan carefully by a cross screwdriver. Please do not drop the nuts into the analyzer device.

4-120

M5 nut

6

Patch cord for lamp housing fan 801-BA80-00136-00

Install the new fan to the light source assembly in a reversed order. Cables downward

Label inward

7

Mount the plate of lamp window, the lamp and other plates, and switch on the analyzer.

8

Check if the fan works properly and blow to the lamp base.

9

Restart the operating software. If the problem still exists, there may be some problems with PCB.

Replacing reaction cuvette Maintenance time The cuvettes are dirty, damaged or overflowing. Tools Fiber-free gloves, concentrated wash solution manufactured by our company, tweezers, air pressure gun (cold air), cross screwdriver, hex wrench, dry and clean cloth or gauze, ethanol. 4-121

WARNING • Remove the reaction carousel carefully to avoid any damage. • While removing or installing the reaction cuvettes, exercise caution to avoid scratching them. Do not touch the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes. If the optical surface is polluted, the obtained absorbance may be inaccurate. In case of touching, please clean with ethanol-moistened cloth or gauze. • Wear gloves free of fiber and powder to avoid polluting the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes. • Do not use fiber tools like cotton swabs, cotton and cotton cloth to wipe the reaction cuvettes. If fibers are left on the optical surface, inaccurate absorbance may be obtained. • While installing the reaction cuvettes, make sure that the optical surface is confronted with the outside of the reaction carousel. • Do not use the hot air pressure gun to dry the reaction carousel, to avoid any deformation of parts. • If the cuvette is damaged, please clean the shatters on the surface of reaction carousel, interior of the hole placing the cuvette, interior of other cuvettes and interior of groove of the heat chamber, in order not to scratch the parts, block the wash station or influence the subsequent loading of reaction cuvette.

The operation approaches are different with different quantity of reaction cuvettes to be changed. Replace or maintain a small number of reaction cuvettes The reaction carousel does not need to be removed if only a few cuvettes to be changed. For the procedures, please refer to the following contents. 1

Record the position of overflowing cuvette.

2

Run the software and click Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance -> Replace Cuvette.

3

Remove the wash station, mixers and cover of the reaction carousel following software instructions.

4

Enter the position(s) you want to replace.

4-122

5

Wear a pair of gloves and remove the contaminated cuvette by pulling it outwards. If the cuvette has been broken, it is suggested to unclench the metal plate with a knife and then take out the cuvette with the tweezers.

6

Repeat step 4 and step 5 to remove all the cuvettes to be replaced.

7

If overflow occurs, you need to clean the surface of cuvette and the contaminated hole placing the cuvette with dry and clean cloth or gauze in step 4 and step 5 to ensure that hole is dry and clean. Check if the temperature control of reaction carousel is running, and expose the carousel to air for more than 60 minutes for drying.

8

Run Replace Cuvette again to install the cuvettes on the reaction carousel and make sure that the cuvette bottom attaches completely to the reaction cuvette. Please clean the shatters to make sure the cuvettes can be placed into the proper position.

9

After the cuvette is installed properly, please prime the new cuvette with at least 300μl concentrated wash solution, and click Cuvette Check.If cuvette marked red still exists, please maintain it using Replace Cuvette.

Replace or maintain a large number of reaction cuvettes The reaction carousel has to be removed if there are a large number of reaction cuvettes to be replaced. For steps, please refer to the following contents. 1

Switch off the power of the analyzing unit.

2

Remove the mixer from mix station and the cuvette wash station and put them in place, to avoid any bend.

3

Remove the top cover of the reaction carousel, rotate the reagent probe to the sample aspiration position, and rotate the sample probe to the position over the sample carousel.

4

Remove the reaction carousel by the tool. Please be careful to do this to protect the glass cuvettes.

5

Wear a pair of gloves and remove the contaminated cuvette by pulling it outwards, and wash residual liquid inside of the cuvette. If the cuvette has been broken, it is suggested to unclench the metal plate with a knife and then take out the cuvette with the tweezers.

6

If there are a large number of cuvettes have been contaminated because of the

4-123

overflow, then please maintain it according to the descriptions of cleaning cuvette. Clean the residual liquid using clean cloth or gauze and expose the reaction carousel to air for drying. 7

Place the clean cuvette or the new one into the reaction carousel, and make sure that the cuvette bottom attaches completely to the reaction cuvette. Please clean the shatters to make sure the cuvettes can be placed into the proper position.

8

Install the reaction carousel, cover of the carousel, wash station and mixers to the proper positions, and prime all the cuvettes newly replaced with at least 300μl concentrated wash solution, and click Cuvette Check.If cuvette marked red still exists, please maintain it using Replace Cuvette.

4.11.4 Adjustment of Photometer Parameters adjustment of each channel gain The function is applied when: A warning occurs indicating that the light is too strong. Required value of parameters after adjustment: •

Water blank AD of all channels: < 60,000

•

Dark current of all channels: 1 to 200

•

Gain parameters: ≥ 65 for 340nm; ≥ 30 for 380nm; ≥ 20 for other 10 channels

NOTE Add 200μl DI water to the reaction cuvette before adjusting the gain parameter, otherwise, the result may be different. Adjusting the gain value cannot prolong the lamp’s service life. Please keep the lamp on for more than 10 minutes before adjusting the gain parameters; otherwise, the result may be different.

For steps, please refer to the following contents. 1

Run the software and click Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.

4-124

2

Before alignment, make sure that photoelectric waves and photoelectric collection positions have been aligned, and the lamp is on for more than 10 minutes.

3

Add 200μl DI water to the reaction cuvette from #131 to #135 followed by the software instruction, and select Next.

4

The system will measure the energy of reaction cuvettes from #131 to #135, and calculate gain parameters of all channels automatically. Check gain value of each channel, water blank AD and dark current, and adjust them accordingly.

5

If the results meet the requirement, click Done to save the parameters.

6

If the value of water blank AD is greater than 60,000 after the adjustment,

4-125

please lower the voltage of the lamp and adjust again after the light become stable. 7

If the value of dark current of one channel is greater than 200 or less than 1, please check if the gain parameter of this channel does not meet the requirement (340nm ≥ 65, 380nm ≥ 30, others ≥ 20).If the gain parameter falls in the correct range, then you should run Fluctuation of Dark Current to check if there is any problem with PCB. If the gain parameter falls out of the range, please replace with a new lamp and adjust it again.

Light intensity adjustment The function is applied when: A warning occurs indicating that the light is too strong and the value of water blank AD of each channel cannot be adjusted below 60,000 with method mentioned above. Required value of parameters after adjustment: •

Voltage of the lamp: 11.0V to 12.0V

•

Water blank AD of all channels: < 60,000

NOTE The voltage must be within 11.0V ~12.0V. This function is only available when the light intensity is too strong and cannot be aligned through gain adjustment. Higher voltage will shorten the lamp’s service life. After adjusting the voltage, please keep the lamp on for more than 10 minutes before re-adjusting photoelectric gain.

For steps, please refer to the following contents. 1

Select Utility -> Status -> Power to check and record the measured value of Photometer Lamp Voltage 12V.

2

Run the software and click Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photoelectric Unit.

4-126

3

Select Index Setup to reset the target lamp voltage (target value = measured value – 0.3), and click Save to return to the Alignment window.

4

Select Light Intensity Adjustment on Alignment window, a prompt will be displayed indicating that the voltage is being adjusted.

4-127

5

After adjusting the voltage, you need to re-configure the gain parameter of each channel followed by the descriptions in 4.11.4 .If the value is below 60,000, please exit the Alignment window after the process complete. Then the system can be used after homing. (Note: The lamp should be kept on for more than 10 minutes before adjusting the photoelectric gains.)

6

If some value of water blank AD still greater than 60,000 after adjusting the photoelectric gains, then repeat step 3 to step 5 to re-adjust the light intensity according to the difference between water blank AD measured during photoelectric gain adjustment and 60,000 by the ratio of 0.1V : 1,500AD, until the measured value of water blank AD is less than 60,000.If there are still some values fall out of the range after adjusting the voltage to 11.0V, then there may be some problems with photoelectric collection board.

Photoelectric waves and collecting position adjustment The function is applied when: •

Replacing optical assembly;

•

Replacing any part of reaction carousel assembly;

•

Checking if the reaction carousel assembly is at the Home position.

•

Checking if the output of each channel of photoelectric collection is normal.

Required value of parameters after adjustment: •

Green frame should fall in the range of flat area;

•

No abnormal output.

4-128

NOTE Before analyzing, you need to adjust the voltage and keep the lamp on for more than three minutes. Please remember to add 200μl DI water to the reaction cuvette when scanning the flat area, otherwise, the scan result may not be correct.

For details of operations, please refer to the following contents. 1

Run the software and click Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photoelectricity Collection Position Adjustment.

2

Adjust the voltage and keep the lamp on more than three minutes, and run analysis.

3

Enter a number in Start Cuvette field which displayed 131 to 135 by default, it is suggested to enter the position number for best alignment.

4

Click Start at the upper right corner of the window, and add 200μl DI water to the reaction cuvettes from the start one to the subsequent five cuvettes.

5

Then click Next. The system will scan the flat areas of the specified cuvettes and display the photoelectric collection areas on the top of the window.

4-129

6

As shown in the above figure, the upper curve is for 340nm flat area and the lower curve is for 800nm flat area. Please ensure that the green frame falls in the middle of the flat area.

7

If the green frame is in the middle of the flat area, then click Done to exit.

8

If the green frame is not in the middle of the flat area, then re-adjust the position of the optical coupler on reaction carousel. Then click Readjust to analyze the relationship between the flat area and the photoelectricity collection position until it falls in the middle of the flat area.

9

When the position of the flat area is adjusted, click Start at the lower part of the window to confirm the curves of each channel followed by the software instructions. If the curve of one channel displays abnormally comparing with others, like flat area error, no flat area, no output of one channel, then there may some problems with PCB, you need to replace the optical assembly and re-adjust it.

4-130

4.12 ISE Module (Optional) 4.12.1 Functions The ISE module is an optional module for the fully-automated chemistry analyzer and designed to measure the concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- in serum, plasma and urine. The theory of measurement is indirect ion-selective electrode method. With this method, the system will dilute the sample (this is executed automatically by ISE module) before analyzing it. Diluent: ISE Buffer Sample volume: 22μl; Dilution factor: 33.

4.12.2 Components of ISE Unit ISE unit consists of ISE module, ISE reagent, ISE vacuum assembly and ISE air duct assembly. For details of the functions, please refer to the following table. Table 4.4 Components of ISE Unit

Name

Functions

ISE Module

There are four kinds of electrodes: Na+, K+, Cland reference electrode. The sample is added from injection port of ISE module, and diluted and analyzed in this module.

ISE vacuum assembly

Provide degassing vacuum for ISE buffer in ISE module.

ISE air assembly

This assembly consists of ISE air duct and fan of ISE module, cooling ISE module.

duct

Position and components of ISE module ISE module is situated at the front of the analyzer, which is shown as below.

ISE

Figure 4.47 Position of ISE module in the analyzer

For positions of ISE module and ISE reagent, please refer to the figure below. 4-131

Figure 4.48 Components of ISE module

ISE

18

Figure 4.49 Position of ISE buffer solution tank

4-132

Table 4.5 Components of ISE module

No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

1

801-BA80-00213-00

Degassing membrane (FRU)

2

801-BA80-00215-00

Temperature Stabilizer (FRU)

3

801-BA80-00192-00

Solenoid SV01 (FRU)

Valve

4

801-BA80-00193-00

Solenoid SV02 (FRU)

Valve

5

801-BA80-00210-00

Buffer (FRU)

6

-

SIC (Sample Injection Cup)

7

-

Electrode

8

-

ISE Buffer Syringe

9

801-BA80-00195-00

Syringe (FRU)

10

-

Waste Interface

11

-

Waste Tube Through-hole

12

801-BA80-00186-00

Waste Drain Nozzle (FRU)

13

801-BA80-00191-00

Electrode (FRU)

14

801-BA80-00197-00

Temperature Sensor (FRU)

15

801-BA80-00211-00

Fluidic Earthing Piece (FRU)

16

801-BA80-00199-00

Motor of Temperature Stabilizer (FRU)

17

801-BA80-00217-00

Retaining Screws for Electrodes and Shielding Cover (FRU)

18

801-BA80-00212-00

ISE Detection (FRU)

19

801-BA80-00209-00

Electrode Shielding (FRU)

20

801-BA80-00198-00

Nozzle

Motor Tube

Holder

Level Sensor

Spacer (FRU)

4-133

Remarks

Cover

Installed on the electrode for shielding. Installed in the position of electrode for cleaning ISE tubing.

Fluidic diagram of ISE module

Figure 4.50 Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module

Table 4.6 ISE tubes and tube specifications

No. (corresponded with numbers in Figure 4.33)

FRU Code

Name

801-BA80-00200-00

ISE Tube 01 (FRU)

bottle

degasser

ISE Tube 02 (FRU)

degasser

SV01-NO

ISE Tube 03 (FRU)

SV01-COM

syringe-L

01

02 801-BA80-00201-00 03 801-BA80-00202-00

4-134

Tube Tube Specification Specification 1 2

No. (corresponded with numbers in Figure 4.33)

FRU Code

Name

801-BA80-00203-00

ISE Tube 04 (FRU)

SV01-NC

RTB-IN

ISE Tube 05 (FRU)

RTB

RTB

ISE Tube 06 (FRU)

RTB-OUT

DP-IN

ISE Tube 07 (FRU)

DP-OUT

SV02-NC

ISE Tube 08 (FRU)

SV02-COM

syringe-R

ISE Tube 09 (FRU)

SV02-NO

drain

04

05 801-BA80-00204-00 06 801-BA80-00205-00 07 801-BA80-00206-00 08 801-BA80-00207-00 09 801-BA80-00208-00

Tube Tube Specification Specification 1 2

Overview of ISE fluidic assembly ISE Buffer: The liquid in the ISE fluidic assembly is the buffer stored in the buffer solution tank on tank bracket. Liquid Flow Motivity: The flow of ISE buffer is driven by the buffer syringe. The syringe motor drives two pistons simultaneously. The left one is used to add buffer to the sample injection cup, and the right one is used to drain liquid in the cup. Degassing Membrane: It is used to remove gas from ISE buffer. Temperature Stabilizer: It is used to stabilize the temperature of ISE buffer to keep the temperature similar as the environment temperature in the analyzer, to avoid sharp fluctuation. Work Process: As shown in “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module”, ISE Level Detection Sensor (801-BA80-00212-00) aspirates the buffer from the buffer solution tank and dispenses it to ISE Tube 01 (801-BA80-00200-00).Remove gas in the buffer with degassing membrane (801-BA80-00213-00) and put the buffer into ISE Tube 02 (801-BA80-00201-00).Drain the buffer to ISE Tube 04 (801-BA80-00203-00) using syringe and Solenoid Valve SV01 (801-BA80-00192-00).ISE buffer flows into Temperature Stabilizer (801-BA80-00215-00), and its temperature become closer to the internal environment temperature in the analyzer. Drain the temperature stabilized buffer to the SIC through ISE Tube 06 (801-BA80-00205-00).Drain the

4-135

liquid in SIC from the module using both syringe and Solenoid Valve SV02 (801-BA80-00193-00).The liquid in SIC will flow through ISE electrode, ISE Tube 07 (801-BA80-00206-00), Solenoid Valve SV02, ISE Tube 08 (801-BA80-00207-00), ISE Tube 09 (801-BA80-00208-00), and then drain from the ISE module by gravity.

Overview of ISE analyzing ISE analysis mainly consists of the following actions. During analyzing or priming, ISE buffer always flows from tube 01 to tube 09 which is shown in “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module”. Priming: Priming indicates that the syringe pumps the buffer passing through the degassing membrane and Temperature Stabilizer unit to SIC and electrode. During priming, ISE buffer always flows from tube 01 to tube 09 which is shown in “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module”. Analyzing buffer: The ISE buffer syringe aspirates the degassed and stabilized buffer and dispenses it to SIC. And then the buffer will be absorbed slowly into the flow cell for analyzing. After that, waste liquid will be drained from waste drain nozzle. Analyzing sample: The ISE buffer syringe dispenses the degassed and stabilized buffer to SIC at the specified height and the sample probe adds the sample to SIC, then the sample and the buffer will be mixed in SIC. The sample-buffer mixture will be absorbed into the flow cell for analyzing. After that, waste liquid will be drained from waste drain nozzle. A typical process is shown as below: Priming -> Analyzing buffer -> Analyzing sample -> Priming -> Analyzing buffer. Flow direction of buffer: During analyzing or priming, ISE buffer always flows from tube 01 to tube 09 which is shown in “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module”.

NOTE To remove the joint parts of tank bracket, please first disconnect the ISE buffer tube and ISE level detection sensor and remove them. Please take care of the ISE buffer tube when perform operations above to prevent it from being bent.

4.12.3 Troubleshooting of ISE Tube Note Biohazard. Please exercise caution when maintaining ISE.

Tools Name Cross screwdriver

Requirement /

Qty 1

4-136

Materials No. 1

2 3 4 5 6 7

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

801-BA80-00212-00

ISE Detection (FRU)

801-BA80-00213-00

Degassing membrane (FRU)

801-BA80-00192-00

Solenoid SV01 (FRU)

Valve

801-BA80-00193-00

Solenoid SV02 (FRU)

Valve

801-BA80-00215-00

Temperature Stabilizer (FRU)

801-BA80-00185-00

O-shape (FRU)

801-BA80-00186-00

Waste Drain Nozzle (FRU)

Remarks

Level Sensor

Washer

Troubleshooting approach and steps When to do: Buffer overflows from sample injection port, poor performance of re-analysis, calibration error, or such failures occur as A01034 (ISE sample injection port liquid level too high), A01035 (ISE sample injection port liquid level too low) and A13023 (ISE calibration paused, the number of replicates for calibration exceeds the designated value). Judgement Criterion: Prime with ISE buffer and check if the priming works properly. ISE tube will full of liquid after priming it with the buffer for about 20 times. Normal buffer priming should meet the following two conditions: 1. No obvious air bubbles in ISE Tube 06 (see “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module”); 2. No overflow. Troubleshooting steps: If there are still a lot of air bubbles in the tube after priming the tube with ISE buffer for several times, please check and handle it according to the following descriptions. 1

Check the buffer solution tank first. Check the tubes shown in “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module” by the buffer flowing direction.

2

Make sure there are sufficient buffer in the buffer solution tank. And observe if obvious air bubbles exist in the tube that connecting the buffer solution tank with ISE module. Priming can be executed for several times if necessary. If air bubbles exist, please check the followings.

4-137

3

Check if pipette on ISE level detection sensor is damaged.

4

Check if the tubes on ISE level detection sensor are connected well.

5

Check if the tubes on ISE degassing membrane are connected well.

6

Check if vacuum tubes on ISE degassing membrane are connected well. Vacuum tube should be inserted into the bottom of the connector, and the connector and the degassing membrane should be connected well. (Note: Do not screw the connector so tightly when checking.)

7

Check if ISE vacuum works properly. The normal range of pressure is from -25kPa to -36kPa. If exceptions occur, please check ISE vacuum assembly.

8

Check if there is any bubble in the tube that connecting degassing membrane to the right Solenoid Valve SV01.If bubbles exist, please check the connectors of degassing membrane and the right Solenoid Valve SV01.Check the right connector of the syringe. Check ISE syringe for leak. If it leaks, please replace the washer of the syringe.

9

Check the tube connection from the right Solenoid Valve SV01 to Temperature Stabilizer.

10 Check the tube connection in Heat stabilizer. Troubleshootings for overflow: 1

Check electrodes connection by the liquid flowing direction (see “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module”).You can drain ISE wastes during checking, and observe the flowing direction of the liquid.

2

Check if the channel connecting the bottom of SIC and the electrodes has been blocked.

3

Check the installation of the electrodes. On the contacting surface between electrodes, REF electrode and temperature sensor, CL electrode and fluidic earthing joint piece, there should be only one O-shape washer.

4

Check the tube connection from the electrode to the left Solenoid Valve SV02.

5

Check the tube connection from the left Solenoid Valve SV02 to ISE syringe. Check the syringe for leak. If it leaks, please replace the washer of the syringe.

6

Check the tube connection from the left Solenoid Valve SV02 to the waste drain nozzle. Check if the nozzle is blocked.

4-138

4.12.4 ISE Alignment

Buffer

Resorption

Volume

Confirmation

and

Note Biohazard. Please exercise caution when maintaining ISE.

Tools None

Troubleshooting approach and steps When to do: Replaced or reinstalled the sample injection cups. Judgement Criterion: When performing ISE analysis, the buffer nozzle will dispense a specific volume of buffer to the SIC for diluting the sample before the sample probe adds the sample. When adding ISE buffer, the buffer nozzle will resorb the buffer to keep the buffer level always below the nozzle for positive displacement. Resorption may generate an air column in the tube that connecting the buffer nozzle. Troubleshooting steps: Run ISE analysis for about five times, and observe the position of air column from the second analysis. (Note: Do not take the result of the first analysis as the reference.)Normally, the air column should keep 10 to 40mm distance from edges of SIC. If not, you should modify “Adjustment Factor of SIC Volume”.

10mm ~ 40mm

The resorption volume will influence the position of the air column which can be changed by modifying “Adjustment Factor of SIC Volume”. To modify it, please select System Setup -> Factory -> ISE Setup.The range of the factor is from 25 to 45. Lowering the factor will increase the distance between the air column and the edges of SIC, and vice versa. The air column in the tube will move about 1mm with one unit change of this factor. 4-139

4.12.5 Electrode’s O-shape Washer (801-BA80-00185-00) Check Note Biohazard. Please exercise caution when maintaining ISE. Please take it carefully when removing and installing the electrode.

Tools None

Materials No. 1

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00185-00

Material Name O-shape (FRU)

Remarks

Washer

Troubleshooting approach and steps When to do: Buffer overflows from sample injection port, poor performance of re-analysis, calibration error, or such failures occur as A01034 (ISE sample injection port liquid level too high) and A13023 (ISE calibration paused, the number of replicates for calibration exceeds the designated value). Troubleshooting steps: The ISE module is completely sealed through pressing parts (from SIC to drain outlet) with each other. See the figure below. O-shape washer should be placed in each contacting surface, and there should be only one washer between two contacting surfaces. Remove ISE and check O-shape washers of the contacting surfaces.

Figure 4.51 Positions of O-shape washers to be checked

4-140

4.12.6 Removing and (801-BA80-00168-00)

Reinstalling

ISE

Module

Note Biohazard. Please exercise caution when removing and reinstalling the ISE module. Please cut off the power of the analyzer before removing and reinstalling this module.

Tools Name

Requirement

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

ISE alignment tool for sample probe

BA80-J13-01

1

Materials No. 1

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00168-00

Material Name EAM05 (ISE)

Remarks

Module

Removing steps 1

Cut off the power of the analyzer, remove the top cover of ISE module, and remove the front cover of the analyzer.

2

Unscrew the retaining screws on the air duct plate and the screws jointing the plate and ISE air duct, to remove the plate.

3

Unscrew the retaining screws of ISE air duct to remove it.

4

Disconnect the analyzer and this module.

5

Rotate the connector counterclockwise to disconnect ISE Tube 01 and the degassing membrane.

6

Disconnect vacuum tube and the degassing membrane. (Note: The connector is a quick connect fitting, you can remove the vacuum tube by pressing its top.)

7

Loosen the tube clamp on ISE waste tube with a flathead screwdriver.

8

Unscrew three M4 hexagon socket head screws of ISE module.

9

Remove ISE module. Please store the tube clamps properly.

4-141

Figure 4.52 Fixed position of ISE waste tube clamp (front view)

Note: The arrow in the tube indicates the fixed position of ISE waste tube clamp.

1

2 3

Figure 4.53 Locations of retaining screws (top view of ISE module)

Note: 1, 2, 3 showed in the figure are the holes for installing the retaining screws.

Installation steps 1

Cut off the power. Place the ISE module in the right place. ISE waste tube should traverse the through-hole at the bottom of the module.

2

Connect waste tubes: Set the tube clamp on the waste tube, and connect the tube to the waste tube interface, and fasten the tube clamp. Please do not fasten it so tightly.

4-142

Figure 4.54 Fix ISE waste tube

3

Position ISE module: Fix the module with three M4X12 hexagon socket head screws, and do not tighten them. Place the sample probe alignment tool at the ISE sample injection port. Spin the sample arm with your hands to the position just above the ISE alignment tool, and align the sample probe to the blank hole and tighten the retaining screws. Note: If it cannot be aligned by moving the module, please tighten the retaining screws in the direction as much as the alignment required to fix the module first. And then, unscrew the retaining screws on the top of the module and adjust the positions of sample injection port and the sample probe through adjusting the upper part of the module. After the alignment, tighten the screws. Remove the alignment tool.

Figure 4.55 Adjusting positions of ISE module

4-143

4

Connect buffer tubes and fix them properly.

5

Connect ISE vacuum tubes.

6

Connect wirings of the analyzer and the module according to the interface’s label.

1 2 3 4

Figure 4.56 Connection of tubes and wires

Note:

7

•

Interface of the buffer tube.

•

Wrap the buffer tubes with transparent flexible tube (1/4 inch ID) and fix it on the lateral supporting post.

•

ISE vacuum interface.

•

Wiring interfaces. They are labeled as EAM 01, EAM 02, EAM 03 and EAM 04.

Power on the analyzer and run startup procedure. Observe if the ISE module works properly. Load ISE reagent and prime the module with the buffer to check if the tubes are connected properly.

8

Place the alignment tool at the ISE sample injection port. Select Alignment -> Sample Probe Unit and run alignment in horizontal and vertical directions here.

9

Turn off the analyzer and the cut off the power to install the ISE fan. Then power on the analyzer to check if the fan works properly.

10 Cut off the power of the analyzer to install the ISE air duct. Please do not put the air duct on the wirings of the fan. 11 Install the ISE air duct plate. 4-144

12 Install the front cover of the analyzer. 13 Install the top cover of ISE module.

Validation 1

Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed.

2

Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can meet the requirements.

4.12.7 Removing and Reinstalling SIC Assembly Note Biohazard. Please exercise caution when removing and reinstalling the ISE module. Please cut off the power of the analyzer before removing and reinstalling this module.

Tools Name

Requirement

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Tweezers

/

1

Materials None

Removing steps Disconnect electrode connector and temperature sensor connector, loosen waste tube connector (1) and the buffer nozzle. Please store the retaining screws (2) of the buffer nozzle properly. Unscrew the four retaining screws (3) and nuts to move the SIC assembly.

2

1

3 Figure 4.57 Removing SIC assembly

4-145

Installation steps After the maintenance, place the SIC assembly back to the position shown in the figure below.

Figure 4.58 Installing SIC assembly

Perform the removing steps in a reverse order to reinstall the SIC assembly. If a new sample injection cup has been replaced, then the new cup should be placed 24.6mm far from the edge of the module. Shown as below.

Figure 4.59 Position of SIC assembly

Validation After the installation, please check the positions of the mixer motor and the mixer, and the position between the sample probe and ISE sample injection port. Run ISE calibration and analysis to check if ISE analysis works properly. Please pay more attention to check if the mixer works properly during ISE analysis.

4.12.8 Removing and Reinstalling SIC Note Biohazard. Please exercise caution when removing and reinstalling the ISE module. 4-146

Please cut off the power of the analyzer before removing and reinstalling this module.

Tools Name

Requirement

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Tweezers

/

1

Materials No.

FRU/Material Code

Material Name

1

801-BA80-00190-00

Mixer (FRU)

2

801-BA80-00216-00

Mixer motor (FRU)

Remarks

Removing steps You may need to remove the sample injection cup when something drops in the cup or the mixer has to be changed. Removing SIC assembly from the module can facilitate your subsequent work. For steps, please refer to the contents below. Loosen the screws for retaining the SIC plates. (Please remember the right places for later reinstallation.) Remove SIC plate carefully, and clean the cup with a tweezers or replace the mixer.

Installation steps Reinstall the plate. Place the retaining screws in the original places and tighten them.(If a torque wrench is available, please use torque of 4kgfym)

Validation Run “ISE Buffer Resorption Volume Confirmation and Alignment”, and check if the mixer works properly during ISE analysis. Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed. Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can meet the requirements.

1

Figure 4.60 SIC (Sample Injection Cup) 4-147

Note: 1: The mixer.

Figure 4.61 Mixer (801-BA80-00190-00)

4.12.9 Removing and Reinstalling Solenoid Valve Note Biohazard. Please exercise extra cautions. Please cut off the power of the analyzer before removing and reinstalling the solenoid valve. Please avoid the static during the operations to protect CPU board.

Tools Name

Requirement

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

ISE alignment tool for sample probe

BA80-J13-01

1

Removing steps Remove ISE module from the analyzer, and the back cover of the ISE module. Disconnect the CPU board from all wirings. Loosen the retaining screws on the CPU board to remove it.

4-148

Figure 4.62 Back view of ISE module

Loosen the two retaining screws of the solenoid valve and the three connectors joint to it to remove the solenoid valve.

Figure 4.63 ISE solenoid valve

Installation steps Install a new solenoid valve. Fix the two retaining screws on the solenoid valve. To join the fluidic connections, please refer to “Fluidic Diagram of ISE Module”. Install the CPU board back and fix the retaining screws. Joint all the connectors to the CPU board followed by the labels on it. Reinstall the back cover of the ISE module. Now, the ISE module is reinstalled.

4-149

Validation 1. Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. 2. Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed. 3. Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can meet the requirements.

4.12.10 Removing and (801-BA80-00213-00)

Reinstalling

Degassing

Membrane

Note Biohazard. Please exercise extra cautions.

Tools Name

Requirement

Cross screwdriver

/

Qty 1

Materials No. 1

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00213-00

Material Name

Remarks

Degassing membrane (FRU)

Removing steps Note: You can check the degassing membrane by shaking it. The good ones have no fluidic sound when shaking. Loosen the connector of the two tubes and disconnect the ISE vacuum tubes. Unscrew the two retaining screws of the degassing membrane to remove it.

Installation steps Install a new degassing membrane and fix the retaining screws to connect the tubes.

Validation 1. Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. 2. Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed. 3. Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can meet the requirements.

4.12.11 Removing (801-BA80-00214-00)

and

Reinstalling

CPU

Note Biohazard. Please exercise extra cautions. Note: Please avoid the static during the operations to protect CPU board.

4-150

Board

Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Lengthening combination tool ISE alignment tool for sample probe

1 BA80-J13-01

1

Materials No. 1

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00214-00

Material Name

Remarks

CPU Board of ISE module (FRU)

Removing steps 1

Remove the ISE module from the analyzer.

2

Unscrew the retaining screws on the back cover of the ISE module to remove it.

3

Disconnect the connector of electrode and temperature sensor to remove the rubber stopper for retaining the electrode connector. Disconnect all the wirings on CPU board.

4

Loosen the retaining screws on CPU board to remove it.

Installation steps 1

Install a new CPU board and tighten its retaining screws.

2

Fix all the wirings with the rubber stopper.

3

Joint the connectors according to their labels.

4

Reinstall the back cover of the ISE module.

5

Now, the ISE module is reinstalled.

Validation 1. Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed. 2. Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can meet the requirements.

4-151

4.12.12 Removing and (801-BA80-00184-00)

Reinstalling

Syringe

Washer

ISE syringe washer can be used to run analysis for 66,000 times at most, then you need to replace it with a new one. The washer should be replaced when it is damaged, or leaks occur around the washer, or the air bubbles in the tube cannot be removed because of the poor hermeticity.

Note Biohazard. Please exercise extra cautions.

Tools Name

Requirement

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Adjustable wrench

/

1

Materials No. 1

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00184-00

Material Name Syringe (FRU)

Remarks

washer

Removing steps 1

Remove the front cover of the analyzer and the ISE air duct plate.

2

Unscrew the two retaining screws (1) of the syringe, and loosen the connector of the tubes (2) to remove the syringe.

Figure 4.64 Fixing and connection of ISE syringe 4-152

3

Take out the syringe plunger (4).

4

Unscrew the screw caps (3) counterclockwise.

3

4 Figure 4.65 ISE syringe

5

Take out the old washer.

Installation steps 1

Put a new washer (5) into the screw cap (6).

5

6 Figure 4.66 Installation of washer

2

Traverse the syringe plunger through the screw cap.

3

Install the screw cap back to the syringe. Looking from the top of the syringe, you can see a yellow circle (7) on the syringe.(If a torque wrench is available, please use torque of 13kgf‚cm)

4-153

Figure 4.67 Installation of syringe’s screw cap

4

Reinstall the syringe and joint connectors.

Validation 1. Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. No leaks around the washer. 2. Run ISE Serum and ISE Urine calibration to check if the calibration is passed. 3. Run the precision test of ISE serum for 20 times to check if the CV value can meet the requirements.

4.12.13 Removing and Reinstalling Temperature Stabilizer (801-BA80-00215-00) Note Biohazard. Please exercise extra cautions.

Tools Name

Code

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Materials No. 1

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00215-00

Material name

Remarks

Temperature Stabilizer (FRU)

Removing steps 1

Disconnect the motor (1).

2

Disconnect the tubes (3).

3

Unscrew two M3 hexagon socket head screws (2) on the temperature stabilizer unit to remove it.

4-154

1

2

3

Figure 4.68 Fixing and connection of temperature stabilizer

Installation steps 1

Install the temperature stabilizer and tighten the retaining screws.

2

Connect tubes.

3

Connect the motor.

Validation Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. The connector of Temperature Stabilizer unit should be free of leaks.

4.12.14 Removing and Reinstalling Motor (801-BA80-00199-00) of Temperature Stabilizer Unit Note Biohazard. Please exercise extra cautions.

Tools Name

Requirement

Qty

Cross screwdriver

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Ruler

/

1

4-155

Materials No. 1

FRU/Material Code 801-BA80-00199-00

Material Name

Remarks

Motor of Temperature Stabilizer (FRU)

Removing steps 1

Remove the Temperature Stabilizer unit according to the related descriptions.

2

Unscrew the two hexagon socket head screws of the mixer motor. Take out the motor to replace with a new one.

Installation steps 1

Connect the motor with the mixer in Temperature Stabilizer unit. Shown as below.

Figure 4.69 Connection of the motor and the mixer

2

Install it according to the dimension showed in the figure below. The top of the motor should be come out about 20mm.

Figure 4.70 Motor’s position

4-156

3

Install the Temperature Stabilizer unit back to the module, fix the retaining screws, joint the tubes and connect the mixer motor.

Validation Prime ISE buffer to check if the priming works properly. The connector of Temperature Stabilizer unit should be free of leaks. If the mixer motor of the Temperature Stabilizer unit makes a slight sound every a few seconds when the ISE module is in the status of “Standby”, then the motor works normally.

4-157

4.13 Refrigeration Unit 4.13.1 Locations and FRU Details •

By using the liquid circulating refrigeration technology, the BS-800 chemistry analyzer provides refrigeration for reagents and samples for 24 hours per day, keeping them in a 2-8°C environment.

•

The refrigeration system is composed of the refrigeration module, reagent compartment unit, sample compartment unit, circulating pump, and tubes. The reagent and sample compartment units are connected in serial, and the circulating pump is designed with a drain outlet to discharge refrigerants.

2 1

4 3 Figure 4.71 Locations 1 of refrigeration unit FRU

5

Figure 4.72 Locations 2 of refrigeration unit FRU

4-158

6 Figure 4.73 Locations 3 of refrigeration unit FRU

6

Figure 4.74 Locations 3 of refrigeration unit FRU Table 4.7 FRU details of refrigeration unit

No.

FRU Code

Material Name

1

801-BA80-00073-00

Reagent refrigeration chamber assembly*

2

801-BA80-00067-00

Sample refrigeration chamber assembly*

3

801-BA80-00109-00

Reagent refrigeration module assembly

4

801-BA80-00154-00

Refrigeration circulating pump PD-E051IT3 assembly

5

801-BX50-00074-00

Refrigeration fan cable

6

801-BX50-00076-00

Reagent refrigeration temperature sensor cable

7

801-BA80-00165-00

Refrigerant

Remarks

* Refer to the reagent carousel unit and sample carousel unit sections for removing and installation of the reagent and sample refrigeration chamber assemblies.

4-159

4.13.2 Replacement of Refrigerant Exploded view

Figure 4.75 Outline of prime fixture

Figure 4.76 Installation of reagent compartment and prime fixture

Plug

Prime fixture

Sample compartment Figure 4.77 Installation of sample compartment and prime fixture

Tools Table 4.8 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigerant

4-160

Name Cross screwdriver

Requirement /

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Tweezers

/

1

Electric torch

/

1

Cotton swabs

Defatted

Several

Prime fixture

BA80-J46

1

Refrigerant

801-BA80-00165-00

6 bottles

/

1

Refrigerant bucket

head

Qty

recycle

Procedure of discharging refrigerant When to do: •

The refrigerant inside the refrigeration system should be discharged through the drain outlet if the refrigeration module, circulating pump, sample compartment or reagent compartment is replaced.

Procedure: •

Switch off the power supply of the instrument.

•

Remove the rear panel, the panel at the reagent compartment prime port, and the sample compartment cover.

•

Remove the insulating foam from the drain tube of the circulating pump, and then put the drain tube into a refrigerant recycle bucket with volume no less than 4L. Make sure that the drain outlet is lower than the outlet of the circulating pump. Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamp on the drainage plug, and then remove the drainage plug.

•

Open the air vent on the reagent compartment and sample compartment. The refrigerant flows into the bucket under the gravity force.

•

When the refrigerant is completely discharged, block the outlet of the drain tube, tighten the tube clamp, and then install the insulating foam. Fill the new refrigerant according to the steps above in reversed order.

Precautions: •

During refrigerant discharging, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from spraying out and dropping on PCBs and connectors.

•

The discharged refrigerant must be retrieved.

•

General or partial ventilation must be provided to ensure good working environment.

•

Use oil-proof chemical resistant gloves during operation.

•

Wash your hands with fresh water after finishing the operation.

•

The refrigerant should be stored while sealed properly, and it must not be exposed to air for a long time.

4-161

Procedure of installing refrigerant When to do: •

Before the instrument leaves the factory.

•

The refrigerant is insufficient when the instrument is initially installed at the user end. (The refrigeration is less than one bottle.)

•

The refrigerant needs to be filled during component repairing. If the refrigeration module, circulating pump, sample compartment or reagent compartment is replaced, the refrigerant inside the refrigeration system should be discharged through the drain outlet. New refrigerant then should be filled for about six bottles.

•

Refrigerant needs not to be discharged when the refrigeration fan, refrigeration board temperature sensor, and reagent temperature sensor are replaced.

Procedure: •

Prepare one to six bottles of refrigerant (801-BA80-00165-00), one funnel, and three prime fixtures (BA80-J46).

•

Switch off the main power supply of the instrument.

•

Loosen the sealing plug screws at the prime port and air vent of the reagent compartment and at the air vent of the sample compartment.

•

Install two prime fixtures without plug at the air vent and prime port of the reagent compartment, and then install a prime fixture with plug at the air vent of the sample compartment.

•

Connect the funnel with the prime fixture at the reagent compartment’s prime port, and then remove the plug from the prime fixture on the sample compartment. Fill the refrigerant into the funnel, and exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from spilling out. When the refrigerant level reaches the prime connector, install the plug on the prime fixture of the sample compartment.

•

Check if the sensor cable of the refrigeration board is intact. Run the operating software, select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit – Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Curve, search and check the refrigeration parameters, and then set the refrigeration status flag as 0.

•

Turn on the circulating pump P02 for one minute and then turn it off. Remove the plug from the prime fixture of the sample compartment, and then check if the fluid level comes down after half a minute. If it does, repeat steps 5-7 until the refrigerant level no longer comes down while remaining at the prime port of the reagent compartment.

•

Remove the prime fixtures in the correct order. First remove the prime fixture at the air vent of the sample compartment with extra refrigerant discharged into the sample compartment. Make sure that no extra refrigerant spills out when the two prime fixtures on the reagent compartment are removed.

•

Install and tighten all sealing plug screws on the reagent compartment and sample compartment.

•

Turn on the circulating pump P02 and reagent refrigeration. The temperature curve is displayed. Check the radiator current and refrigeration board temperature for about 20 minutes. If the radiator current is between 2-.5A and

4-162

no alarms are triggered indicating low refrigeration temperature, set the refrigeration status flag as 0. •

Install the insulating foam heads on the prime port and air vent of the reagent compartment, and then stick transparent adhesive paper.

Figure 4.78 Reagent refrigeration temperature curve

Precautions: •

During refrigerant priming, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from spraying out and dropping on PCBs and connectors.

•

Fill refrigerant strictly as instructed by the procedure mentioned above. When turning on the circulating pump, be sure to block the air vent of the sample compartment.

•

General or partial ventilation must be provided to ensure good working environment.

•

Use oil-proof chemical resistant gloves during operation.

•

Wash your hands with fresh water after finishing the operation.

•

The refrigerant should be stored while sealed properly, and it must not be exposed to air for a long time.

Alignment and confirmation (regular check of refrigerant) When to do: •

The instrument has been filled with refrigerant before leaving the factory. The refrigerant level, however, may come down due to some unstable factors caused during instrument transportation, such as air bubble drifting. When installing the instrument at the user end, service engineers should check if the refrigerant is sufficient.

4-163

•

When performing annually spontaneous maintenance at the user end, service engineers should check the refrigerant inside the refrigeration tubes, and if necessary, fill more refrigerants. Also service engineers should remove and check the filter screen from the prime port of the reagent compartment, and if necessary, clean it.

Figure 4.79 Fluid level of refrigeration system

Figure 4.80 Filter structure of refrigeration system

Procedure: •

Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the plug screws on the air vent and prime port of the reagent compartment.

•

Use a pair of tweezers to remove the filter from the prime port and then clean the filter with fresh water.

•

Use an electric torch to visually check the refrigerant level from the air vent and prime port of the reagent compartment. If visual check is not allowed due to the environment, use a cotton swab to sense the refrigerant level from the air vent and prime port. Make sure that the refrigerant level is no lower than the center line of the horizontal connector tube. The center line of the tube is about 15mm away from the top of the connector.

•

If the refrigerant level does not meet the requirements, fill more refrigerants according to the steps described in this section.

•

After finishing the prime, put the filter back to the prime port.

•

Install the plug screws on the air vent and prime port of the reagent compartment.

4-164

4.13.3 Removing/Installation of Reagent Refrigeration Module Exploded view Inlet

Outlet

Mounting screws

Figure 4.81 Reagent refrigeration module

Tools Table 4.9 Necessary tools for replacement of reagent refrigeration module

Name Cross screwdriver

Requirement /

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Prime fixture

BA80-J46

1

Refrigerant

801-BA80-00165-00

6 bottles

/

1

802 glue

095-000052-00

1

Adhesive tape

095-000049-00

1 roll

Refrigerant bucket

head

Qty

recycle

Removing steps When to do: •

The refrigeration module (115-005636-00) should be checked and replaced if a refrigeration alarm is given due to impaired radiators and the refrigerating temperature is greater than 8°C.

Procedure: •

Switch off the power supply of the instrument and remove the rear panel.

4-165

•

Disconnect the ten radiator cables, two temperature protection switch cables, two refrigeration fan cables, and one temperature sensor cable of the reagent refrigeration module.

•

Discharge the refrigerant from the refrigeration system according to the steps described in the previous section.

•

Remove the insulating foam from the inlet and outlet of the refrigeration module. Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamps on the inlet and outlet, and then unplug the fluidic tubes.

•

Use a hex wrench to loosen the two mounting screws from the refrigeration module, and then pull out the refrigeration module in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Precautions: •

During refrigerant discharging, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from spraying out and dropping on PCBs and connectors.

•

When unplugging the inlet and outlet tubes from the refrigeration module, hold them carefully to prevent the residual fluid from spilling on PCBs and connectors.

Installation steps Procedure: •

Install the new refrigeration module by pushing it along the guide slot on the bottom plate of the whole unit, making the fan side facing inside of the instrument.

•

Tighten the two mounting screws using a hex wrench.

•

Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the labels on the refrigeration module and use a flathead screwdriver to install the tube clamps. Wrap the insulating foam using class A insulating adhesive tape AS-ATAPEC1T-9M (095-000049-00).

•

Connect the ten radiator cables, two temperature protection switch cables, two refrigeration fan cables, and one temperature sensor cable of the reagent refrigeration module.

•

Fill the refrigeration system with refrigerant according to the steps described in the previous section.

•

Reinstall the enclosure of the instrument and switch on the power supply.

Precautions: •

Connect the fluidic tubes properly.

•

Do not fix the tube clamp on a barb connector.

•

Wrap the insulating foam tightly to avoid any space.

Alignment and confirmation Procedure: •

Switch on the power supply of the instrument to turn on refrigeration. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Reagent

4-166

Refrigeration Temperature Curve, and then check if the current of the radiators are between 2-6.5A.

4.13.4 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Circulating Pump Exploded view

Figure 4.82 Removing/Installation of refrigeration circulating pump

Figure 4.83 Inlet and outlet of refrigeration circulating pump

Tools Table 4.10 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigeration circulating pump

Name Cross screwdriver

Requirement /

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Prime fixture

BA80-J46

1

Refrigerant

801-BA80-00165-00

6 bottles

/

1

802 glue

095-000052-00

1

Adhesive tape

095-000049-00

1 roll

Refrigerant bucket

head

Qty

recycle

4-167

Removing steps When to do: •

The reagent refrigeration circulation pump should be checked and replaced if an alarm is given indicating refrigerating temperature too low.

Procedure: •

Switch off the power supply of the instrument and remove the rear panel. You will see the refrigeration circulating pump inside the instrument.

•

Disconnect the 24V power cord from the circulating pump.

•

Discharge the refrigerant from the refrigeration system according to the steps described in the previous section.

•

Remove the insulating foam from the inlet and outlet of the refrigeration circulating pump. Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamps on the inlet and outlet of the circulating pump, and then unplug the fluidic tubes.

•

Use a hex wrench to loosen the two retaining screws on the circulating pump and then remove the circulating pump.

Precautions: •

During refrigerant discharging, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from spraying out and dropping on PCBs and connectors.

•

When unplugging the fluidic tubes, hold them carefully to prevent the residual fluid from spilling on PCBs and connectors.

Installation steps Procedure: •

Connect the outlet with the tube of the refrigeration module and the inlet with the other tube. Tighten the tube clamps.

•

Wrap the insulating foam using AS-ATAPEC1T-9M(095-000049-00).

•

Fix the circulating pump assembly on its bracket using two screws, making the pump head in the front and the pump end in the back.

•

Connect the power cord of the circulating pump.

•

Fill the refrigeration system with refrigerant.

•

Install the enclosure of the instrument and make the instrument standby.

class

A

insulating

adhesive

tape

Precautions: •

Connect the fluidic tubes properly.

•

Do not fix the tube clamp on a barb connector.

•

Wrap the insulating foam tightly to avoid any space.

Alignment and confirmation Procedure: •

Switch on the power supply of the instrument to turn on refrigeration. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Reagent

4-168

Refrigeration Temperature Curve, and then check if the refrigerating temperature is no less than -8°C.

4.13.5 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Fans Exploded view Refrigeration module Screw 1 Fan assembly Screw 2 Screw 3 2

Screw 4

1

Figure 4.84 Removing/Installation of refrigeration fan assembly

Figure 4.85 Reagent refrigeration fans

Tools Table 4.11 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigeration fans

Name Cross screwdriver

Requirement head

Qty

/

1

Hex wrench

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Removing steps When to do: •

The refrigeration fans (801-BX50-00076-00) should be checked and replaced if an alarm is given indicating refrigeration fan abnormal. 4-169

•

The refrigeration fans need to be removed when they are going to be cleaned.

Procedure: •

Switch off the power supply of the instrument.

•

Remove the rear panel and disconnect the power cords of the two refrigeration fans.

•

Take out the water tank from the front cabinet and use a cross head screwdriver to remove the plate behind the water tank.

•

Loosen screws 1 and 2, and remove screws 3 and 4. Lift the refrigeration fan assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow and then pull it out.

•

Loosen the four screws on the fans and take out the fans. (This step is not needed when service engineers clean the fans.)

Precautions: •

Handle the water tank carefully to prevent water from spraying out.

•

When removing screws 3 and 4, exercise caution to prevent them from dropping into the instrument.

Installation steps Procedure: •

Lay the new fans in the same way as the old fans are set and arrange the cables. Refer to the wind direction marked on the fan cover, and make sure that the fans are installed correctly with wind entering the refrigeration module from its front and leaving from its back.

•

Tighten each fan with four screws and nuts. Exercise caution to avoid damaging the fan cover, which is plastic. Install the refrigeration fan assembly.

•

Install the fan assembly on the refrigeration module in the correct angle.

•

Install screws 3 and 4, and tighten screws 1-4.

•

Connect the fan cables, and restore the water tank and instrument enclosure.

Precautions: •

Do not mistake the installation direction of the fans.

•

When installing the fans, use the screwdriver carefully to avoid damaging the fan cover.

•

Ensure that the protrusion below the fan assembly is inserted into the counterpart on the refrigeration air duct.

•

When installing screws 3 and 4, exercise caution to prevent them from dropping into the instrument.

Alignment and confirmation Procedure: •

Switch on the power supply of the instrument to turn on refrigeration. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Fan Status Query, and then check if the refrigeration fans 1 and 2 are normal.

4-170

4.13.6 Removing/Installation Sensors

of

Refrigeration

Temperature

Exploded view

Figure 4.86 Removing/Installation of temperature sensor in reagent compartment

6

Figure 4.87 Removing/Installation of temperature sensor on reagent refrigeration module

Tools Table 4.12 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigeration temperature sensors

Name Cross screwdriver

Requirement head

Qty

/

1

Snap-off knife

/

1

Sharp-nose pliers

/

1

802 glue

095-000052-00

1

Adhesive tape

095-000049-00

1 roll

Removing steps When to do: •

The temperature sensor on the reagent refrigeration module should be replaced if an alarm is given indicating refrigerating temperature too low and the temperature is obviously abnormal.

•

The temperature sensor in the reagent compartment should be replaced if an alarm is given indicating refrigerating temperature beyond range and the temperature is obviously abnormal. 4-171

Steps of replacement •

Find the sensors according to the exploded view.

•

Disconnect the temperature sensor cables.

•

Use a knife to scratch the insulating foam around the temperature sensors and then remove the sensors with a pair of sharp-nose pliers.

•

Coat the front end of the new sensors with heat conductive silicon and screw the sensors into the mounting holes using a pair of sharp-nose pliers.

•

Fill the breach of the insulating foam with 820 glue.

•

Wrap the breach with adhesive tape.

•

Connect the sensor cables and install the instrument enclosure.

Precautions: •

Prior to installation, make sure that the sensors are intact.

•

When using sharp-nose pliers to pinch the sensors, operate carefully to avoid breaking the sensor cables.

•

Apply the 820 glue according to glue operation process.

Installation steps /

Alignment and confirmation Procedure: •

Switch on the power supply of the instrument to turn on refrigeration, and then check if the refrigerating temperature is between -5-30°C.

4-172

BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer

Service Manual (Volume 2)

Table of Contents Intellectual Property Statement .................................................................................................................... ii Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party................................................................................................... iii Warranty ...................................................................................................................................................... iv

Exemptions ................................................................................................................................. iv Return Policy ................................................................................................................................................v

Return Procedure ........................................................................................................................ v Company Contact........................................................................................................................ v Table of Contents ······················································································ I 1 System Description ·············································································· 1-1 1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 1-2 1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit........................................................................................................... 1-3 1.3 Functions ............................................................................................................................................. 1-5

2 System Performance and Workflow ························································· 2-1 2.1 Technical Specifications...................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.1.1 Common .......................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System ................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System ................................................................................ 2-4 2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System ............................................................................... 2-5 2.1.5 Specifications of Operation .......................................................................................... 2-6 2.2 Workflows ........................................................................................................................................... 2-8

2.2.1 Common Workflows ...................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.2 Workflow Descriptions .................................................................................................. 2-8 2.2.3 Measuring Points ............................................................................................................. 2-9 3 Installation ························································································ 3-1 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 3-2 3.2 Before Installation ............................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2.1 Environment Check ....................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.2 System Configuration ..................................................................................................... 3-3 3.3 Installation Requirements ................................................................................................................... 3-4

I

3.3.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements ......................................................................... 3-4 3.3.2 Power Supply and Noise ................................................................................................ 3-4 3.3.3 Water Supply and Drainage ........................................................................................... 3-4 3.4 Computer Configuration (for International Customers)...................................................................... 3-6

3.4.1 CPU................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.4.2 RAM.................................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.4.3 Network Adapter ............................................................................................................ 3-6 3.4.4 Serial Port ......................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.4.5 Hard Disk Defragment .................................................................................................. 3-6 3.4.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby ................................................................. 3-7 3.4.7 Screen Display Properties .............................................................................................. 3-8 3.4.8 Auto Awake/Shutdown Setup ...................................................................................... 3-9 3.5 Installation steps................................................................................................................................ 3-12

3.5.1 Unpacking ...................................................................................................................... 3-12 3.5.2 Installation...................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.5.3 Fluidic Connection ....................................................................................................... 3-16 3.5.4 Connection of Chemistry Analyzer ........................................................................... 3-19 3.5.5 Installation of Hub (optional)..................................................................................... 3-19 3.5.6 Installation of Data Management Software .............................................................. 3-20 3.5.7 Powering On .................................................................................................................. 3-22 3.5.8 Fluidic Prime.................................................................................................................. 3-25 3.5.9 Initial Maintenance Logs.............................................................................................. 3-29 3.5.10 Startup Initialization ................................................................................................... 3-29 3.5.11 Parameter Import and Chemistry Configuration ................................................... 3-31 3.5.12 Activation and Installation of ISE Electrodes (optional) ..................................... 3-33 3.5.13 Installation of Operating Software .......................................................................... 3-37 4 Overview of Modules and Units ······························································ 4-1 4.1 Shells Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 4-2

4.1.1 Functions.......................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.2 Locations and FRU Details ........................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Front & Back Shielding Covers .................................... 4-4 4.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Side Plates ........................................................................ 4-4 4.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel....................................................................... 4-5 4.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Cover ................................................. 4-5 4.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring ............................................................................................ 4-6 4.1.8 Replacement of Lock Catch .......................................................................................... 4-6 4.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly .............................................................................................................. 4-7

4.2.1 Functions.......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.2.2 Locations and FRU details ............................................................................................ 4-8 4.2.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables ....................................................... 4-9 4.2.4 Replacement of Metal Plate for Cuvette ................................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Replacement of Carousel Home Sensor and Encoder Sensor Cables ................. 4-13 II

4.2.6 Replacement of High-speed Motor ........................................................................... 4-15 4.2.7 Replacement of Slip Ring Cables ............................................................................... 4-16 4.2.8 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette .............................................................................. 4-18 4.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly.............................................................................................................. 4-19

4.3.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-19 4.3.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-19 4.3.3 Replacement of Inner Ring of Reagent Carousel Body ......................................... 4-20 4.3.4 Replacement of Outer Ring of Reagent Carousel Body ........................................ 4-22 4.3.5 Replacement of Reagent Cuvette Base ...................................................................... 4-23 4.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Chamber Assembly .......................................................... 4-24 4.3.7 Replacement of Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor Cables .................... 4-26 4.3.8 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor Cables ....................................................... 4-27 4.3.9 Replacement of High-speed Motor ........................................................................... 4-28 4.4 Sample Carousel Assembly ............................................................................................................... 4-30

4.4.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-30 4.4.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-30 4.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Body and Cuvette Holder Base 2 ........ 4-32 4.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Body, 16 Cuvette Holder and 13 Cuvette Holder Adapter ....................................................................................................................... 4-33 4.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly ................................................ 4-34 4.4.6 Replacement of Encoder Sensor and Carousel Home Sensor Cables ................. 4-36 4.5 Syringe Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 4-40

4.5.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-40 4.5.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-40 4.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250μl and Reagent Syringe 1ml ......................... 4-40 4.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules ..................................... 4-42 4.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly .................................................. 4-44 4.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece................................................................... 4-46 4.6 Mixer Assembly ................................................................................................................................ 4-48

4.6.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-48 4.6.2 Locations and FRU Details ......................................................................................... 4-48 4.6.3 Replacement of Mixers ................................................................................................ 4-49 4.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Motor Assembly ................................................................... 4-49 4.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler Conversion Board ....... 4-51 4.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Transmission Assembly ....................................................... 4-53 4.6.7 Replacement of 3-probe/mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly ............................... 4-54 4.6.8 Replacement of Synchronous Cog Belt (Endless Belt, 84-tooth, S3M, 6mm Wide)4-55 4.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly .................................................................... 4-56 4.6.10 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ......................................... 4-58 4.6.11 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4................................................. 4-59 4.6.12 Replacement of Mixer Vertical Motor Assembly .................................................. 4-60 4.6.13 Replacement of Mixer Rotary/Vertical Sensor Cables ......................................... 4-61 4.7 Sample Probe Assembly.................................................................................................................... 4-62 III

4.7.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-62 4.7.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-62 4.7.3 Replacement of Sample Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Sample Probe Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 4-63 4.7.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M) ......................................................................................................4-65 4.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly ...................................................... 4-66 4.7.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ........................................... 4-68 4.7.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4................................................... 4-68 4.7.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly ................................................................ 4-69 4.7.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 4-70 4.8 Probe R1 Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 4-72

4.8.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-72 4.8.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-72 4.8.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R1 Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 4-73 4.8.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M)....................................................................................................................... 4-75 4.8.5 Replacement of Probe R1 Drive Assembly .............................................................. 4-77 4.8.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ........................................... 4-78 4.8.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4................................................... 4-79 4.8.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly ................................................................ 4-80 4.8.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 4-81 4.9 Probe R2 Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 4-82

4.9.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 4-82 4.9.2 Locations and FRU details .......................................................................................... 4-82 4.9.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Anticollision Spring, and Probe R2 Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 4-83 4.9.4 Replacement of 3-Probe/Mixer Motor Assembly and Synchronous Cog Belt (84-tooth, S3M)....................................................................................................................... 4-85 4.9.5 Replacement of Probe R2 Drive Assembly .............................................................. 4-87 4.9.6 Replacement of Synchronous Pulley .P16MXL6.4DF ........................................... 4-88 4.9.7 Replacement of Synchronous Belt .B175MXL6.4 ................................................... 4-89 4.9.8 Replacement of 59 Step Motor Assembly ................................................................ 4-90 4.9.9 Replacement of Cables of Probe Rotary Sensor, Obstruct Detection Sensor, and Vertical Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 4-91 4.10 Bar Code Reader ............................................................................................................................. 4-92

4.10.1 Tools ............................................................................................................................. 4-92 4.10.2 Maintenance of Sample Bar Code Assembly ......................................................... 4-92 4.10.3 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader .............................................................. 4-94 4.10.4 Maintenance of Reagent Bar Code Assembly ........................................................ 4-97 4.10.5 Replacement of Reagent Bar Code Reader...........................................................4-100 IV

4.10.6 Replacement of Antifogging Temperature Switch Cables .................................4-102 4.10.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater Cables .........................................................4-107 4.11 Photoelectric Unit.......................................................................................................................... 4-112

4.11.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-112 4.11.2 Components and Structure .....................................................................................4-112 4.11.3 Assembly Locations and Replacement Solutions.................................................4-115 4.11.4 Adjustment of Photometer .....................................................................................4-124 4.12 ISE Module (Optional).................................................................................................................. 4-131

4.12.1 Functions ...................................................................................................................4-131 4.12.2 Components of ISE Unit ........................................................................................4-131 4.12.3 Troubleshooting of ISE Tube ................................................................................4-136 4.12.4 ISE Buffer Resorption Volume Confirmation and Alignment ..........................4-139 4.12.5 Electrode’s O-shape Washer (801-BA80-00185-00) Check ................................4-140 4.12.6 Removing and Reinstalling ISE Module (801-BA80-00168-00) ........................4-141 4.12.7 Removing and Reinstalling SIC Assembly ............................................................4-145 4.12.8 Removing and Reinstalling SIC ..............................................................................4-146 4.12.9 Removing and Reinstalling Solenoid Valve ...........................................................4-148 4.12.10 Removing and Reinstalling Degassing Membrane (801-BA80-00213-00) .....4-150 4.12.11 Removing and Reinstalling CPU Board (801-BA80-00214-00) .......................4-150 4.12.12 Removing and Reinstalling Syringe Washer (801-BA80-00184-00).................4-152 4.12.13 Removing and Reinstalling Temperature Stabilizer (801-BA80-00215-00) ....4-154 4.12.14 Removing and Reinstalling Motor (801-BA80-00199-00) of Temperature Stabilizer Unit........................................................................................................................4-155 4.13 Refrigeration Unit ......................................................................................................................... 4-158

4.13.1 Locations and FRU Details .....................................................................................4-158 4.13.2 Replacement of Refrigerant ....................................................................................4-160 4.13.3 Removing/Installation of Reagent Refrigeration Module ..................................4-165 4.13.4 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Circulating Pump................................4-167 4.13.5 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Fans ......................................................4-169 4.13.6 Removing/Installation of Refrigeration Temperature Sensors .........................4-171 Table of Contents ······················································································ I 5 Hardware Circuits ··············································································· 5-1 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 5-2 5.2 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.3 Summary of PCBAs ............................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.4 Locations of the PCBAs ...................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.5 Removing PCBAs ............................................................................................................................... 5-9 5.6 Functions of PCBAs ......................................................................................................................... 5-10

5.6.1 Main Control Board .....................................................................................................5-10 5.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board ............................................................................. 5-15 5.6.3 BA80 Sample Control Drive Board............................................................................ 5-22 5.6.4 BA80 Reagent Control Drive Board .......................................................................... 5-28

V

5.6.5 AC Drive Board ............................................................................................................ 5-34 5.6.6 Reagent Refrigeration Board ....................................................................................... 5-38 5.6.7 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board ........................................................................ 5-45 5.6.8 External Air Pump Drive Board ................................................................................. 5-48 5.6.9 Communication Conversion Board ........................................................................... 5-49 5.6.10 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board................................................. 5-50 5.6.11 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board ....................................................... 5-54 5.6.12 AD Collection Board ................................................................................................. 5-57 5.6.13 Preamplifier Board...................................................................................................... 5-60 5.6.14 Level Sense Board ....................................................................................................... 5-64 5.6.15 Pressure Detection Board .......................................................................................... 5-67 5.6.16 Clog Detection Board ................................................................................................ 5-70 5.6.17 Water Quality Detection Board ................................................................................ 5-74 5.7 Power Supply System ....................................................................................................................... 5-76

5.7.1 Description of Power Supply System ........................................................................ 5-76 5.7.2 Performance Indices .....................................................................................................5-77 5.7.3 Functional Diagram ......................................................................................................5-78 5.7.4 BA40 Power Supply Assembly .................................................................................... 5-79 5.7.5 12V/30A Power Supply Board ................................................................................... 5-87 5.7.6 24V/6A Power Supply Board ..................................................................................... 5-89 5.7.7 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board .................................................................. 5-91 5.7.8 DC Power Supply Conversion Board ........................................................................ 5-92 5.7.9 Tips for Troubleshooting Power Supply System ...................................................... 5-95 5.8 Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................................................... 5-96

6 Hydropneumatic System ······································································· 6-1 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.2 Hydropneumatic Diagram ................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System ................................................................................................ 6-5

6.3.1 Sampling Unit .................................................................................................................. 6-5 6.3.2 Cuvette Wash Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Water Supply Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-7 6.3.4 Waste Unit ........................................................................................................................ 6-8 6.3.5 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit............................................................................................. 6-9 6.3.6 Other ............................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.4 Removing and Installation of Hydropneumatic Components ........................................................... 6-11

6.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 6-11 6.4.2 Sampling Unit ................................................................................................................ 6-12 6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit ........................................................................................................ 6-13 6.4.4 Water Supply Unit ......................................................................................................... 6-20 6.4.5 Waste Unit ...................................................................................................................... 6-23 6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit........................................................................................... 6-26 6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials .................................................................................................... 6-28

VI

6.5.1 Pumps ............................................................................................................................. 6-28 6.5.2 Solenoid Valves ............................................................................................................. 6-28 6.5.3 Connectors ..................................................................................................................... 6-29 6.5.4 Tubes............................................................................................................................... 6-32 7 Alignment and Maintenance ··································································· 7-1 7.1 Basic Operations ................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.2 Alignment Procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-4

7.2.1 Photoelectric Unit ........................................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.2 Reaction Carousel Unit .................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.3 Sample Carousel Unit ..................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.4 Reagent Carousel Unit.................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units ................................................................................................... 7-9 7.2.6 Bar Code Units .............................................................................................................. 7-13 7.2.7 Hydropneumatic Unit .................................................................................................. 7-16 7.2.8 Pyrology Unit ................................................................................................................ 7-19 8 Alarms and Troubleshooting ··································································· 8-1 9 Scheduled Maintenance List ·································································· 9-1

VII

5

5-1

Hardware Circuits

5.1 Overview This chapter describes the functions of the printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs) used on the BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer.

5-2

5.2 Safety Precautions While the instrument is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your hands or other objects. To remove a circuit board, you should first disconnect the instrument from the (AC) power supply. Please wear a pair of antistatic gloves or take other measures to prevent static electricity prior to removing a circuit board.

5-3

5.3 Summary of PCBAs Sequence number and description of PCBAs The table bellows provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the BS-800/BS-820 Chemistry Analyzer and briefly describes their functions. PCBA (PCB)

Functions

No.

Main control board 051-000203-00

The main control board is the control center of the instrument. It is mainly used to fulfil the following tasks: 1). communicating with a computer through the RS232 serial port or the Ethernet interface (reserved) to transmit data and instructions; 2) communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the extended serial ports to transmit data and instructions; and 3) controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection of the AD collection board and receiving the photoelectric data. It provides the BDM/JTAG interface for debugging software and downloading application programs. The application software of the main control board can be updated through the RS232 serial port.

#1

Communication conversion board BA40-30-61377

The communication conversion board is the bridge used for communication between the main control board and a computer. It provides the serial port, network port and USB port for connecting the main control board; and it provides the standard DB9 serial port, RJ45 network port and standard USB port for connecting a computer. Note: Only the serial port and network port are used now, and other ports are reserved.

#2

Reaction carousel temperature collection board 051-000214-00

The reaction carousel temperature collection board adjusts the signal of the reaction carousel temperature sensor and controls it for AD conversion. It provides a serial peripheral interface (SPI) and a power supply jack for the reaction carousel heater and connects with the wash solution temperature control board via the slip ring.

#3

Cleaning fluid temperature collection board 248H051-000449-00

The cleaning fluid temperature collection board adjusts the signals of three cleaning fluid temperature sensors and one environment temperature sensor and controls them for AD conversion. It provides a SPI interface for connecting with the wash temperature control board.

#4

5-4

PCBA (PCB)

Functions

Control drive board (S) 051-000205-00

The sample control drive board is used to drive and control the inner and outer sample carousels, the sample probe, the sample mixers and related components.

#5

Control drive board (R) 051-000204-00

The reagent control drive board drives and controls the reagent carousel inner and outer rings, the probe R1/R2, and related components.

#6

Wash temperature control board 051-000206-00

The wash temperature control board drives and controls the reagent mixers, cuvette wash station, reaction carousel and temperature control assemblies.

#7

Reagent refrigeration board 051-000207-00

The reagent refrigeration board is used to: refrigerate reagents via the radiators and circulating pump; indicate refrigerating temperature; drive the fans and the demisting circuit of the reagent bar code reader; and powers the ISE module.

#8

Sample probe level sense board 051-000362-00 Reagent probe level sense board 051-000363-00

The two boards respectively sense the level of samples and reagents, and detect/convert the signals of the two vertical obstruct detection sensors.

#9

Clog detection board 051-000218-00

The clog detection board detects clogs inside the sample probe by checking the pressure of the fluidic tube when the sample probes aspirates samples.

#10

AD collection board 051-000405-00

The AD collection board adjusts the photoelectric signals output by the preamplifier board and controls it for AD conversion. It provides a SPI interface for connecting with the main control board.

#11

Preamplifier board 051-000213-00

The preamplifier board converts the signals of the discrete photodiode array from analog to digital and then amplifies them.

#12

Pressure detection board 051-000216-00

The pressure detection board checks the pressure of the vacuum compression pump tube, and processes and converts the analog signals output by the water quality detection board. It provides a serial port for communication and transmitting pressure data and water quality data.

#13

External air pump drive board 051-000359-00

The external air pump drive board receives the air pump control signal from the wash temperature control board and controls the switch to turn on/off the air pump. It provides two interfaces for connecting with the AC cooling fans.

Inside the external air pump module

5-5

No.

PCBA (PCB)

Functions

No.

24V/6A power supply board BX50-30-89627

The 24V/6A power supply board switch on/off the water inlet pump power supply according to the fluidic pressure signals, ensuring proper pressure of the water inlet tube.

Inside the water supply module

AC drive board 051-000208-00

By receiving control signals from the sample/reagent control drive board and the wash temperature control board, the AC drive board drives the AC pump and AC heater and allocates power supply to power the whole unit.

#14

DC power supply conversion board 051-000209-00

The DC power supply conversion board receives the A5V digital, D12V/E12V analog, C12V power and B24V power, and then shifts them to the analog power supply conversion board, sample/reagent drive control board, and wash temperature control board.

#15

Five-probe/mixer conversion board 051-000210-00

The five-probe/mixer conversion board is used to shifts the signals of the sample/reagent control drive board, wash temperature control board, sample/reagent level sense board, sample/reagent mixer motor, and rotation speed.

#16

Water quality detection board 051-000211-00

The water quality detection board converts the quality of the test water into changes of output analog voltage.

#17

12V/30A power supply board 051-000212-00

The 12V/30A power supply board provides F12V power supply for the radiators.

#18

Wash bump optical coupler conversion board 051-000394-00

The wash bump optical coupler conversion board is used to shift the cable of the wash bump optical coupler.

#19

Analog power supply conversion board BA38-30-88342

The analog power supply conversion board converts the A5V DC/DC digital of the BA40 power supply assembly into +/-12V analog and then provides it for the AC collection board and preamplifier board.

#20

24V/6A power supply board BX50-30-89627

The 24V/6A power supply board is used to power the fans and circulating pump of the reagent refrigeration board.

#21

12V power supply board BA40-30-61623

These boards are used to power the whole unit, outputting the A12V, A5V digital, D12V/E12V analog, C12V power, B24V power, and the B12V power for partial radiators.

#22

24V power supply board BA40-30-61625 Power supply conversion board BA40-30-61627

5-6

5.4 Locations of the PCBAs The figure below shows the locations of the PCBAs in the whole unit.

Wash temperature control board

Main control board Analog power supply DC power supply 5-probe/mixer Clog detection board conversion board conversion board conversion board

Figure 5.1 Front left view

Figure 5.2 Front right view

5-7

Figure 5.3 Rear view

5-8

5.5 Removing PCBAs To remove a PCBA, unplug the connectors on it and then loosen the retaining screws.

5-9

5.6 Functions of PCBAs 5.6.1 Main Control Board Functions and principles The main control board (051-000203-00) is used to fulfil the following functions: •

Communicating with a computer through the serial port to transmit data and instructions and to update the application programs of the PCBAs.

•

Communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the extended serial ports to transmit data and instructions.

•

Controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection of the AD collection board and receiving the photoelectric data.

•

Providing the BDM/JTAG interface for debugging software and downloading application programs.

•

Providing the network interface for reservation.

•

Checking the PCBAs’ voltage and giving an alarm in certain conditions.

The figure below shows the relation between the main control board and other PCBAs. DC power supply conversion board

Sample control drive board

Reagent control drive board

Wash temperature control board

AD collection board

Reagent refrigeration board

ISE module

Main control board

PC

The functional diagram of the main control board is as shown below.

5-10

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the main control board is as shown below.

5-11

Power LED

Network LED

FPGA LED

Connectors The main control board includes the following connectors. Power supply: Power supply input (J1): 6-pin, providing +/-12V analog and +5V digital for the PCBAs. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

+12V

11.4~12.6V

2

-12V

-11.4~-12.6V 5-12

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

3

+5V

4.75~5.25V

4

12VGND

/

5

12VGND

/

6

GND

/

Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals: •

Connector (J2) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.

•

1# connector (J3) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for communication with the sample control drive board.

•

2# connector (J4) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for communication with the reagent control drive board.

•

3# connector (J10) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for reservation.

•

4# connector (J11) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for communication with the wash temperature control board.

•

5# connector (J6) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for reservation.

•

Connector (J5) for reagent refrigeration board: 8-pin, RS422, used for communication with the reagent refrigeration board.

•

Connector (J7) for AD collection board: DB25, used for communication with the AD collection board and providing power supply for it.

•

Connector (J8) for ISE module: 8-pin, used for communication with the ISE module.

•

Connector (J9) for ISE bar code reader: 8-pin, used for reservation.

•

Ethernet connector (J12): 6-pin, used for reservation.

Connectors for debugging: •

BDM connector (J13): 26-pin, used for debugging the CPU software.

•

JTAG connector (J14): 14-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.

Switches and jumpers The main control board contains the following switches and jumpers. RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA. Indicators The main control board contains the following indicators. Indicators to indicate power supply: •

+12V power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, indicating that the +12V power supply has been connected.

•

-12V power supply indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, indicating that the -12V power supply has been connected.

5-13

•

+5V power supply indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, indicating that the +5V power supply has been connected.

•

+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.

Indicators to indicate PCBA functions: •

FPGA configuration indicator (D29): orange. It is lit in normal conditions, which means that the FPGA has been configured successfully.

•

FPGA function indicator 1 (D25): green. It flashes continuously in normal conditions, which means that the FPGA is working.

•

FPGA function indicator 2 (D18): green. It flashes in normal conditions when the PCBA communicates with a smart module.

•

FPGA function indicator 3 (D15): green. It flashes in normal conditions when the PCBA collects AD signals.

•

FPGA function indicator 4 (D12): green. This indicator has not been defined.

•

CPU function indicator 1 (D27): green. This indicator has not been defined.

•

CPU function indicator 2 (D28): green. This indicator has not been defined.

Indicators to indicate network interface: •

Network interface Link indicator (D10): green. When it is lit, it indicates the Ethernet has been connected; when it flashes, it means that the PCBA is communicating with the Ethernet.

•

Network interface Full-duplex indicator (D7): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the Ethernet is working in full-duplex mode.

•

Network interface 10-T indicator (D11): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the connection rate of the Ethernet is 10Mbps.

•

Network interface 100-T indicator (D9): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the connection rate of the Ethernet is 100Mbps.

•

Network interface Collision indicator (D8): green. When it is lit, it indicates that a conflict is detected on Ethernet communication.

Test points In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed. •

J1.1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.

•

J1.2: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.

•

J1.3: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 4.75 - 5.25V.

•

C304.1: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.

•

C37.1: +2.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the DDR memory. Normal range: 2.25 - 2.75V.

•

C78.1: +1.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the CPU core. Normal range: 1.35 - 1.65V.

5-14

•

C64.1: +1.25V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the end joint of the DDR memory . Normal range: 1.13 - 1.38V.

•

U65.4: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the FPGA core. Normal range: 1.08 - 1.32V.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.

•

Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

•

Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.

•

It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J3, J4, J6, J10 and J11. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

•

After connecting J7 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.

5.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board Functions and principles The wash temperature control board (051-000206-00) receives commands from the main control board and then analyzes them; detects execution signals of the cuvette wash unit, reaction carousel unit and reagent mixer unit and drives these units; detects the temperature of the temperature sensors and controls the heaters. The major functions of the PCBA include: •

Communicating with the main control unit via serial ports to receive/analyze instructions, execute relevant operations and return the execution results.

•

Outputting control signals for relevant execution units.

•

Receiving position sensor signals of relevant execution units, auto wash bump prevention signals, and other status signals.

•

Detecting the temperature of reaction carousel solid heat, cleaning fluid preheat and the environment, and controlling the heaters.

•

Receiving fluid level sensor signals from the hydropneumatic system and pressure signals from the pressure detection board, and controlling/driving fluidic pumps and valves.

•

Turning on/off the lamp and detecting the voltage.

•

Checking the PCBAs’ voltage and giving an alarm in certain conditions.

The figure below shows the relation between the wash temperature control board and other PCBAs.

5-15

Communication conversion board

PC

Main control board

Power supply assembly Adapter board 24V board 12V board DC power supply conversion board

Wash temperature control board

Slip ring

AC drive board

Reaction carousel temperature collection board

Cleaning fluid temperature collection board

Pressure detection board

Air pump drive board

5-probe/mixer conversion board

The functional diagram of the wash temperature control board is as shown below. CUP

Main control unit

Home position and coder sensors of reaction carousel

AD_START

Reaction carousel rotary step motor Mixer vertical step motor

Serial port COM

RST_CTRL PRST

A N D

RST

Reaction carousel unit

D[7:0]

Mixer horizontal step motor

A[9:0]

Mixer step motor

OE WE CS[1:0] EINT[3:1]

Wash station vertical step motor Vertical/horizontal home position and obstruct detection sensors of mixer Vertical home position and obstruct detection sensors of cuvette wash station Pumps/Valves (Cuvette: 20, probe: 2, pump: 3, reserved: 7)

D[7:0]

COM

Reagent mixer unit

RST

A[9:0] OE WE CS[1:0] EINT[3:1]

D[7:0]

COM

Cuvette wash unit

RST

A[9:0] OE WE CS[1:0] EINT[3:1]

D[7:0]

COM

RST

Solid direct heater (1)

FPGA

Fluid level sensor (16+6 reserved) Panel button + Carousel cover sensor (2) Panel indicator + Electromagnetic lock (2) Reac crsl temp collection board Cleaning fluid temp collection board

AC drive board

Sensor PT1000(3) Sensor NTC(4)

AC pump (3) AC heater (3)

A[9:0]

Temperature control unit

OE WE CS[1:0] EINT[3:1]

Pressure detection serial port

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the wash temperature control board is as shown below.

5-16

J17

J18

J19

J20

J21

J22

J16 Temp LED

Temp Unit

Reac Crsl Unit

Wash Unit

Unit LED

J15

J14

FPGA LED

J23

J24 J25 6 5 4 3 2 1

Rgt Mixer Unit

12 11 10 9 8 7

J1

J13

J2 Power LED

J12

J3

J4

Pump & Valve LED J11

J10

J9

J8

J7

J6

J5

Connectors The wash temperature control board includes the following connectors. Power supply: Power supply input (J1): 12-pin, providing +24V(B24V) power, +12V(C12V) power, +5V(A5V) digital, +12V(D12V) analog, and -12V(E12V) analog for the PCBA.

5-17

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

+24V

23.5-26V

2

+24V

23.5-26V

3

+12V

11.4~12.6V

4

+12V

11.4~12.6V

5

+5V

4.85-5.25V

6

D12V

11.4-12.6V

7

GND

/

8

GND

/

9

GND

/

10

GND

/

11

GND

/

12

E12V

-11.4--12.6V

Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals: •

Connector (J17) for main control board: 20*2-pin RS422, used for serial port communication with the main control board.

•

Connector (J18) for reaction carousel temperature collection board: 6*2-pin, TTL, used for collecting the reaction carousel temperature.

•

Connector (J19) for cleaning fluid temperature collection board: 10*2-pin, TTL, used for collecting the cleaning fluid temperature.

•

Connector (J21) for pressure detection board: 8*1-pin, TTL, used for serial port communication with the pressure detection board.

Connectors for detecting sensor signals: •

Floater signal detection connector (J15): 13*2-pin, TTL, used for checking the fluid level status.

•

Moving position signal detection connector (J16): 20*2-pin, TTL, used for checking moving positions.

Control connectors: •

Lamp control connector (J25): 6*1-pin, used for controlling the lamp voltage and hibernation of the whole unit.

•

AC load control connector (J10): 10*2-pin, used to control the AC load relay.

•

Air pump control connector (J8): 2*1-pin, used for controlling the external air pump.

Drive connectors: •

Valve drive connector 1 (J12): 25*2-pin, used for driving the wash valve.

•

Pump drive connector (J12): 7*2-pin, used for driving the DC pump.

•

Direct head drive connector (J2): 5*2-pin, used for driving the solid heater of the reaction carousel.

•

Motor drive connectors (J2-J7): used for driving motors, J3 for the reaction carousel stepper motor, J4 for the vertical motor of the reagent mixer assembly,

5-18

J5 for the horizontal motor of the reagent mixer assembly, J6 for the vertical motor of the wash heads, and J7 for the reagent mixing motor. Switches and jumpers The wash temperature control board contains the following switches and jumpers. RST key (S1): used to reset the CPUs of the four units of the PCBA. Indicators The wash temperature control board contains the following indicators. Power supply indicators: •

It is normal that all of the power supply indicators are lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on,

•

and they should indicate correctly when the system is hibernating.

•

When the operating software is shut down, indicators +24V(B24V), +12V(C12V), +12V(D12V) analog, -12V(-12V) analog, and 5V analog are extinguished, and indicators +5V(A5V) and +3.3V are lit.

•

+24V(B24V) indicator (D58): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +24V power supply works normally.

•

+12V(C12V) indicator (D62): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V power supply works normally.

•

+5V(A5V) indicator (D63): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V power supply works normally.

•

+3.3V indicator (D64): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +3.3V power supply works normally.

•

+12V(D12V) analog indicator (D59): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V analog power supply works normally.

•

-12V(E12V) analog indicator (D60): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V analog power supply works normally.

•

+5V(D12V) analog indicator (D61): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V analog power supply works normally.

Working indicators: •

FPGA configuration indicator (D105): yellow-green. It is lit when FPGA configuration is complete.

•

FPGA working indicator (D3): yellow-green. When it is lit and distinguished once every second, it indicates that the FPGA is working normally.

•

Temperature control unit working indicator (D107): yellow-green. When it is lit and distinguished once every second, it indicates that the temperature control unit is working normally.

•

Wash unit working indicator (D108): yellow-green. It is not used and lit all the time.

•

Reaction carousel unit working indicator (D106): yellow-green. It is not used and lit all the time. 5-19

•

Reagent mixer unit working indicator (D109): yellow-green. It is not used and lit all the time.

•

Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D78): red. It is neither used nor defined, and it is extinguished all the time.

•

Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D79): yellow. It is neither used nor defined, and it is extinguished all the time.

•

Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D77): green. It is neither used nor defined, and it is extinguished all the time.

•

Inlet valve (V01) working indicator (D83): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the inlet valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Dilution valve (V06) working indicator (D81): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the dilution valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Cuvette wash phase-1 valve (V14) working indicator (D80): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the cuvette wash phase-1 valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Cuvette wash phase-2 valve (V15) working indicator (D87): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the cuvette wash phase-2 valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Cuvette wash phase-3 valve (V16) working indicator (D86): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the cuvette wash phase-3 valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Cuvette wash phase-4 valve (V17) working indicator (D85): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the cuvette wash phase-4 valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Cuvette wash phase-5 valve (V18) working indicator (D84): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the cuvette wash phase-5 valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Cuvette wash phase-6 valve (V19) working indicator (D91): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the cuvette wash phase-6 valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Wipe block wash valve (V20) working indicator (D90): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the wipe block wash valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

High-concentration waste discharge valve (V21) working indicator (D89): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste discharge valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Low-concentration waste discharge valve (V22) working indicator (D88): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration waste discharge valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

High-concentration waste suction valve (V23) working indicator (D101): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste suction valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Low-concentration waste suction valve (V24) working indicator (D102): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration waste suction valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

High-concentration waste vacuum release valve (V25) working indicator (D103): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste vacuum release valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Low-concentration waste vacuum release valve (V26) working indicator (D104): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration waste vacuum release valve is turned on; and vice versa.

5-20

•

Vacuum container waste discharge valve (V27) working indicator (D97): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the vacuum container waste discharge valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Degassing vacuum pump control valve (V28) working indicator (D98): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the degassing vacuum pump control valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

ISE degassing vacuum valve (V29) working indicator (D99): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the ISE degassing vacuum valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

ISE degassing vacuum pump (P12) working indicator (D100): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the ISE degassing vacuum pump is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Dilution pump (P06) working indicator (D92): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the dilution pump is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Concentrated wash solution pump (P05) working indicator (D50): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the concentrated wash solution pump is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Deionized water circulating pump (P03) working indicator (D49): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the deionized water circulating pump is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Mixer wash valve (V11) working indicator (D95): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the mixer wash valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Mixer wash valve (V12) working indicator (D96): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the mixer wash valve is turned on; and vice versa.

•

Indicators (D82, D93, D94, D51, D13, D46, D47, D48) for reserved valves: yellow-green. When they are lit, it means that the valves are turned on; and vice versa.

Test points In the following positions of the wash temperature control board can signal tests be performed. •

+24V test point (TP72): input from J1.1 and J1.2. Normal range: 23.5 – 26V.

•

+12V test point (TP71): input from J1.3 and J1.4. Normal range: 11.4 – 12.6V.

•

+5V test point (TP70): input from J1.5. Normal range: 4.85 – 5.25V.

•

+12V analog test point (TP73): input from J1.6. Normal range: 11.4 – 12.6V.

•

-12V analog test point (TP74): input from J1.12. Normal range: -11.4 – -12.6V.

•

+3.3V test point (TP69): input from J1. Normal range: 2.97 – 3.63V.

•

+1.2V test point (TP68): input from J1. Normal range: 1.08 – 1.32V.

•

+5V analog test point (TP75): input from J1. Normal range: 4.85 – 5.25V.

•

Ground test points (TP29, TP39, TP48, TP58, TP76- TP82): input from J1.7-J11.

Table 5.1 Running voltage and sustaining voltage of the test points

5-21

Test Points

Running Voltage

Sustaining Voltage

TP12

1.50 ~ 1.84

0.40 ~ 4.95V

TP39

0.58 ~ 0.72V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

TP9

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF5

0.64 ~ 0.78V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

MVREF6

0.64 ~ 0.78V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

MVREF7

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF8

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.

•

Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

•

Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.

•

There are gaps beside connectors J10, J11, J12 and J16. Exercise caution to prevent bending the connector pins.

•

It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J12, J15, J16, and J17. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

•

Motor connectors J2, J3, J4, J5 and J6 have no mistake-proof measures. Make sure that the cable number corresponds to the connector number.

5.6.3 BA80 Sample Control Drive Board Functions and principles The BA80 sample control drive board (051-000205-00) drives and controls the inner and outer sample carousels, sample probe, and sample mixers. •

Communicating with the main control unit via serial ports to receive/analyze instructions, execute relevant operations and return the execution results.

•

Outputting control signals for relevant execution units.

•

Receiving position sensor signals and obstruct detection signals of relevant execution units, and detecting the rotation speed of the sample mixer unit.

•

Connecting with the sample probe level sense board to detect the fluid level and control the fluid level detection methods.

•

Connecting with the clog detection board to detect clogs in the sample probe and give an alarm in certain conditions.

•

Checking the PCBAs’ voltage and giving an alarm in certain conditions.

5-22

•

Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves of the sample probe unit and sample mixer unit.

•

Connecting with the reagent control drive board and sending control signals to it, and turning on/off the interior wash pump P04 and return valve V05.

The figure below shows the relation between the BA80 sample control drive board and other PCBAs and control objects.

Outer sample carousel motor

Inner sample carousel motor

Object of inner crsl

Inner sample carousel home position optical coupler Inner sample carousel coder optical coupler

Shared by two crsls

Sample bar code reader

Object of outer crsl

Outer sample carousel home position optical coupler Outer sample carousel coder optical coupler

Main control board

Probe horizontal home position optical coupler Probe horizontal obstruct detection optical coupler

Probe horizontal motor Probe vertical home position optical coupler

Probe vertical motor Syringe home position optical coupler

Reagent control drive board

Syringe motor

Object of sample probe

Sample control drive board

Probe interior wash valve Probe exterior wash valve Fluid level sense board Clog detection board

DC power supply conversion board

Mixer horizontal home position optical coupler

Mixer horizontal motor

Mixer vertical motor Mixer rotation speed detection optical coupler

Mixer motor Mixer wash valve

The functional diagram of the control drive board is as shown below.

5-23

Object of sample mixers

Mixer vertical home position optical coupler

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the BA80 sample control drive board is as shown below. J12

J11

J13

J29

J14

J15

J16

J17

J28

J10 FPGA LED J18 J9 J19

Unit LED J8

Clot LED

J7 J6

J5

J4

Power LED Liquid LED J3

J2

Lid Sensor LED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J1

J26 J25

Key Press LED

J20 Pump & Valve LED

J24 J23

J22

Connectors The BA80 sample control drive board contains the following connectors. Power supply: DC power supply input connector (J1)

5-24

J21

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

A+12V

11.4~12.6V

2

+5V

4.85-5.25V

3

+12V

11.4~12.6V

4

+24V

23.5-26V

5

+24V

23.5-26V

6

A-12V

-11.4--12.6V

7

GND

/

8

GND

/

9

GND

/

10

GND

/

Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals: •

BA80 main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for four MCUs (outer sample carousel, inner sample carousel, sample probe and sample mixers) to communicate with the main control unit.

•

Sample bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the two sample carousel units to communicate with the sample bar code reader.

•

BA80 reagent control drive board connector (J5): 14-pin, used for the sample probe unit to control the interior wash pump P04 and return valve V05.

•

BA80 level sense board connector (J2): 10-pin, used for communication between the sample probe and the sample probe level sense board.

Detection and control connectors: •

Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position, coder and mixer rotation speed signals of the four units (outer sample carousel, inner sample carousel, sample probe unit and sample mixer unit).

•

Motor drive connectors (J13-J20): 4-pin, used for driving eight stepper motors, J13 for the outer sample carousel motor, J14 for the inner sample carousel motor, J15 for the sample probe horizontal motor, J16 for the sample probe vertical motor, J17 for the sample syringe motor, J18 for the sample mixer horizontal motor, J19 for the sample mixing motor, and J20 for the sample mixer vertical motor.

•

Probe wash valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the sample probe interior/exterior wash valves and the sample mixer wash valve.

•

Sample load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the two sample load buttons and driving/controlling the two indicators.

Switches and jumpers The BA80 sample control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers. Key S7: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA. When the instrument is powered on, parameters need to be configured and key S7 cannot be used.

5-25

Indicators The BA80 sample control drive board contains the following indicators. Power supply indicators: •

They are lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned off, which indicates that the analyzing unit power switch works normally;

•

When the instrument is hibernating, all of the indicators are lit.

•

When the operating software is shut down, indicators +24V(B24V) power, +12V(C12V) power, A+12V(D12V) analog, and A-12V(-12V) analog are extinguished, and indicators +5V(A5V) and +3.3V are lit.

•

5V (A5V) power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.

•

3.3V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.

•

A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

•

A-12V (E12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

•

+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

•

+24V (B24V) power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

Function indicators: •

Sample probe vertical obstruct indicator (D33): green. It is lit when the sample probe is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it is extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working normally.

•

Sample probe level sense indicator (D32): green. It is lit when the instrument works normally and the sample probe detects the fluid level; and it is extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the sample probe fails to detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not installed.

•

Interior wash pump P04 indicator (D21): green. It is lit when P04 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Interior wash return valve V05 indicator (D50): green. It is lit when V05 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Sample probe interior wash valve V02 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when V02 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Sample probe exterior wash valve V07 indicator (D44): green. It is lit when V07 is turned on, and vice versa. 5-26

•

Sample mixer cleaning fluid wash valve V10 indicator (D46): green. It is lit when V10 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Sample mixer wash solution wash valve V12 indicator (D47): green. It is lit when V12 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Outer sample carousel control button indicator (D22): green. It is lit when the outer sample carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the button is released.

•

Outer sample carousel control button indicator (D23): green. It is lit when the outer sample carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the button is released.

•

Outer sample carousel running indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the outer sample carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.

•

Outer sample carousel running indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the outer sample carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.

•

Sample carousel cover indicator (D25): green. It is lit when the sample carousel cover is closed; and it is extinguished when the sample carousel cover is closed or the carousel cover sensor is disconnected.

Test points In the following positions of the BA80 control drive board can signal tests be performed. •

+24V(B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6 – 26.4V DC.

•

+12V(C12V) power supply: test point of +12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4 – 12.6V DC.

•

A+12V(D12V) power supply: test point of A+12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4 – 12.6V DC.

•

A-12V(E12V) power supply: test point of A-12V. Normal voltage range: -11.4 – -12.6V DC.

•

3.3V power supply: test point of +3V3. Normal voltage range: 3.24V – 3.47V DC.

•

1.2V power supply: test point of +1V2. Normal voltage range: 1.17V – 1.23V DC.

Table 5.2 Running voltage and sustaining voltage of the test points

Test points

Running Voltage

Sustaining Voltage

MVREF1

1.50 ~ 1.84

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF2

1.50 ~ 1.84

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF3

0.58 ~ 0.72V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

MVREF4

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF5

0.64 ~ 0.78V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

MVREF6

0.64 ~ 0.78V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

MVREF7

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

5-27

Test points MVREF8

Running Voltage 1.50 ~ 1.84V

Sustaining Voltage 0.40 ~ 4.95V

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply to prevent arcing and component damage due to hot swapping.

•

Before removing the PCBA, wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps to prevent antistatic damage on it.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA, especially when the PCBA’s bracket is restored.

•

Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

•

Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.

•

It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J10 and J12. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

•

When plugging/unplugging motor cables, exercise caution to prevent damaging the aluminum electrolytic capacitor near the connectors.

5.6.4 BA80 Reagent Control Drive Board Functions and principles The BA80 reagent control drive board (051-000204-00) drives and controls the reagent carousel inner and outer rings, and probes R1/R2. •

Communicating with the main control unit via serial ports to receive/analyze instructions, execute relevant operations and return the execution results.

•

Outputting control signals for relevant execution units.

•

Receiving position sensor signals and obstruct detection signals of relevant execution units, and detecting the rotation speed of the sample mixer unit.

•

Connecting with the two reagent probe level sense boards to detect the fluid level and control the fluid level detection methods.

•

Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves, interior wash pump P04, and return valve V05 of the two reagent probe units.

•

Checking the PCBAs’ voltage and giving an alarm in certain conditions.

•

Connecting with the sample control drive board and receiving sample probe control signals from it, and turning on/off the interior wash pump P04 and return valve V05.

The figure below shows the relation between the BA80 reagent control drive board and other PCBAs and control objects.

5-28

Reagent carousel outer ring home optical coupler

Reagent carousel outer ring motor

Reagent carousel proximity sensor

Shared by two rings

Regent bar code reader

Object of outer ring

position optical couple

Reagent carousel outer ring coder

Reagent carousel inner ring home optical coupler

Reagent carousel inner ring motor

Object of inner ring

position optical couple

Reagent carousel inner ring coder

Probe R1 horizontal home position optical coupler Probe R1 horizontal obstruct detection optical coupler

Main control board

Probe R1 horizontal motor Probe R1 vertical home position optical coupler

R1 syringe home position optical coupler

R1 syringe motor Probe R1 interior wash valve Probe R1 exterior wash valve Probe R1 fluid level sense board AC drive board (P04 control interface) Probe interior wash return valve

DC power supply conversion board

Probe R2 horizontal home position optical coupler Probe R2 horizontal obstruct detection optical coupler

Shared by two probes

Sample control drive board

Reagent control drive board

Object of probe R1

Probe R1 vertical motor

Probe R2 horizontal motor Probe R2 vertical home position optical coupler

coupler

R2 syringe motor Probe R2 interior wash valve Probe R2 exterior wash valve Probe R2 fluid level sense board

The functional diagram of the control drive board is as shown below.

5-29

Object of probe R2

Probe R2 vertical motor R2 syringe home position optical

Cuvette: serial port RS422 differential photoelectric collection starting signal Serial port: RS422 differential

6 extended serial ports

Lamp control

Unit 1

Bus 2 panel buttons and indicators

Voltage monitoring

Main control board

Serial port: RS422 differential

Serial port: RS422 differential

Unit 2

Unit 3

Bus

F P G A

Bus

2 electromagnetic locks 2 proximity sensors

8 motor drives

34 position sensors Serial port: RS422 differential

Unit 4

Bus

8 pumps/valves

2 DC motors

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the BA80 reagent control drive board is as shown below.

Connectors The BA80 reagent control drive board contains the following connectors. Power supply: DC power supply input connector (J1) Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:

5-30

•

BA80 main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for four MCUs (reagent carousel inner ring, reagent carousel outer ring, probe R1 unit, and probe R2 unit) to communicate with the main control unit.

•

Reagent bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the two reagent carousel units to communicate with the reagent bar code reader.

•

BA80 sample control drive board connector (J5): 14-pin, used to receive control signals of the interior wash pump P04 and return valve V05 from the sample probe unit.

•

BA80 400μl reagent probe level sense board connectors (J2, J3): 10-pin. J2 is used for communication between the probe R1 unit and the probe R1 level sense board; and J3 is used for communication between the probe R2 unit and the probe R2 level sense board. The communication signals include: serial port signal, level sense signal, and probe vertical obstruction signal.

Detection and control connectors: •

Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position and coder signals of the four units (two probe units and two carousel units).

•

Motor drive connectors (J13-J20): 4-pin, used for driving stepper motors, J13 for the reagent carousel outer ring motor, J14 for the reagent carousel inner ring motor, J15 for the probe R1 horizontal motor, J16 for the probe R1 vertical motor, J17 for the R1 syringe motor, J18 for the probe R2 horizontal motor, J19 for the probe R2 vertical motor, and J20 for the R2 syringe motor.

•

Probe wash valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the interior/exterior wash valves of the two probe units.

•

Return valve drive connector (J21): 8-pin, used for controlling the interior wash return valves of the three probe units.

•

DC pump control connector (J25): 6-pin, used for controlling the interior wash pumps of the three probe units.

•

Reagent load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the two reagent load buttons and driving/controlling the two indicators.

•

Reagent carousel proximity sensor connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting reagent carousel access to the sensor.

•

P04V05 cross control connector (J5): 14-pin, used for receiving sample probe control signals and combining them with those of the two reagent probe units, and for driving/controlling the interior wash pump P04 and interior wash return valve V05.

Connectors for debugging: •

MCU JTAG debugging connector (J9): used for debugging of the four MCUs.

•

FPGA JTAG debugging and downloading connector (J27): used for debugging and downloading of the FPGA.

•

Pump/Valve fixture test connector (J30): 18-pin, used for connecting an external LED board and testing the pumps and valves.

Switches and jumpers The BA80 reagent control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers. 5-31

Key S7: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA. When the instrument is powered on, parameters need to be configured and key S7 cannot be used. Indicators The BA80 reagent control drive board contains the following indicators. Power supply indicators: •

They are lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned off, which indicates that the analyzing unit power switch works normally;

•

When the instrument is hibernating, all of the indicators are lit.

•

When the operating software is shut down, indicators +24V(B24V) power, +12V(C12V) power, A+12V(D12V) analog, and A-12V(-12V) analog are extinguished, and indicators +5V(A5V) and +3.3V are lit.

•

5V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.

•

3.3V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.

•

A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

•

A-12V (-12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

•

+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

•

+24V (B24V) power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

Function indicators: •

Probe R1 vertical obstruct indicator (D33): green. It is lit when the probe R1 is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it is extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working normally.

•

Probe R1 level sense indicator (D32): green. It is lit when the instrument works normally and the probe R1 detects the fluid level; and it is extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the probe R1 fails to detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not installed.

•

Probe R2 vertical obstruct indicator (D34): green. It is lit when the probe R2 is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it is extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working normally.

•

Probe R2 level sense indicator (D35): green. It is lit when the instrument works normally and the probe R2 detects the fluid level; and it is extinguished when the 5-32

instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the probe R2 fails to detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not installed. •

Interior wash pump P04 indicator (D21): green. It is lit when P04 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Interior wash return valve V05 indicator (D50): green. It is lit when V05 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Probe R1 interior wash valve V03 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when V03 is turned on, and it is extinguished when V03 is turned off.

•

Probe R1 exterior wash valve indicator (D44): green. It is lit when V08 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Probe R2 interior wash valve V04 indicator (D46): green. It is lit when V04 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Probe R2 interior wash valve V09 indicator (D47): green. It is lit when V09 is turned on, and vice versa.

•

Reagent carousel outer ring control button indicator (D22): green. It is lit when the reagent carousel outer ring control button is pressed and extinguished when the button is released.

•

Reagent carousel outer ring control button indicator (D23): green. It is lit when the reagent carousel outer ring control button is pressed and extinguished when the button is released.

•

Reagent carousel outer ring running indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the reagent carousel outer ring is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.

•

Reagent carousel outer ring running indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the reagent carousel outer ring is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.

•

Reagent carousel cover indicator (D25): green. It is lit when the reagent carousel cover is closed; and it is extinguished when the reagent carousel cover is closed or the carousel cover sensor is disconnected.

Test points In the following positions of the BA80 control drive board can signal tests be performed. •

+24V(B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6 – 26.4V DC.

•

+12V(C12V) power supply: test point of +12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4 – 12.6V DC.

•

A+12V(D12V) power supply: test point of A+12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4 – 12.6V DC.

•

A-12V(E12V) power supply: test point of A-12V. Normal voltage range: -11.4 – -12.6V DC.

•

3.3V power supply: test point of +3V3. Normal voltage range: 3.24V – 3.47V DC.

5-33

•

1.2V power supply: test point of +1V2. Normal voltage range: 1.17V – 1.23V DC.

Table 5.3 Running voltage and sustaining voltage of the test points

Test points

Running Voltage

Sustaining Voltage

MVREF1

1.80 ~ 2.20V

0. 45 ~ 0.55V

MVREF2

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF3

0.64 ~ 0.78V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

MVREF4

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF5

1.04 ~ 1.28V

0.25 ~ 0.31V

MVREF6

0.64 ~ 0.78V

0.16 ~ 0.20V

MVREF7

1.50 ~ 1.84V

0.40 ~ 4.95V

MVREF8

1.04 ~ 1.28V

0.25 ~ 0.31V

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply to prevent arcing and component damage due to hot swapping.

•

Before removing the PCBA, wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps to prevent antistatic damage on it.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA, especially when the PCBA’s bracket is restored.

•

Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

•

Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.

•

It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J10 and J12. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

•

When plugging/unplugging motor cables, exercise caution to prevent damaging the aluminum electrolytic capacitor near the connectors.

5.6.5 AC Drive Board Functions and principles The major functions of the PCBA include: •

Receiving AC input from the main power supply, and then shifting it to the BA40 power supply assembly, BA80 12V/30A power supply board and 24V/6A power supply board.

•

Receiving control signals from the wash temperature control board to drive three AC pumps (waste pump P07, cuvette wash vacuum pump P08, and degassing vacuum pump P09) and three AC heaters (whole unit deionized water heater HEA01, wash solution heater HEA02, and cleaning fluid heater HEA03).

5-34

•

Receiving signals and 24V power supply from the BA80 reagent control drive board to output an adjustable voltage between 16V-23V and drive the interior wash pump P04.

•

Receiving control signals from the BA80 reagent refrigeration board to drive the refrigeration circulating AC pump P02. This function is reserved and only applicable to an AC pump.

•

Converting the 110V AC into 220V AC, which is used to power AC pumps.

The figure below shows the relation between the AC drive board and other PCBAs and control objects.

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the AC drive board is as shown below.

5-35

D8 D19 D10 D15

D16

D9

D18

D7

Connectors The AC drive board contains the following connectors. Refer to the whole unit wiring diagram for definition of the connector pins. Power supply: •

AC input (J2): alternating current input to J2.

•

AC output (J1): alternating current output from J1 to power supply assembly.

•

AC output (J11): alternating current output from J11 to 24V/6A power supply board.

•

AC output (J12): alternating current output from J12 to BA80 12V/30A power supply board.

•

AC output (J3): alternating current output from J3 to three heaters.

•

AC output (J10): alternating current output from J10 to four AC pumps, P02 of which is reserved.

•

AC output (J8): AC 110V output from J8 to a linear transformer on instruments powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by 220V AC.

•

AC input (J9): AC 220V input through J9 to a linear transformer on instruments powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by 220V AC.

•

Adjustable DC voltage output (J4): DC voltage output from J4 to interior wash pump P04.

Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:

5-36

•

Reagent refrigeration circulating pump control connector (J7): 3-pin, 12V DC, used for controlling current-limiting delay.

•

BA80 wash temperature control board connector (J6): 14-pin, 12V DC, used for controlling the switches of the DC heaters and DC pumps.

•

BA80 reagent control drive board connector (J5): 6-pin, 24V DC and 6V DC, used for controlling the P04’s switch and input of the 24V power supply.

Switches and jumpers The AC drive board contains the following switches. Voltage selection switch (S1): A transformer is used on instruments powered by 110V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the 110V AC position; no transformer is used on instruments powered by 220V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the 220V AC position. Indicators The AC drive board contains the following indicators. Indicators to indicate PCBA functions: •

Interior wash pump P04 (D8): green. It is lit during cleaning of probe interiors and weak in other statuses.

•

Whole unit deionized water heater HEA01 (D15): green. It is lit during heating of deionized water used for cleaning the whole unit, and it is extinguished in other statuses.

•

Wash solution heater HEA02 (D16): green. It is lit during heating of wash solution, and it is extinguished in other statuses.

•

Cleaning fluid heater HEA03 (D7): green. It is lit during heating of cleaning fluid, and it is extinguished in other statuses.

•

Cuvette wash vacuum pump P03 (D9): green. It is lit when cuvette wash vacuum is turned on, and it is extinguished when cuvette wash vacuum is turned off.

•

Waste pump P07 (D10): green. It is lit when the waste pump is turned on, and it is extinguished when the waste pump is turned off.

•

Degassing vacuum pump P09 (D18): green. It is lit when the degassing vacuum pump is turned on, and it is extinguished when the degassing vacuum pump is turned off.

•

Current-limiting indicator (D19): green. It is lit when instruments powered by 110V AC are powered on, and it is extinguished when instruments powered by 220V AC are powered off.

Test points In the following positions of the AC drive board can signal tests be performed. N/A.

5-37

Installation methods and precautions •

Please note that most parts of the PCBA are connected to an AC power supply. Do not operate on the PCBA until disconnecting it from the power supply.

•

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

When fixing the AC input connector with a screw, make sure that the connector is tightened properly in order to prevent it from dropping off during operation, which may cause electric shock.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.

•

Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

•

Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.

•

Pay attention to the position of switch S1. Do not move the switch randomly to ensure that the AC pump can work normally.

•

When adjusting the fluidic flow, exercise caution to avoid touching the high-voltage wires or the protection tube.

5.6.6 Reagent Refrigeration Board Functions and principles The reagent refrigeration board is relatively independent from the entire hardware system and has the following major functions: •

Refrigeration control and drive: controlling the switch of the radiators and refrigerating the reagent compartment and inner sample carousel to keep the temperature within certain range.

•

Control of the refrigeration temperature indicator.

•

Control of cooling fans and demisting.

•

Monitoring working voltage of the PCBA.

•

Controlling and driving the refrigeration circulating pump.

•

Providing power supply for the ISE module.

The functional diagram of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.

5-38

Refrigeration drive

Rgt chamber temp monitoring

Refrig temp monitoring

Refrig temp indication

10 radiators

Main control board Reagent refrigeration MCU

Circulating pump control drive

Circulating pump

5V

ISE module

Lamp fan Air pump fan

PC

Fan feedback monitoring

Refrigeration fan Liquid pump radiating fan

Voltage transforming

Voltage monitoring

24V

Power supply

ISE radiating fan

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.

5-39

ISE power supply Bar code demisting (reserved)

J18

J17 J16

J19

J20

D81

D91

J21

J25

J22

J23

D90 D89 D58

J15 Power LEDs

S1

J14 J13 J10 J11

J1

D88 J2 D79

J24 J9 J8

D75

D74

D54

D55

D56

J7

J6

J5

J4

J3

Connectors The reagent refrigeration board includes the following connectors. Power supply: Power supply input connectors (J1, J2, J3): providing F12V refrigeration, B12V refrigeration, C24V fan, and 24V ISE for the PCBAs. Connector

Pin No.

J1

1, 2

F12V

11.4~12.6V

3, 4

GND

0

1, 2

B12V

11.4~12.6V

3, 4

GND

0

1

ISE24V

23.8~25.2V

5

ISE24V GND

0

4

C24V

23.8~25.2V

8

GND

0

J2

J22

Signal

5-40

Reference Value

Function Refrigeration power supply input: used for loading the corresponding radiators J5/J6/J7. Refrigeration power supply input: used for loading the corresponding radiators J3/J4 and the PCBA. The A24V provided by the power supply assembly is converted by the refrigeration board into 5V and 24V, which are then used to power the ISE module. 24V power supply input for cooling fans.

Power supply output connector (J23): providing ISE24V and ISE5V for the ISE module, among which ISE5V is converted from ISE24V by the refrigeration board. Connector

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

J23

1

ISE5V

4.75~5.25V

4

GND

0

3

ISE24V

23.8~25.2V

6

GND

0

Radiator connectors (J3-J7): providing power supply for the radiators. Connector J3~J7

Pin No. 1

Signal 1 radiator

3

Reference Value 0V for ON and 12V for OFF. 12V

2

1 radiator

4

0V for ON and 12V for OFF. 12V

Demisting circuit connector (J9): providing power supply for the demisting heater. Connector J9

Pin No. 1

Signal 1 demisting heater

2

Reference Value 12V /

3

/

4

0

Temperature protection switch connector (J24): receiving signals of the temperature protection switch. Connector J24

Pin No. 1

Signal 1 temperature protection switch

2 3

1 temperature protection switch

4

Reference Value 0V 0V 0V 0V

Fan connector (J10): providing 12V power supply for the cooling fans and checking the fan status. Connector J10

Pin No. 1

Signal F12V

Reference Value 12V

5-41

Connector

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

2

ISE fan’s feedback signal

Below 0.5V

3

Gnd

0V

4

/

12V

5

/

/

6

/

0V

7

F12V

12V

8

Light source fan’s feedback signal

Below 0.5V

9

Gnd

0V

Temperature sensor connectors (J15, J16): checking temperature of the refrigeration compartment and refrigeration board. Connector J15

J16

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

Shielding ground

0V

2

GND

0V

3

Temperature sensor signal of the refrigeration board

/

1

Shielding ground

0V

2

GND

0V

3

Temperature sensor signal of the refrigeration compartment

/

Fan connector (J19): providing 24V power supply for the 1air pump fan and checking the fan status. Connector J19

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

/

/

2

/

/

3

/

/

4

C24V

24V

5

Air pump radiating feedback signal

Below 0.5V

6

Gnd

0V

5-42

Fan connector (J20): providing 24V power supply for the cooling fans and checking the fan status. Connector J20

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

/

/

2

/

/

3

/

/

4

C24V

24V

5

Fluidic pump radiating feedback signal

Below 0.5V

6

Gnd

0V

Fan connector (J21): providing 24V power supply for the cooling fans and checking the fan status. Connector J21

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

C24V

24V

2

Cooling fan 1’s feedback signal

Below 0.5V

3

Gnd

0V

4

C24V

24V

5

Cooling fan 2’s feedback signal

Below 0.5V

6

Gnd

0V

Refrigeration circulating pump connector (J25): providing power supply for the refrigeration circulating pump and turning it on/off. Connector J25

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

C24V

24V

2

GND

Off: 24V On: 0V

Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals: Main control board serial port (J17): 8-pin, used for communicating with the main control board. Switches The reagent refrigeration board contains the following switches. RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA. Indicators 5-43

The main control board contains the following indicators. Power supply: Sequence No.

Function

Color

Description

D41

ISE5V

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.

D50

ISE24V

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.

D45

C24V

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.

D48

VCC

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.

D47

B12V

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.

D49

VDD

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.

D46

F12V

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the power supply works normally.

Indicators to indicate PCBA functions: Sequence No.

Function

Color

Description

D58

Indicating status of the refrigeration circulating pump

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the refrigeration circulating pump is working.

D56

Indicating status of the radiator

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the radiator is working.

D55

Indicating status of the radiator

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the radiator is working.

D54

Indicating status of the radiator

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the radiator is working.

D74

Indicating status of the radiator

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the radiator is working.

D75

Indicating status of the radiator

Green

When it is lit, it indicates that the radiator is working.

D79

Indicating status of the lamp fan

Red

When it is lit, it indicates that the fan goes wrong.

D88

Indicating status of the ISE fan

Red

When it is lit, it indicates that the fan goes wrong.

5-44

Sequence No.

Function

Color

Description

D81

Indicating status of the air pump fan

Red

When it is lit, it indicates that the fan goes wrong.

D91

Indicating status of the fluidic pump fan

Red

When it is lit, it indicates that the fan goes wrong.

D89

Indicating status of cooling fan 1

Red

When it is lit, it indicates that the fan goes wrong.

D90

Indicating status of cooling fan 2

Red

When it is lit, it indicates that the fan goes wrong.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.

•

Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

•

Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.

5.6.7 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board Functions and principles The five-probe/mixer conversion board is intended for the following functions: •

Shifting signals between the reagent control drive board and the probe R1 level sense board.

•

Shifting signals between the reagent control drive board and the probe R2 level sense board.

•

Shifting signals between the sample control drive board and the sample probe level sense board.

•

Shifting mixer motor drive signals between the sample control drive board and the sample mixers.

•

Shifting mixer motor rotation speed signals between the sample control drive board and the sample mixers.

•

Shifting mixer motor drive signals between the wash temperature control board and the reagent mixers.

•

Shifting mixer motor rotation speed signals between the wash temperature control board and the reagent mixers.

Description The PCB layout of the five probe/mixer conversion board is as shown below.

5-45

Connectors J1: probe R1 level sense connector for the reagent control drive board. J2: probe R2 level sense connector for the reagent control drive board. J3: sample probe level sense connector for the sample control drive board. The signals of connectors J1, J2 and J3 are shown in the table below. Pin No.

Signal Name

1

AGND

/

Analog ground

/

2

RAMn

O

Vertical obstruction signal

TTL

3

LLSn

O

Level sense signal

TTL

4

DVPP

/

Power supply D12V

/

5

EVPP

/

Power supply E12V

/

6

TXD-Ln

I

Serial port sending signal

TTL

7

RST-Ln

I

Reset signal (reserved)

TTL

8

RXD-Ln

O

Serial port received signal

TTL

9

PSEN-Ln

I

Downloading enable signal (reserved)

TTL

/

Shielding ground

/

10

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

J4: sample mixer rotation speed sensor connector for the sample control drive board. J6: reagent mixer rotation speed sensor connector for the reagent control drive board. The signals of connectors J4 and J6 are shown in the table below. Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

1

GND

/

Ground

/

2

PHO

I

Mixer motor sensor

TTL

3

VCC

/

Power supply A5V

/

4

GND

/

Ground

/

J5: sample mixer motor connector for the sample control drive board. J7: reagent mixer motor connector for the reagent control drive board. The signals of connectors J5 and J7 are shown in the table below.

5-46

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

1

A+

I

Winding A+

0/24V

2

A-

I

Winding A-

0/24V

3

B+

I

Winding B+

0/24V

4

B-

I

Winding B-

0/24V

J8: connector for reagent mixer motor and reagent mixer rotation speed sensor. J9: connector for sample mixer motor and sample mixer rotation speed sensor. The signals of connectors J8 and J9 are shown in the table below. Pin No.

Signal Name

1

GND

/

Ground

/

2

PHO

I

Mixer motor sensor

TTL

3

VCC

/

Power supply A5V

/

4

GND

/

Ground

/

/

Shielding ground

/

5

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

6

A+

I

Winding A+

0/24V

7

A-

I

Winding A-

0/24V

8

B+

I

Winding B+

0/24V

9

B-

I

Winding B-

0/24V

J10: connector for the sample probe level sense board. J11: connector for the probe R2 level sense board. J12: connector for the probe R1 level sense board. The signals of connectors J10, J11 and J12 are shown in the table below. Pin No.

Signal Name

1

AGND

/

Analog ground

/

2

RAMn

O

Vertical obstruction signal

TTL

3

LLSn

O

Level sense signal

TTL

4

DVPP

/

Power supply D12V

/

5

EVPP

/

Power supply E12V

/

6

TXD-Ln

I

Serial port sending signal

TTL

7

RXD-Ln

O

Serial port received signal

TTL

8

NC

NC

NC

NC

/

Shielding ground

/

9

I/O

5-47

Description

Valid Level and Type

Installation methods and precautions •

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.

•

The PCBA is narrow and fragile. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

5.6.8 External Air Pump Drive Board Function The external air pump drive board is used to: •

Receive the air pump control signals and drive/control the external AC air pump.

•

Provide drive connectors for two AC fans.

Description The functional diagram of the external air pump drive board is as shown below.

The PCB layout of the air pump drive board is as shown below.

Connectors J1: connector for external AC 220V/110V input. No.

Description

1

220V/110V AC N

2

NC

5-48

No. 3

Description 220V/110V AC L

J2/J3: connectors for AC fan power supply output. No.

Description

1

220V/110V AC N

2

NC

3

220V/110V AC L

J4: connectors for AC air pump power supply output. No.

Description

1

220V/110V AC N

2

NC

3

220V/110V AC L

J5: connector for AC air pump control signal input. No.

Description

1

OUT_PUMP_CTRL

2

NC

3

+12V

Indicators Indicators for sending/receiving communication signals: AC air pump control signal indicator (D2): red. When it is lit, it indicates that the AC air pump control signal is valid and the air pump is working normally.

5.6.9 Communication Conversion Board Function The communication conversion board is intended for the following functions: •

Providing connectors for the main control board: serial port, network interface, and USB interface.

•

Providing connectors for the control console (computer): standard DB9 serial port, RJ45 network interface, and standard USB interface.

•

Shifting, isolating and protecting the signals received at the connectors connecting the main control board and the control console.

5-49

Description The PCB layout of the communication conversion board is as shown below. Top view:

Bottom view:

Connectors J1: USB interface to connect a computer. (Reserved) J2: DB9 serial port to connect a computer. J3: serial port communication interface to connect the main control board. J4: USB interface to connect the main control board. J5: standard RJ45 network interface to connect a computer. J6: Ethernet interface to connect the main control board. Indicators N/A

5.6.10 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board Functions and principles The instrument has one reaction carousel temperature collection board, which is used to: •

Collect/Convert the reaction carouse temperature sensor signals and output them to the wash temperature control board.

•

Provide the SPI interface and reaction carousel heater power supply connector, and connect the wash temperature control board via the slip ring to control the heater.

5-50

The functional diagram of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as shown below. Temp sensor 1

Reaction carousel temperature collection board

Wash temperature control board

Temp sensor 2 Temp sensor 3 Temp protection switch

Heater

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as shown below. J5

J4

J1

J2

J3 D2

D1

J6

Connectors The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following connectors. Connectors 1-3 (J1-J3) for reaction carousel temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to connect the reaction carousel temperature sensor with the temperature detection circuit. Pin No. 1

Signal Name SHIELD

I/O /

5-51

Description Shielded sensor

wire

Valid Level and Type of

/

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

2

REF

I

Signal sensor

cable

of

/

3

PT1000

I

Signal sensor

cable

of

/

Heater connector (J4): 2-pin. Used to connect the heater with the temperature detection circuit. Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description supply

Valid Level and Type

1

+24V

/

Power heater

of

/

2

SW

/

Connecting with the temperature protection switch

/

Temperature protection switch connector (J5): 2-pin. Used to connect the temperature protection switch with the temperature detection circuit. Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

1

SW

/

Connecting with the temperature protection switch

/

2

HEATER

/

Heater control signal

/

Connector (J6) for connecting the reaction carousel temperature collection board and the slip ring: 20-pin. Used to connect the sample probe (or reagent probe) with the temperature detection circuit. Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

1

+24V

/

Positive pole of the heater

/

2

+24V

/

Positive pole of the heater

/

3

+24V

/

Positive pole of the heater

/

4

+24V

/

Positive pole of the heater

/

5

HEATER

/

Negative pole of the heater

/

6

HEATER

/

Negative pole of the heater

/

5-52

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

7

HEATER

/

Negative pole of the heater

/

8

HEATER

/

Negative pole of the heater

/

9

SYNC_ADT_I

I

Synchronous input signal of AD

5V TTL

10

DIN_ADT_I

I

Data input signal of AD

5V TTL

11

CLK_ADT_I

I

Clock input signal of AD

5V TTL

12

DOUT_ADT_O

O

Data output signal of AD

5V TTL

13

BUSY_ADT_O

O

Busy output signal of AD

5V TTL

14

NC

/

/

/

15

NC

/

/

/

16

S2_B_I

I

Control signals of multiplexer switch

5V TTL

17

S2_A_I

I

Control signals of multiplexer switch

5V TTL

18

VPP

/

12V power supply input

/

19

AGND

/

Analog ground

/

20

SHIELD

/

Shielding ground

5V TTL

Indicators The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following indicators. •

+12V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V power supply has been connected.

•

+5V power supply indicator (D2): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V power supply has been connected.

Test points In the following positions of the reaction carousel temperature collection board can signal tests be performed. •

VPP1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.

•

VCCA: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the analog parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.

•

VCCD: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.

•

AGND: reaction carousel temperature collection board ground.

5-53

•

T1: converted analog input voltage of temperature sensor 1.

•

T2: converted analog input voltage of temperature sensor 2.

•

T3: converted analog input voltage of temperature sensor 3.

•

REF: reference voltage.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.

•

It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

5.6.11 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board Function The instrument has one cleaning fluid temperature collection board, which is mainly used to: Process, collect and AD-convert signals of three cleaning fluid temperature sensors and of one environment temperature sensor. The cleaning fluid temperature collection board is connected with the wash temperature control board. The functional diagram of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as shown below.

Description The PCB layout of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as shown below.

5-54

Connectors The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following connectors: Temperature sensor connectors 1-4 (J1-J4): 3-pin, used to connect the temperature sensor with the temperature detection circuit. Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

1

SHIELD

/

Shielded wire of sensor

/

2

AGND

/

Signal cable of (analog ground)

/

3

NTC

I

Signal cable of sensor

sensor

Analog

Connector J5 for wash temperature control board: 20-pin, used to power the PCBA and transmit/control the signals. Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

1

SGND

/

Enclosure ground

/

2

SGND

/

Enclosure ground

/

3

CS

I

AD chip selection input

TTL, valid in the case of low level.

4

NC

/

NC

/

5

SDO

O

AD chip data output

TTL

6

SCLK

I

AD chip clock input

TTL

7

NC

/

NC

/

8

NC

/

NC

/

9

NC

/

NC

/

10

MUX_A

I

Channel A

TTL

11

VPP

/

12V power supply input

/

12

MUX_B

I

Channel B

TTL

5-55

Pin No.

Signal Name

I/O

Description

Valid Level and Type

13

GND

/

Ground

/

14

GND

/

Ground

/

15

GND

/

Ground

/

16

NC

/

NC

/

17

NC

/

NC

/

18

NC

/

NC

/

19

NC

/

NC

/

20

NC

/

NC

/

Indicators The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following indicators. •

+12V power supply indicator (D2): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V power supply has been connected.

•

+5V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V power supply has been connected.

Test points In the following positions of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board can signal tests be performed. •

VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.

•

AVCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the analog parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.

•

VCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.

•

GND1 and GND2: grounding terminals of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board.

•

AIN: AD collection signal test point.

•

REF: reference voltage.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.

•

It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

5-56

5.6.12 AD Collection Board Functions and principles The AD collection board is intended to implement the following functions: •

Adjusting gains of 12 photoelectric signals via a digital potentiometer.

•

Controlling the channel selection switch to switch among 12 channel signals at different time.

•

Converting photoelectric analog signals into digital signals via an AD converter and then outputting the signals.

The figure below shows the relation between the AD collection board and other PCBAs. Preamplifier board

AD collection board

Main control board

The functional diagram of the AD collection board is as shown below. Preamplifier board

Gain adjustment for 12 analog signals

Main control board Channel selection switch

ADC

AD collection board Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the AD collection board is as shown below.

5-57

VDD AGND

J2

J4

J1

J3

D14 D13

VSS

VG1-VG12 AGND2

GND

P1

VCC RC D15

Connectors The AD collection board contains the following connectors. Power supply: Power supply output connector (J4): 4-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies for the preamplifier board. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

+12V

11.4~12.6V

2

AGND

/

3

-12V

-11.4~-12.6V

4

SGND

/

Power supply output connector (J1): 3-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies (compatible with the BA40/BA38) for the preamplifier board. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

+12V

11.4~12.6V

2

AGND

/

3

-12V

-11.4~-12.6V

Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals: Connector (J2) for preamplifier board signal input: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric analog signals of six channels. Pin No. 1

Signal AGND

Reference Value /

5-58

Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

2

Signal1

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

3

Signal3

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

4

Signal5

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

5

Signal7

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

6

Signal9

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

7

Signal11

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

8

AGND_SHELD

/

Connector (J3) for preamplifier board signal input: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric analog signals of six channels. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

AGND

/

2

Signal2

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

3

Signal4

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

4

Signa6

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

5

Signal8

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

6

Signal10

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

7

Signal12

0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)

8

AGND_SHELD

/

Main control board connector (P4): 25-pin, used for communication with the main control board. Switches and jumpers The AD collection board has no switches or jumpers. Indicators The AD collection board contains the following indicators. Power supply: •

+12V power supply indicator (D13): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V power supply has been connected.

•

-12V power supply indicator (D14): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V power supply has been connected.

•

+5V power supply indicator (D15): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V power supply has been connected.

Test points In the following positions of the AD collection board can signal tests be performed. •

VG1: signal output of channel 340nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG2: signal output of channel 380nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

5-59

•

VG3: signal output of channel 412nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG4: signal output of channel 450nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG5: signal output of channel 505nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG6: signal output of channel 546nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG7: signal output of channel 570nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG8: signal output of channel 605nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG9: signal output of channel 660nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG10: signal output of channel 700nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG11: signal output of channel 740nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VG12: signal output of channel 800nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.

•

VDD: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.

•

VSS: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -12V±5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.

•

VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.

•

Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

•

Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.

•

It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J2 and J3. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

•

After connecting P1 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.

5.6.13 Preamplifier Board Functions and principles The preamplifier board is intended to implement the following functions: •

Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode array.

5-60

•

With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the AD collection board after amplification.

The figure below shows the relation between the preamplifier board and other PCBAs.

The functional diagram of the preamplifier board is as shown below.

Description PCB layout The PCB layout of the preamplifier board is as shown below.

5-61

5-62

Connectors The preamplifier board includes the following connectors. Power supply: Power supply input connector (J1): 3-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies for the preamplifier board. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

+12V

11.4~12.6V

2

AGND

/

3

-12V

-11.4~-12.6V

Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals: Connector (J2) for preamplifier board signal output: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric analog signals of six channels. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

AGND

/

2

Signal1

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

3

Signal3

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

4

Signal5

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

5

Signal7

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

6

Signal9

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

7

Signal11

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

8

AGND_SHELD

/

Connector (J3) for preamplifier board signal output: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric analog signals of six channels. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

AGND

/

2

Signal2

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

3

Signal4

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

4

Signa6

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

5

Signal8

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

6

Signal10

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

7

Signal12

Depending on the actual measuring light intensity.

8

AGND_SHELD

/

5-63

Switches and jumpers The preamplifier board has no switches or jumpers. Indicators The preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and has no indicators. Test points The preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and does not need maintenance, and it therefore, has no test points.

Installation methods and precautions Since encapsulated inside the photometer module, the preamplifier board should be maintained together with the photometer module rather than maintained independently.

5.6.14 Level Sense Board Functions and principles The instrument has three level sense boards, two of them used for detecting reagent level and the other one used for detecting sample level. The three level sense boards are intended for implement the following functions: •

Sensing the reagent and sample levels. The three boards are identical in circuit structure and interfaces and capable of detecting the fluid level steadily and reliably, especially allowing the sample probe to correctly detecting the fluid level inside reaction cuvettes.

•

Outputting level sense signals to the control drive board through the five-probe/mixer conversion board when the probe contacts the fluid level. The probe is controlled to insert into the fluid for about 2mm depth.

•

Providing vertical obstruction detection and outputting the detection signals to the control drive board through the five-probe/mixer conversion board.

The functional diagram of the level sense board is as shown below.

Obstruct signal

A/D

CPU

Fluid level signal Serial communication signal

Interface circuit

Phaselocked loop

Level sense board

Amplification filter circuit

Dualtube probe

Vertical obstruct detection circuit

Oscillation frequency division circuit

Description PCB layout The top view of the level sense board is as shown below.

5-64

5-probe/mixer conversion board

Control drive board

J3

J1

D5

J2 D4

D2

D6

The bottom view of the level sense board is as shown below. TP1

TP4

TP2

TP3

TP6

S2

Connectors The level sense board contains the following connectors. Probe connector (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the sample probe or reagent probes with related circuit. Pin No.

Signal

1

GND

2

Probe capacitor signal input

Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply for the level sense board and output the level sense signal and vertical obstruction signal. Pin No.

Signal

Reference Value

1

GND

/

2

Vertical obstruction signal output

High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output when vertical obstruction happens.

3

Level sense signal output

Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output when the probe detects the fluid level.

4

+12V

11.4~12.6V

Serial port communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication between the level sense board and the control drive board. Pin No.

Signal

1

RXD

2

RST

5-65

Pin No. 3

Signal TXD

Switches and jumpers The level sense board contains the following switches and jumpers. •

PSEN enable jumper (S1): used for downloading application programs.

•

Calibrate key (S2): used for manual self-calibration of fluid level detection.

Jumper S1 must be disconnected in normal conditions. Indicators The level sense board contains the following indicators. •

Level sense system calibration indicator (D2): yellow. It is extinguished when the self-calibration of the level sense system is failed, and vice versa. If it is lit, it indicates that the calibration is complete and the level sense system is ready for measurement. When the calibration is complete, the indicator will be lit all the time.

•

Sensitivity switch indicator (D4): red. It is extinguished when the default sensitivity is being used, and vice versa, which means level sensing is performed in special positions.

•

Level sense indicator (D5): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and vice versa.

•

Vertical obstruction indicator (D6): green. It is extinguished when no vertical obstruction occurs, and vice versa.

Test points In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed. •

TP1 (LEVEL): level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output when the probe detects the fluid level.

•

TP2 (PLL): working point voltage of the level sense system. Normal range: 3.8±0.5V.

•

TP3 (ALEVEL): analog level sense signal, based on which whether the fluid level is detected or not is determined.

•

TP4 (GND): grounding terminal of the level sense board.

•

TP5 (VCO): reserved.

•

TP6 (RAM): vertical obstruction signal output. Normal condition: High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output when vertical obstruction happens.

•

TP7 (PLL1): reserved.

•

TP8: voltage monitoring signal for self-calibration of the level sense system.

•

TP9 (CLK): reserved.

5-66

•

TP10: +9V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the internal phase-locked loop and some operational amplifiers of the PCBA. Normal range: 9V±5%, that is, 8.55-9.45V.

•

TP11: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power most components inside the PCBA, such as micro control unit (MCU). Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.

•

It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

5.6.15 Pressure Detection Board Functions and principles The pressure detection board is intended to implement the following functions: •

Detecting pressure of three gas circuits, converting the detection results into digital signals, and then sending them to the cuvette wash unit via the serial port.

•

Providing ±12V power supply for the water quality sensor, receiving the water quality detection signal, converting it into digital signal, and then sending it to the cuvette wash station via the serial port.

The figure below shows the location of the pressure detection board in the hardware system.

The functional diagram of the pressure detection board is as shown below.

5-67

Description PCB layout

Reserved channel

Auto wash pressure sensor

ISE degassing pressure sensor

Whole unit degassing pressure sensor

Connectors Power supply and communication connector (J1): DB9 connector, used for connecting the wash temperature control board, providing +12V and -12V power supplies for the PCBA, and serial port communication with the upper-level PCBA. Pin No.

Description

Applicable Test Methods

1

+12V power supply

The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working normally.

2

Serial signal

input

The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the system status is Standby.

3

Serial port output signal

The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the system status is Standby.

port

5-68

Pin No.

Description

Applicable Test Methods

4

Online-downloading enable signal

The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the system status is Standby.

5

Ground

/

6

-12V power supply

The voltage at this point lies between -12.6 - -11.4V when the PCBA is working normally.

7

Reset signal

The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the system status is Standby.

8

Ground

/

9

Ground

/

Water quality sensor connector (J2): 6-pin, providing power supply for the water quality detection board and receiving water quality signal. Pin No.

Description

Test Methods

1

+12V supply

power

The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working normally.

2

-12V supply

power

The voltage at this point lies between -11.6 - -11.4V when the PCBA is working normally.

3

Water sensor signal

quality input

The voltage at this point lies between 10-12.6V when there is no water inside the water quality sensor base, and lies between 0-5V when the water quality sensor base is filled with deionized water.

4

Power ground

supply

/

5

Power ground

supply

/

6

Shielded layer of cable, connected with the grounding terminal of the PCBA

/

Reserved pressure sensor connector (J3): reserved connector. Switches and jumpers MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that the MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the PCBA is working normally. Indicators and test points 5-69

Indicators: •

+12V power supply indicator (VPP): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply is working normally.

•

-12V power supply indicator (VEE): green. It is lit when the -12V power supply is working normally.

•

+5V digital power supply indicator (VDD): green. It is lit when the +5V digital power supply is working normally.

•

+5V analog power supply indicator (AVDD): green. It is lit when the +5V analog power supply is working normally.

Test points: •

+12V power supply (VPP): with normal range of 11.4 - 12.6V.

•

-12V power supply (VEE): with normal range of -12.6 - -11.4V.

•

+5V digital power supply (VDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.

•

+5V analog power supply (AVDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.

•

Whole unit degassing negative pressure test point (PRESSURE01): The voltage at this point lies between 3.9-4.4V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.

•

ISE degassing negative pressure test point (PRESSURE02): The voltage at this point lies between 0.05-0.4V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.

•

Whole unit cleaning negative pressure test point (PRESSURE03): The voltage at this point lies between 0.1-0.3V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.

•

Reserved pressure detection channel test point (PRESSURE04): reserved channel.

•

Water quality detection channel test point (WATER): When the water quality sensor cable (J2) is disconnected, the voltage at this point lies between 4.8-5.2V; when the J2 cable is connected, the voltage varies with the status of the water quality.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Tighten the two retaining screws on two sides of connector J1, and insert connector J2 properly into the PCBA.

•

When connecting the pressure sensors (U1, U2 and U4) to the gas circuit, press them slightly and connect them with proper force to avoid breaking the connectors.

•

Install the shielded cover after installing or repairing the PCBA.

5.6.16 Clog Detection Board Functions and principles The clog detection board possesses the following functions: •

Collecting pressure by connecting with the pressure sensor.

5-70

•

Checking for clogs and empty aspirate under the control of the sample control drive board.

•

Sending debugging information to the debugging computer.

The figure below shows the location of the clog detection board in the hardware system.

The function diagram of the clog detection board is as shown below. Constant current drive

Sensor

Differential Analog signal

Compen and primary amplificat -ion

Clog detection board

Differential Analog signal

Secondary amplificati -on

Single-end analog signal

Power supply ADC and MCU

IO Serial port Serial port

Description PCB layout

Connectors Pressure sensor connector (J1): connected with the pressure sensor.

5-71

Sample control drive board Debugging PC

Pin No.

Description

Test Methods

1

Positive end input of pressure sensor

/

2

Positive end of power supply

/

3

Negative end power supply

of

/

4

Negative end input of pressure sensor

/

5

Gain adjustment resistance

/

6

Gain adjustment resistance

Clog detection board control connector (J2): connected with the sample control drive board and used for communicating control signals during clog detection process. Pin No.

Description

Test Methods

1

+12V power supply

The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working normally.

2

-12V power (reserved)

/

3

Confirmed clog signal

The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V when no clog signal is detected.

4

Possible clog (reserved)

/

5

Empty aspirate signal

The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V when no empty aspirate signal is detected.

6

Interruption signal

control

The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V when the system status is Standby.

7

Interruption signal

enable

The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V when the system status is Standby.

8

Ground

/

9

Reserved input

/

10

Reserved output

/

supply

signal

Clog detection board communication connector (J3): connected with the sample control drive board and used for serial port communication between the clog detection board and the sample probe unit. Pin No. 1

Description

Test Methods

+12V power supply

5-72

The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working normally.

Pin No.

Description

Test Methods

2

-12V power (reserved)

3

Serial port input signal

The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the system status is Standby.

4

Serial signal

The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the system status is Standby.

5

Online-downloading enable signal

The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V when the system status is Standby.

6

Reset signal

The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the system status is Standby.

7

Ground

/

8

Ground

/

port

supply

output

/

Clog detection board debugging connector (J4): connected with the serial port of a computer and used for debugging the clog detection system. This connector is temporarily not used. Pin No.

Description

Test Methods

1

+12V power supply

/

2

-12V power supply (reserved)

/

3

Serial port input signal

/

4

Serial port output signal

/

5

Ground

/

Switches and jumpers MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that the MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the PCBA is working normally. Indicators and test points Indicators •

Clog signal indicator (D3): red. It is lit when the PCBA outputs a clog signal.

•

Empty aspirate signal indicator (D4): It is lit when the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate signal.

•

Possible clog signal indicator (D5): It is lit when the PCBA outputs a possible clog signal.

•

+5V power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the +5V power supply is working normally.

5-73

•

+12V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply is working normally.

Test points •

+12V power supply (VPP): The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is working normally.

•

-12V power supply (VEE): reserved test point.

•

Ground (GND): This test point is connected with the grounding terminal of the PCBA.

•

Pressure sensor output signal (ANALOG): It is an analog signal amplified by the pressure sensor. When the pressure sensor is connected to the air, the voltage at this point lies between 0.8-1.3V.

•

Clog signal (CLOG_Y): It is a test point of clog signal output. When the PCBA outputs a clog signal, indicator D3 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V; when the PCBA outputs no clog signal, indicator D3 will be extinguished and the voltage at this point less than 0.4V.

•

Empty aspirate signal (NO_SAM): It is a test point of empty aspirate signal output. When the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V; when the PCBA outputs no empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be extinguished and the voltage at this point less than 0.4V.

•

Possible clog signal (CLOG_M): reserved test point.

•

Debugging test point (TEST): used for test during debugging.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Insert connectors J2 and J3 tightly into the PCBA. When inserting connector J1, you will hear a click, which means that the connector is inserted in place into its slot.

5.6.17 Water Quality Detection Board Functions and principles The water quality detection board converts the status of water quality into changes of output analog voltage. The figure below shows the location of the water quality detection board in the hardware system.

Water quality detection board

Wash temperature control board (wash station)

Pressure detection board

5-74

Main control board

Description PCB layout

Connectors Power supply and output signal connector (J1): used for providing the ±12V power supply for the PCBA and outputting water quality signals. Pin No.

Description

Test Methods

1

Sensor output signal

The voltage at this point lies between 10-12.6V when there is no water inside the water quality sensor base, and lies between 0-5V when the water quality sensor base is filled with deionized water.

2

Power supply ground

/

3

-12V power supply

The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 - 12.6V when the PCBA is working normally.

4

Power supply ground

/

5

+12V power supply

The voltage at this point lies between -11.6 – -11.4V when the PCBA is working normally.

6

Corresponding to the shielded layer, which is connected with the pressure detection board.

/

Installation methods and precautions The water quality detection board exists in the form of water quality sensor assembly, and needs not to be removed once installed. The water quality sensor can be removed from its base. The electrode wire of the water quality sensor is a type of precious metal and should not be touched when you remove the sensor.

5-75

5.7 Power Supply System 5.7.1 Description of Power Supply System As shown in the figure below, the AC power supply passes through the main power switch and then comes to the AC drive board, which then divides the power supply into three parts and provides them for the BA40 power supply assembly, 24V/6A power supply board and 12V/30A power supply board. The 110V/220V transformer circuit is only used on instruments powered by 110V power supply. In this circuit, the 110V AC power supply is transformed to 220V and then used to power the AC pumps on the instrument.

BA40 power supply assembly The BA40 power supply assembly, as the major part of the entire power supply system, consists of three boards, which are 24V power supply board, 12V power supply board and power supply conversion board. It provides power supply for the lamp, DC power supply for major control boards, and power supply for refrigeration modules. After passing through an analog power supply conversion board, the 5V power is converted into +/-12V and then provided for the AD collection board and preamplifier board. The A5V, C12V, B24V, D12V and E12V power goes through a DC power supply conversion board and then is provided for the wash temperature control board, sample control drive board and reagent control drive board. The B12V and A24V power are input to the reagent refrigeration board for powering the radiators and ISE module. Other boards, such as reaction carousel collection board, cleaning fluid temperature collection board, pressure detection board, clog detection board and level sense board, are powered by those boards connected to them. See the figure below. The 24V power supply board converts the AC input into A24V and B24V and into 24VFAN for the cooling fans of radiators. The 12V power supply board converts the AC input into B12V, A5V, ±14V, and 24VLAMP. The 24VLAMP power supply is transformed to A12V through the power supply conversion board and used for powering the lamp. The power supply conversion board is used to shift the AC voltage, control the vacuum pump AC voltage, convert the ±14V power into ±12V, control the C12V 5-76

power, and shift various output voltages. A12V/1.7A

Lamp 5V/analog+/-12V

A5V/8A

5V DC power supply conversion board

BA40 power supply assembly

C12V/7A

B24V

D12V/0.3A

Analog power supply conversion board

5V/analog+/-12V

Main control board

+/-12V analog

AD collection board

Preamplifier board

Reac temp collection board D12V/E12V Cleaning fluid temp Wash temperature collection board Water control board D12V/E12V Pressure detection quality board detection board D12V

5V/C12V/B24V /D12V/E12V

D12V Sample control drive board

D12V/E12V

Reagent control drive board

E12V/0.3A

D12V

Sample probe level sense board Clog detection board

Probe R1 level sense board Probe R2 level sense board

B12V/28A Reagent refrigeration board

A24V/5V

ISE module

A24V/1.3A

12V/30A power supply board The 12V/30A power supply board transforms the AC input into DC F12V, which is used to power the radiators. 12V/30A power supply board

F12V

Reagent refrigeration board

24V/6A power supply board The 24V/6A power supply board transforms the AC input into DC C24V, which is used to power the refrigeration fans.

5.7.2 Performance Indices Power supply input AC voltage input: 220-240V, 220/230V, and 110/115V. AC voltage frequency: 50/60±3Hz AC input power: 3KVA

5-77

Power supply output No.

Name

Rated Output

Lower-level PCBA

1

A5V

5V/8A

5V digital

Analyzing unit power switch

2

A12V

12V/4.2A

Light source

Operating software

3

B12V

12V/28A

Reagent refrigeration

Main power switch

4

C12V

12V/7A

12V drive

Analyzing unit power switch

5

D12V

12V/0.3A

+12V analog

6

E12V

-12V/0.3A

-12V analog

7

F12V

12V/30A

Reagent refrigeration

Main power switch

8

A24V

24V/1.3A

ISE module

Main power switch

9

B24V

24V/21A

24V drive and heater

Analyzing unit power switch

10

24VFAN

24V/1A

Reserved

Main power switch

11

C24V

24V/6A

/

Usage

Reagent fans

refrigeration

Controlled By

Main power switch

Notes: •

Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the operating software while the main power switch and analyzing unit power switch are turned on.

•

Control by analyzing unit power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzing unit power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.

•

Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, and vice versa.

5.7.3 Functional Diagram The functional diagram of the power supply system is as shown below.

5-78

BA40 power supply assembly 12V board B12V

24V board

Control

DC/ DC

Control A24V 24VFAN

24VLMP +14V -14V AC AC

A5V

5VCRL

B24V

AC

24VCRL

Main switch

Analyzing unit switch

Timing control A5V C12V

(Control) +12V -12V

CTL-SLP

CTL-VMP

Lamp voltage DC/DC

C12V (Control)

CTL-LMP

AC 2

Power supply conversion board C12V

A5V

D12V

-12V

12V/30A power supply board

24V/6A power supply board

A12V

B12V

AC 1

AC1 CTL-WTP

24VFAN

A24V

B24V

AC2

Note: CTL-SLP: Hibernate signal CTL-LMP: Lamp control signal CTL-WTP: AC1 control signal CTL-VMP: AC2 control signal 5VCRL: 5V control signal 24VCRL: B24V control signal

F12V

C24V

5.7.4 BA40 Power Supply Assembly The BA40 power supply assembly is composed of the 12V board, 24V board and conversion board. Refer to the functional diagram of the power supply system for the internal structure of the assembly. The functions and principles of the three boards are described on the following pages.

12V board The functional diagram of the 12V board is as shown below. Isolated twotransistor forward conversion

AC

EMC filter

Rectific -ation

PFC boost conversion

390V

DC/DC conversion

B12V

A5V

5VCRL

Isolated singletransistor flyback conversion

The 12V board converts the AC input into the following outputs: •

B12V: used for powering the radiators.

5-79

24VLMP +14V -14V

•

A5V: used for powering the PCBA and controlled by the analyzing unit power switch.

•

24VLMP: It is steady 24V output and then converted into lamp voltage A12V in the way of DC/DC through the power supply conversion board.

•

±14V: The two outputs are converted into ±12V (D12V and -12V) through the voltage stabilizer on the power supply conversion board and then used for powering analog circuits.

The PCB layout of the 12V board is as shown below.

The 12V board is located inside the power supply box. Indicators D20, D21 and D34 are used to indicate voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA and cannot be seen from the outside of the instrument. Indication of voltage outputs: LED

Output Voltage

Indication Status

Controlled By

D20

A5V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs an A5V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

D21

B12V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a B12V power.

Main power switch

D34

A24V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs an A24V power.

Main power switch

5-80

Notes: •

Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the operating software while the main power switch and analyzing unit power switch are turned on.

•

Control by analyzing unit power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzing unit power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.

•

Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, and vice versa.

24V board The functional diagram of the 24V board is as shown below. Isolated twotransistor forward conversion

AC

EMC filter

Rectific -ation

PFC boost conversion

B24V

24VCRL 390V

Isolated singletransistor flyback conversion

A24V 24VFAN

The 24V board converts the AC input into the following outputs: •

A24V: used for powering the ISE module.

•

24VFAN: output voltage, not used temporarily.

•

B24V: used for powering the moving parts, motors and heaters, and controlled by the analyzing unit power switch.

The PCB layout of the 24V board is as shown below.

5-81

LED1, LED2 and LED3 in the figure above are indicators of the A24V, 24VFAN and B24V outputs. Since located inside the power supply box, the three indicators cannot be seen from the outside of the instrument. They are used to indicate the voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA. There are three indicators on the power supply conversion board, and they are used for indicating the voltage outputs of the 24V board. Indication of voltage outputs on the 24V board: LED

Output Voltage

Indication Status

Controlled By

LED1

A24V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs an A24V power.

Main power switch

LED2

24VFAN

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a 24VFAN power.

Main power switch

LED3

B24V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a B24V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

Notes: •

Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the operating software while the main power switch and analyzing unit power switch are turned on.

5-82

•

Control by analyzing unit power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzing unit power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.

•

Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, and vice versa.

Power supply conversion board The functional diagram of the power supply conversion board is as shown below.

This board is used to: •

Providing the AC input for the 12V board and 24V board, and dividing it into AC1 and AC2, which are reserved now and not used for the instrument.

•

Stabilize the ±14V output by the 12V board into D12V and -12V.

•

Converting the 24VLMP output by the 12V board into controlled lamp voltage A12V.

•

Dividing and shifting other DC inputs, and providing power supply interfaces for other PCBAs.

The PCB layout of the power supply conversion board is as shown below.

5-83

Indicators There are 9 voltage indicators on the power supply conversion board indicated by a dotted frame. They are from left to right: D20, D11, D14, D10, D15, D12, D13, D9, and D21, which are used to indicate the following voltage outputs. LED

Output Voltage

Indication Status

Controlled By

D20

D12V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a D12V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

D11

B12V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a B12V power.

Main power switch

D14

-12V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a -12V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

D10

A12V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs an A12V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

D15

A24V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs an A24V power.

Main power switch

D12

C12V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a C12V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

D13

A5V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs an A5V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

5-84

LED

Output Voltage

Indication Status

Controlled By

D9

B24V

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a B24V power.

Analyzing unit power switch

D21

24VFAN

When it is lit, it indicates that the PCBA outputs a 24VFAN power.

Main power switch

Notes: •

Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the operating software while the main power switch and analyzing unit power switch are turned on.

•

Control by analyzing unit power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the analyzing unit power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned on.

•

Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, and vice versa.

The table below shows the status of the indicators when the main power switch and analyzing unit power switch are turned on or off. LED

Output Voltage

D11

B12V

D15

A24V

D21

24VFAN

D12

C12V

D13

A5V

D14

-12V

D20

D12V

D9

B24V

Control Description

Main Power ON Analyzing Unit Power OFF

Main Power ON Analyzing unit Power ON

When the main power switch is ON, indicators D11, D15 and D21 are lit and only controlled by the main power switch rather than the analyzing unit power switch.

9

9

2

9

9

2

9

9

2

2

9

2

2

9

2

2

9

2

2

9

2

2

9

2

The corresponding indicator is extinguished only when the main power switch is ON. When the analyzing unit power switch is ON, the corresponding indicator is lit and controlled by both switches.

5-85

Main Power OFF

LED

D10

Output Voltage

A12V

Control Description

Main Power ON Analyzing Unit Power OFF

Main Power ON Analyzing unit Power ON

Controlled by the main power switch and the operating software

2

2

Main Power OFF

2

Turning on/off the lamp can be controlled through the operating software.

Output connectors: Jack No. J3

Pins Pin1

Symbol ISE

Pin2 J4

Pin1, 3, 5, 7

Output Description A24V+ A24V-

VALVE DRV

C12V positive output

Pin9, 11, 12

B24V positive output

Pin2, 4, 6, 8, 10

B24V and C12V output GND

J7

/

N

AC input N

J8

/

L

AC input L

J9

Pin1

24VFAN+

24VFAN positive output

Pin2

24VFAN-

24VFAN negative output

Pin3

C12VOUT

C12V positive output

Pin4

/

C12V output GND

Pin1

D12V

D12V output

Pin2

-12V

-12V output

Pin4, 5

/

D12V and -12V output GND

Pin3

5VOUT

A5V positive output

Pin6

/

A5V output GND

Pin1

AC PUMP

AC1 output, not used for BA80

J12

J13

J14

Pin3

AC2 output, not used for BA80

Pin6, 8

AC input

Pin1

5VOUT

A5V output

Pin2, 3

B24VOUT

B24V output

Pin4

C12VOUT

C12V output

Pin5

-12V

-12V output

Pin9

D12V

D12V output

5-86

Jack No.

J15

J16

Pins

Symbol

Output Description

Pin6, 7, 8

/

A5V, B24V and C12V output GND

Pin10

/

D12V and -12V output GND

Pin1, 2, 3

B24VOUT

B24V output

Pin4

5VOUT

A5V output

Pin5

D12V

D12V output

Pin6

-12V

-12V output

Pin7, 8, 9, 10

GND2

A5V and B24V output GND

Pin11, 12

DGND

D12V and -12V output GND

Pin1

LAMP

A12V output for lamp

Pin2

A12V output GND for lamp

Troubleshooting BA40 power supply assembly Check the indicators on the power supply conversion board while the main power switch is turned on and the analyzing unit power switch is off. In normal conditions, indicators D11, D15 and D21 should be lit respectively indicating B12V, A24V and 24VFAN. If D11 is not lit, the B12V output may go wrong and perhaps the 12V board is failed; if D15 and D21 are not lit, the A24V and 24VFAN outputs may go wrong and perhaps the 24V board is failed; if all of the three indicators are not lit, check if the AC input of the PCBA is normal, and troubleshoot the 12V board and 24V board. While the main power switch is turned on and the voltage input is normal, turn on the analyzing unit power switch. In normal conditions, all indicators on the conversion board except for the A12V indicator should be lit. If the B24V indicator is not lit, replug the load line; if the error remains, replace the 24V board and then check if the B24V indicator is lit. If the A5V indicator is not lit, perhaps it is short-circuited or the 12V board goes wrong. If the A5V indicator is lit but C12V or D12V/-12V is extinguished, replug the load line; if the error remains, check the conversion board or replace the power supply board; if the error disappears when a new power supply board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board needs to be repaired. If the A12V power cannot be enabled through the operating software while the main power switch and analyzing unit power switch are turned on and working normally, replug the power cord of the lamp; if the error remains, troubleshoot the power supply conversion board by replacing it with a new one.

5.7.5 12V/30A Power Supply Board Major functions The 12V/30A power supply board is intended to implement the following functions: •

Converting the AC input within the entire voltage range into DC 12V output.

•

Providing power supply for the reagent refrigeration board.

5-87

Performance Indices Power supply input: •

AC input voltage: 90-264V AC

•

AC voltage frequency: 50/60±3Hz

Power supply output: •

Rated output voltage: 11.4-12.6V.

•

Rated output current: 30A.

Description of PCBA Connectors: The 12V/30A power supply board contains four connectors, which are described in the table below. Jack No. J1

J2

J3 J4

PIN

Symbol

Description

1

L

Live wire of AC input

2

/

NC

3

N

Neutral wire of AC input

1

12VDC+

AC 12V positive output

2

12VDC-

DC 12V output GND

1

FAN +

12V positive output for cooling fan of the PCBA

2

FAN-

12V GND for cooling fan of the PCBA

1

FAN +

12V positive output for cooling fans

2

FAN-

12V GND for cooling fan of the PCBA

PCB layout:

5-88

Power supply indicators: The 12V/30A power supply board only has a green indicator labeled with D24 as shown in the figure above. When D24 is lit, it indicates that the PCBA has been connected to the power supply and connector J2 has voltage output; when D24 is extinguished, it means that there is no voltage output at connector J2.

Troubleshooting the PCBA Check the indicator D24 when the PCBA is connected to the power supply. If it is lit, it means that there is voltage output on the PCBA. Use a multimeter to measure the voltage between the two pins of connector J2, and then check if the voltage is within the normal range of 12V±5%. If indicator D24 is lit but the output voltage is beyond the normal range, check if the measuring methods are correct, the testing equipment is normal, and the PCBA has been installed correctly, and then replug the load line and measure the voltage again. If the voltage is normal, check the load end; if the voltage fails again, check if the fuse on the power supply board is broken or if there are any other causes, and then replace the power supply board. If the error disappears when a new power supply board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board needs to be repaired. If indicator D24 is extinguished, replug the load line of connector J2 and then use a multimeter to measure the output voltage at J2. If the voltage is normal but D24 is extinguished, it indicates that the D24 LED goes wrong; otherwise, open the power supply box, replug the fan cables from connectors J3 and J4, and then try again. If the error still remains, the power supply board may goes wrong and need to be repaired. If the error disappears when a new power supply board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board is failed.

5.7.6 24V/6A Power Supply Board The 24V/6A power supply board is intended to implement the following functions: Converting the AC input within the entire voltage range into DC 24V output and providing power supply for the cooling fan.

Performance Indices Power supply input: •

AC input voltage: 90-264V AC

•

AC voltage frequency: 50/60±3Hz

Power supply output: •

Rated output voltage: 24V.

•

Rated output current: 6A.

Description of PCBA Connectors: The 24V/6A power supply board contains two connectors, which are described in the table below.

5-89

Jack No. J1

J2

PIN

Symbol

Description

1

L

Live wire of AC input

2

/

NC

3

N

Neutral wire of AC input

1

/

DC 24V output

2

/

DC 24V output GND

positive

Figure 5.4 PCB layout

Measuring output voltage The 24V/6A power supply board has no indicators to indicate output voltage and requires measurement of the output voltage to check if it is normal or not. Use a multimeter to measure the voltage between the two pins of connector J2, and then check if the voltage is within 24V±5%.

Troubleshooting the PCBA If the 24V/6A power supply is abnormal, measure the output voltage at connector J2 and check if it is within the normal range. If the voltage is normal, check the connection cables and load end. If the voltage is abnormal, check if the wire of connector J1 and the PCBA have been installed correctly, replug the load line of connector J2, and then measure the voltage again. If the error still remains, check if the fuse on the power supply board is broken or if there are any other causes, and if necessary, replace the power supply board. If the output voltage is normal while the board is connected to power supply without any loads, but it becomes abnormal once a load line is inserted into J2, check if the cable is correct and the load end is normal. If the load end is correct, replace the 24V/6A power supply board. If the error disappears after a new power supply board is used, it indicates that the original board goes wrong and needs to be repaired; otherwise, check carefully each load connected to the output end of the 5-90

power supply board.

5.7.7 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board Function The instrument has one analog power supply conversion board, which is mainly used to: Convert the +5V digital into +/-12V in the way of DC/DC, and then provide it for the main control board to use as analog power for the AD collection board and preamplifier board.

Description The PCB layout of the analog power supply conversion board is as shown below.

Connectors The analog power supply conversion board contains the following connectors: J1: connector for DC power supply conversion board input. Pin No.

Signal

1

GND

2

A5V

3

NC

4

NC

J2: connector for main control board power supply output. Pin No.

Signal

1

+12V analog

2

-12V analog

3

+5V digital

4, 5

Analog GND

6

Digital GND

5-91

Indicators The analog power supply conversion board contains the following indicators: •

-12V power supply indicator (D3): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V power supply has been connected.

•

+12V power supply indicator (D2): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V power supply has been connected.

•

+5V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V power supply has been connected.

Test points In the following positions of the analog power supply conversion board can signal tests be performed. •

P12V: +12V power supply. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.

•

N12V: -12V power supply. Normal range: -12V±5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.

•

+5V: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.

•

GND: digital grounding terminal of the PCBA.

•

AGND and AGND1: analog grounding terminals of the PCBA.

Installation methods and precautions •

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.

•

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.

•

It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

5.7.8 DC Power Supply Conversion Board Functions and principles The DC power supply conversion board is intended for the following functions: •

Inputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V power for the BA40 power supply assembly.

•

Outputting A5V digital to the analog power supply conversion board.

•

Outputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V power to the sample/reagent control drive boards.

•

Outputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V power to the sample/reagent control drive boards.

5-92

Description

Connectors J1: connector for power supply output of the sample control drive board. No.

Signal

Description

1, 2

B24V

+24V power

3, 10

A5V

+5V digital

4, 11

C12V

+12V digital

7

D12V

+12V analog

14

E12V

-12V analog

8, 9, 5, and 12

GND

Digital ground

6, 13

AGND

Analog ground

J2, J3, J6, J7: connectors for power supply input of the power supply assembly. J2: No.

Signal

Description

1, 3

AGND

Analog ground

2

D12V

+12V analog

4

E12V

-12V analog

J3: No.

Signal

Description

1, 2

B24V

+24V power

3, 5

A5V

+5V digital

4, 9

D12V

+12V power

6

E12V

-12V analog

5-93

No. 5, 6, 7, 10

Signal

Description

GND

Digital ground

J7: No.

Signal

Description

4, 8

A5V

+5V digital

5, 6, 7

B24V

+24V power

1, 2, 3

GND

Digital ground

J6: No.

Signal

Description

1, 2, 5, 6

C12V

+12V power

3, 4, 7, 8

GND

Digital ground

J5: connector for power supply output of the analog power supply conversion board. No.

Signal

Description

1

A5V

+5V digital

2

GND

Digital ground

J4: connector for power supply output of the reagent control drive board. No.

Signal

Description

1, 2

B24V

+24V power

3, 10

A5V

+5V digital

4, 11

C12V

+12V digital

7

D12V

+12V analog

14

E12V

-12V analog

8, 9, 5, and 12

GND

Digital ground

6, 13

AGND

Analog ground

J8: connector for power supply output of the wash temperature control board. No. 7, 8

Signal

Description

B24V

+24V power

5-94

No.

Signal

Description

11

A5V

+5V digital

9, 10

C12V

+12V digital

12

D12V

+12V analog

16

E12V

-12V analog

1, 2, 3, and 4

GND

Digital ground

5

AGND

Analog ground

5.7.9 Tips for Troubleshooting Power Supply System The following summary is about the control relations of the power supply system and provided to help service engineers to troubleshoot various failures. For corresponding relations between the main switch/analyzing unit power switch/hibernating status and the power supply working status, refer to relevant sections on the previous pages. Voltage timing control: When the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, the A5V, C12V (D12V/E12V) and B24V are controlled successively in the order of A5V – C12V (D12V/-12V) – B24V. That is, only when the A5V is connected will the C12V (D12V/-12V) be provided, and this is the same for C12V and B24V; if the A5V is not output, the C12V (D12V/-12V) and B24V will not be provided.

5-95

5.8 Wiring Diagrams

5-96

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

J5

DC power supply conversion board

D

C

6

2

7

3

8

4

9

5

10

J2 1

3

2

4

J7 1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

J14 1

1 -12V(E) black 10 2 AGND green 9 4 D12V white 5

6

2

7

3

8

4

9

5

10

J6 5

2

6

3

7

4

8

J7

3

2

4

1

3

2

4

1

Power supply input cable 2 009-000453-00 8 A5V blue 4 5 B24V red 1 6 B24V red 2 7 B24V red 3 1 GND black 7 2 GND black 8 3 GND black 9

J2

J15

1

7

2

8

3

9

4

10

5

11 12 J4

Power supply input cable 3 009-000454-00 1 C12V red 1 2 C12V red 3 3 GND black 2 4 GND black 4 5 C12V red 5 6 C12V red 7 7 GND black 6 8 GND black 8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

J12

Power supply conversion board (PSCB)

1 Brown N

3 Blue

3

4

1

5

2

6

3

Blue

Wash temperature control board

B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2

GND

3

6

Black

Analyzing unit power switch

GND

C

Lamp power cord 009-000372-00 1

Red

2

Black

A12VOUT

Lamp

1 2

J3

GND

1

24V power cord 009-000477-00 A24V red

1

2

24VGND black

5

J22

J25 P1

5

1

6

2

7

3

8

4

1

1

B12V red

1

2

2

2

B12V red

2

2

3

3

3

GND black

1

3

4

GND black

2

3

AD_Lamp

4

SLP_Lamp

4

4

5

GND

5

5

6

Shield

6

6

1

P2

J6

Power supply radiating fan 1

GND 12VOUT

1 2

Power supply radiating fan 2

GND 12VOUT

3 4

A

D

AC drive board

C +

J16

2 J1

1

2

1

Wash temperature control board lamp control cable 009-000463-00 1 DA_Lamp 1

J1

Analyzing unit power switch cable 009-000371-00 1 12Vout NO

3

1

L

2

1

6

1

J8

Power supply AC input cable 009-000374-00

1

1

J5

2

1

3

2

4

3 4

J2

4

Reagent refrigeration board BX50-30-89611

J3 1

Power supply input cable 1 009-000452-00 1 B24V red 2 2 B24V red 3 3 A5V blue 1 4 C12V yellow 4 6 GND black 6 7 GND black 7 10 GND black 8

Refrigeration 12V power cord 009-000468-00

1

GND

2

12VOUT

3

GND

4 12VOUT Power supply radiating fan cable BA33-20-55752

Power supply radiating fan 3 Power supply radiating fan 4

MINDRAY

Power supply radiating fan cable BA33-20-55752

TITLE: File

Bytes

Date

Time

Power supply board diagram

DWG NO. SHEET 2 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

2

3

4

5-97

5

B

6

7

BS-800

REV 2.0

17

SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

Main power switch input cable 009-000370-00 E yellow green Power socket

1(Y) L brown 2(X)

D

N light blue

4

5

6

7

To enclosure AC drive board main power input cable 009-000373-00 L brown 1 1

1

1

1

2

N light blue

2

J2

2

2

1

24V6A power supply module AC input cable 009-000375-00 1 L brown 1

J1 1 2

3

3

1

3

1

J12

2 3

3

N light blue

3

C

Transformer

2 4 3 6

L brown N light blue

Air connection

Transformer 110V AC input cable 009-000382-00 1 L brown 1 2 N light blue 2 3 L brown 3 4 N light blue 4 2 4

B

Wash temperature control board

Bytes：

Date：

Time：

12V red HEA03 12V red P03 12V red P04

4 5 6 7 8 9

10

12V red

10

1

2

5

3

4

5

6

7

8

4

9 10

11

11 12

12 13

13 14

14 15 16 17

19 20

File：

6 7 8 9

J10

17 18

A

1 2 3

2 3

15 16

18

1

2

3

4

5

6

P05 12V red P07 12V red P08 12V red P09 12V red

3

3

2

4

20

1 2

3 4 5 6

VDC red P04_CTRL black 24V red 24V red GND black GND black

7

8

13 10

L brown

14

N light blue

2

L brown

6

N light blue

1

4

2

5

3

6

AC Drive Board (ACDB)

J9

D

P08: Cuvette wash vacuum pump

P07: Waste pump

Air connection

P09: Degassing vacuum pump

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

24V

2

RED

GND

Air connection

BLACK

P04: Gear pressure pump

C

Heater AC power cord 009-000379-00

J3 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12

2

N light blue

7

L brown

4

N light blue

9

L brown

6

N light blue

11

L brown

Air connection Air connection

Cuvette wash solution heater Temperature protection switch

Air connection

Cuvette cleaning fluid heater

Air connection

Temperature protection switch

Air connection

Whole unit cleaning fluid heater

Air connection

Temperature protection switch

B

AC drive board tieline 009-000470-00

J7 1

19 20

1

F12V red

J8

1

2

2

P02_CTRL yellow

3

3

GND black

2 3

1 2

Reagent refrigeration board

3

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6

3

2

Air connection

1

2

3

4

5

6

MINDRAY TITLE:

AC Drive Board

DWG NO.

BS-800

SHEET 3 2

1

4

BA40 power supply conversion board

Gear pressure pump power cord 009-000377-00 1

2

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

6

J8

17 18

17 18 19

4

5

1

13 14

16

P10

3

3

220V AC pump power cord 009-000380-00 L brown Air N light blue connection

8

J4 1

15 16

15

12V red

2

1 Blue

J7

11 12

13 14

19

J8

9 10

12

20

2

13 14

J6

11

Interior wash gear pump drive cable 009-000471-00

J25

Reagent control drive board (R)

HEA01 12V red HEA02

1

4

11 12

Transformer 220V AC input cable 009-000383-00 Wash temperature board to AC drive board cable 009-000457-00 1

1

9 10

1

2

N

3

J10

J11

2

3

F12V power supply board AC input cable 009-000376-00 1 L brown 1

J1

12V/30A Power supply board

N light blue

3

2 3

24V/6A Power supply board

Power supply assembly AC input cable 009-000374-00 L 1 Brown

J1

Main power switch

8

4

5-98

5

6

7

OF

17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

AD collection board BX50-30-89621

3 6

A 6 7

1 2 7 4

8

3 8 9

4

J5

5

9 2 1

4

5-99

2 1

2 4 6

1 3

Communication conversion board 5

4 3

4 3

6 5

6 5

8 7

J2

8 7

PC Network interface

5 1 2

3 4

1 2

Analog power supply conversion board EAM3

J5

DC power supply conversion board

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

6 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

J1 ISE module

TITLE:

DWG NO.

SHEET 4 OF 7

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40

J1 J8 8 2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

8

10

7

8

GND

CTL

7

6

3

4

4

2

5 6

7

8

RST GND

7

RXD-

6

7

5

8

4

4

1

3

3

2

5 6

1

4

5

2

3

TXD +

1

RXD+

7

3

5

2

3

6

Refrigeration board communication cable 009-000391-00 1 TXD1

1

RESET

6

+5V

4

5 6

J12

7

2

8

8 10

J4

+5V

36 38 40

TXD

35 37 39

29 31 33

＋5V CTL

Control drive board (reagent)

5 6

30 32 34

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

3

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

9

4

10

7

1

8

5

2

6

3

ISE_RXD -

4

1

ISE_RXD+

2

J10

2

36 38 40

ISE module tieline 009-000393-00

5

1

29 31 33

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

TXD1TXD1+ RXD1+ RXD1RST1 GND CTL1 GND TXD2TXD2+ RXD2+ RXD2RST2 GND CTL2 GND TXD3TXD3+ RXD3+ RXD3RST3 GND CTL3 GND TXD4TXD4+ RXD4+ RXD4RST4 GND CTL4 GND TXD5TXD5+ RXD5+ RXD5IN1 GND IN12 GND

9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

7

Sample control drive board communication cable 009-000388-00

5

Main control board power cord 009-000387-00

6

Ethernet cable (reserved)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Ethernet tieline (reserved) TX+ Orange white TX- Orange RX+ Green white RX- Green GND Blue white PWFB Blue

3

Analog power supply conversion board power cord 009-000455-00

5

6 7 8

3

J6

RX- 绿 NC 棕白 NC 棕

2 9

2 7 8

7

5

1 2 3 4 5 6

J2

4

8 10

5

NC 蓝

6

3

NC 蓝白

1 4

1

5

13 2

4

12

1

J3

4 9

3

11 25

2

10 24

1

1 A5V Red 1

2 9 23 14 2

3 GND Black 2

Time 8 22 15 1

35 37 39

4

Bytes

Date 7 21 16 2

30 32 34

6

File 6 20 17 3

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

5

5 19 18 4

10

1

4 18 19 5

8

3

3 17 20 6

6

2

2 16 21 7

4

6

15 22 8

2

3

14 23 9

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 24 10

TX- 橙

25 11

RX+ 绿白

12

J11

+12V Yellow -12V White +5V Red 12VGND Blue 12VGND Blue GND Black

TX+ 橙白

36 38 40

6

35 37 39

29 31 33

1

30 32 34

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Temperature wash control board

1 2 3 4 5 6

3

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

9

9

10

7

1,4,6,10 NC

8

5

RI

6

3

9

4

1

J10

1,4,6,10 NC

2

TXD1TXD1+ RXD1+ RXD1RST1 GND CTL1 GND TXD2TXD2+ RXD2+ RXD2RST2 GND CTL2 GND TXD3TXD3+ RXD3+ RXD3RST3 GND CTL3 GND TXD4TXD4+ RXD4+ RXD4RST4 GND CTL4 GND TXD5TXD5+ RXD5+ RXD5IN1 GND IN12 GND

36 38 40

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

29 31 33

7 8

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

RST RTS

9

7 8

7

Reagent control drive board communication cable 009-000389-00

5

5

3

GND

1

5

35 37 39

2

30 32 34

3

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

TXD

10

RXD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

8

3

TXD1TXD1+ RXD1+ RXD1RST1 GND CTL1 GND TXD2TXD2+ RXD2+ RXD2RST2 GND CTL2 GND TXD3TXD3+ RXD3+ RXD3RST3 GND CTL3 GND TXD4TXD4+ RXD4+ RXD4RST4 GND CTL4 GND TXD5TXD5+ RXD5+ RXD5IN1 GND IN12 GND

6

4

P1

4

2

13

Serial port tieline 009-000384-00

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

J17 2

4

5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Wash temperature control board communication cable 009-000390-00

D

3

1

1

2

2

B AD collection board communication cable 009-000392-00 1 +12V 2 -12V 3 VCC 4 12GND 5 GND 6 AD_DIN 7 NC NC 8 GND 9 DCP_EN 10 DCP_CLK 11 DCP_DIN 12 NC NC 13 GND 14 +12V 15 -12V 16 VCC 17 12GND 18 AD_BUSY 19 AD_CLK 20 AD_RC 21 CH_A3 22 CH_A2 23 CH_A1 24 CH_A0 25 GND

1 8

Control drive board (sample) D

J3

C C

Main Control Board

J7

J5

B

J17

Reagent refrigeration board

MINDRAY Main Control Board Diagram BS-800 REV 2.0

17 SIZE A3

A

1

File Bytes

Date Time

2 1 2

A

3 P1 1

J7 1

2

2

3 4 5 6 7 8

3

3

4 5

4 5

4

5-100

1 2

6

6

7

7

J2

8

8

J3

5

VEE Green

J1 2

2 3

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

6 Preamplifier board power cord 009-000431-00

3

5

Shielded layer White

2

1

AGND Black

1

J3

3

1 4

2

3 4 5 6 7 8

VPP Red

3 4 5 6 7 8

1

7 8

SGND Black

6

SIG5 Blue SIG6 Orange

5

SIG4 Grey

4

8

7

6

SIG3 Green

J2

5

3 4

SIG2 Yellow

SIG1 White

1 2

4

1 2

AGND Black

3 4 5 6 7 8

3

8

SGND

Photoelectric signal cable 2 009-000433-00

6

SIG4

7

5

SIG3

SIG6

4

SIG2

SIG5

3

SIG1

3

2

1

8

7

6

5

4

1 2

AGND

1 2

3

2

1

2

1 +12V 1 2 -12V 2 3 VCC 3 4 12GND 4 5 GND 5 6 AD_DIN 6 7 NC NC 7 8 GND 8 9 DCP_EN 9 10 DCP_CLK 10 11 DCP_DIN 11 12 NC NC 12 13 GND 13 14 +12V 14 15 -12V 15 16 VCC 16 17 12GND 17 18 AD_BUSY 18 19 AD_CLK 19 20 AD_RC 20 21 CH_A3 21 22 CH_A2 22 23 CH_A1 23 24 CH_A0 24 25 GND 25

AD collection board communication cable 009-000392-00

C

Photoelectric signal cable 1 009-000432-00

1

6 7

9 10 11 12 13

Main control board

7

8

D

Preamplifier board D

051-000213-00

3

C

J1

4

AD Collection Board BX50-30-89621

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B

9 10 11 12 13 B

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

TITLE:

MINDRAY Preamplifier Board and AD Collection Board Diagram

DWG NO. BS-800 REV 2.0

SHEET 5 17 SIZE A3

OF

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

Main control board D

3 2

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

30 32 34

35 37 39

9

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

29 31 33

36 38 40

J11

TXD1TXD1+ RXD1+ RXD1RST1 GND CTL1 GND TXD2TXD2+ RXD2+ RXD2RST2 GND CTL2 GND TXD3TXD3+ RXD3+ RXD3RST3 GND CTL3 GND TXD4TXD4+ RXD4+ RXD4RST4 GND CTL4 GND TXD5TXD5+ RXD5+ RXD5IN1 GND IN12 GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

10

7

2

4

6

8

10

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

30 32 34

35 37 39

1

3

5

7

9

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

29 31 33

36 38 40

Wash temperature control board position sensor tieline 009-000460-00

J17

J3

3 2 1

Wash Temperature Control Board

J7

Reaction carousel debugging sensor

+ C E

Reagent mixer rotary sensor

+ C E

Reagent mixer vertical sensor

1

VCC Red 1 RMR_PHO White 4 GND Black 2 GND Green 3

C

17 18 19 20

VCC Red

1

RMU_PHO White GND Black GND Green

4 2 3

VCC Red

3

RMU_PHO White 2 GND Black 4 GND Green 1

35 36

1

J16 J7

J8

5-probe/mixer conversion board

37 38 39 40

2

30 31 32

8

29

33 VCC Red 1 34 AWH_RMA_PHO White 4 35 GND Black 2 36 GND Green 3

37 VCC Red 1 38 AWH_PHO White 4 39 GND Black 2 40 GND Green 3

+ C Wash obstruct E

+ C E

Reagent mixer motor cable 009-000438-00 3 Blue VCC + 4 Black GND C Reagent mixer 1 Purple GND - rotation speed E detection sensor 2 Green PHO

B

9

1

J6

29 30 31 32 33 34

J6

1

25 26

3 2

A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 3 B+ Orange 3 4 B- Brown 4

+ C E

VCC Red

13 14 15 16

23 24

4

1 4

3 2

1 2 8

J8

1

Reaction carousel coder sensor

9

21 22

1

9

Reagent mixer motor

1 1 A+ Red 6 2 A- Yellow 7 2 4 B+ Orange 8 4 5 5 B- Brown 9

+ C E

1 4 2 3

10 REAC_DB_PHO White 4 11 GND Black 2 12 GND Green 3

19 20

J4

Wash temperature control board to reagent mixer motor tieline 009-000443-00

Reagent mixer motor cable 009-000438-00

5 VCC Red 6 REACCPHO White 7 GND Black 8 GND Green

27 28

3 2

3 4 6

Wash station vertical motor

A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

8

Reaction carousel home position sensor

17 18

4

1

6

7

11 12

Wash station vertical motor cable 009-000412-00

B

5

15 16

3 2

1 A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

4

13 14

4

1 3 4 6

3

9 10

J5

Reagent mixer vertical motor cable 009-000411-00

Reagent mixer vertical motor

2

+ C E

1 2

Reagent mixer rotary motor

1 A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

4

1 3 4 6

1

Reagent mixer rotary motor cable 009-000410-00

1

1 VCC Red 1 2 REAC_PHO White 4 3 GND Black 2 4 GND Green 3

3 4

Reaction carousel rotary motor C

8

5

4

1 2 4 5

A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 5 B- Brown 4

6

3

1

Reaction carousel rotary motor cable 009-000413-00

1

4

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Wash temperature control board communication cable 009-000390-00

D 2

probe vertical detection sensor

Wash probe vertical sensor

5-probe/mixer conversion board

MINDRAY

A

TITLE: File

Bytes

Date

Time

DWG NO. SHEET 6

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

Wash Temperature Control Board Diagram_1/3

2

3

4

5-101

5

6

7

BS-800 OF

17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

DC pump/valve cable 2 009-000458-00 1

Red

2 3 4

D

1 2

Concentrated wash solution tank empty

C

5

GND

1 2

GND

2

FL03

7

GND

9

2

FL05

10

1

GND

11

2

FL06

12

FL07

14

High-concentration waste collector full

1

GND

19

2

FL10

20

1

GND

21

2

FL11

22

1

GND

23

4

FL08

16

5

FL09

18

2

FL12

11

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25

J6

B

AC drive board

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

11

11 12

12 13

13 14

15

17 18

16 17

19 20

12V Red P07

14

15 16

P05

Concentrated wash solution pump

3

4

5

6

7

8

Bytes

Date

Time

11 12

19

13 14

20

15 16

21

17 18

22 23

25

23 24

26

25 26

27

27 28

28

29 30

29

31 32

30 31

33 34

33 34

39 40

35

41 42

36

43 44

37

39

47 48

40

49 50

41

J12

43

16

17 18

47

19 20

48

19

P10

19

20

12V Red

20

Red Black Red Black

49

1

3

4

1

2

5

6

2

7

8

4

1 2

2

Cuvette wash phase 4 dispense valve

V18

Cuvette wash phase 5 dispense valve

V19

Cuvette wash phase 6 dispense valve

V20

Wipe block wash valve

+12V Red

V21

Low-concentration waste discharge valve

+12V Red

V22

Red

V23

Low-concentration waste suction valve

+12V Red

V24 +12V

Red

V25 +12V

Red

V26 +12V

Red

V27 +12V

Red

High-concentration waste suction valve Low-concentration waste vacuum release valve High-concentration waste vacuum release valve Vacuum container waste discharge valve

V28

Degassing vacuum pump control valve

+12V Red

V29

ISE degassing vacuum valve

+12V Red

P12

ISE degassing pump

+12V Red

B

V31

[Reserved]

+12V Red

V32

[Reserved]

+12V Red

V11

Reagent mixer 1 wash valve

+12V Red

V13

Reagent mixer 2 wash valve

+12V Red

3

P06

Diluted wash solution pump

+24V

Air pump tieline 009-000466-00 Red

Black

SIGN

Air pump connector (BNC)

GND

MINDRAY

J11

TITLE:

4

5-102

5

C

High-concentration waste discharge valve

+12V

9 10 11 12

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

Red

50

J8

2

Cuvette wash phase 3 dispense valve

V17

+12V

46

1

3

Red

44 45

V16

+12V

42

12V Red

17

Red

38

45 46

Cuvette wash phase 2 dispense valve

+12V

32

37 38

Cuvette wash phase 1 dispense valve

V15

+12V Red

24

13 14

13 14 File

17

V14

+12V Red

18

15 16

18

P05

A

2

11 12

P09

+24V

8

15

12V Red

+24V

15 16

21 22

J10 1

12

18

P03

6

P08

DC pump/valve cable 1 009-000766-00 DI water circulating pump

4

5

35 36

9 10

14

3

14

19 20

J15

11 13

12V Red

13

9 10

Wash temperature control board to AC drive board cable 009-000457-00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2

7

24

HEA01 12V Red HEA02 12V Red HEA03 12V Red P03 12V Red P04 12V Red

1

Dilution valve

+12V Red

12

Wash Temperature Control Board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Red

10

6

1

3

Primary vacuum container full

9

V06 +12V

8 5

Diluted wash solution tank empty Diluted wash solution tank full

Low-concentration waste collector full

Probe interior wash return valve

+12V Red

6

FL01

1

Inlet valve

V05

D

Floater sensor cable 2 009-000459-00

Water tank empty Water tank full

V01 +12V

Red

6

Wash Temperature Control Board Diagram_2/3

DWG NO.

BS-800

REV 2.0

SHEET 7

17

SIZE A3

7

OF

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

D

D

6

5

8

7

3 4 5 6

Power supply conversion board

10

4

11

5

12

6

J8

DC power supply conversion board

3

8 GND Black 2 9 GND Black 3 10 GND Black 4 11 GND Black 5 12 -12V(E) White 6 Wash temperature control board power cord 009-000456-00

9

009-000465-00

8 9 10 11 12 1

8

J2

7

B24V Yellow C12V Yellow C12V Blue A5V Red D12V Green GND Black

2

6 7 8

B24V Yellow

2 3 4 5 6 7

7

4 6 8

1

1

5

12

6

2

11

5

4

10

4

Heat Heat Heat

3

3

2 3 4

2

9

1

J1

1

8

3 5 7

2

1

24V 24V 24V Heat

7

24V

2 3 4

1

1

Reaction carousel heater tieline

B

MINDRAY

A

TITLE: File

Bytes

Date

Time

Wash Temperature Control Board Diagram_3/3

DWG NO. SHEET 8 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

2

C

J18

To enclosure

Slip ring air connection 2 SR2

6

11

1 Shild

Slip ring air connection 1 SR1

GND Black 6

10

Shield

B

Shield

8

AGND

5

6

7

4

4

GND

5

11 12

SLP_Lamp

5

6

2 4

4

4

S2_B S2_A

GND Black 4

6

J1 3

5 2

3

2

10

J25

GND Black 2

5

J1

1

9

Wash Temperature Control Board

SIG Yellow 1

4

2

6

8

3

5

7

4

1 3 5

2

AD_Lamp

6

6

SYNC_ADT DIN_ADT CLK_ADT

GND

3

5

4

5

2

4

3

2 3 1

3 Slip ring air connection 4 SR4

2

1

3

Slip ring air connection 3 SR3

6 8 7 9

5

J2

Wash temperature control board lamp control cable 009-000463-00 1 DA_Lamp 1

2

4 5

1

Shield AGND DOUT_ADT BUSY_ADT VPP

009-000464-00

VPP Red

3

Reaction temperature control communication cable

2

8

J1

J19

C

1

5

20 19

9

18 17

4

16 15

1

2 VEE Green 3

8

J21

14 13

3 2 4 5 6 7

3

12 11

Pressure detection board

1

7

4 5 6 7 10 19

+12V Red RXD Purple TXD White PSEN Green GND Black -12V Yellow RST Blue 8 Shield

2

SCLK CH2 CH0 +12V GND Shield

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7

18 17 20 19

10 9

6

16 15

7

1

5

14 13

5

8 CS#

Cleaning fluid quality detection sensor cable 009-000444-00

6

12 11

6

Wash temperature control board to pressure detection board cable 009-000462-00

4

6 8 10 11 13

3

3

10 9

1

4

1

3

2

1

3

Water quality detection board

1

4

2

2

1

Cleaning fluid temperature collection board BX50-30-89639

J5

Wash temperature control board to cleaning fluid temperature collection board cable 009-000461-00 Shield 9 5 SDO 3 1 GND 2 12 CH0 8

3

4

5-103

5

6

7

BS-800

REV 2.0

17

SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

B

Probe R2 rotary motor

Probe R2 vertical motor

R2 syringe motor A

File

Bytes

Date

Time

1 3 4 6

1 3 4 6

1 2 5 6

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

29 31 33

36 38 40

TXD1TXD1+ RXD1+ RXD1RST1 GND CTL1 GND TXD2TXD2+ RXD2+ RXD2RST2 GND CTL2 GND TXD3TXD3+ RXD3+ RXD3RST3 GND CTL3 GND TXD4TXD4+ RXD4+ RXD4RST4 GND CTL4 GND TXD5TXD5+ RXD5+ RXD5IN1 GND IN12 GND 2

4

6

8

10

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

30 32 34

35 37 39

1

3

5

7

9

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

29 31 33

36 38 40

Reagent control drive board position sensor tieline 009-000419-00

J10

1 2

R2 syringe motor cable 009-000402-00 1 A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 5 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12

3 2 3 2

1

15 16

J16

Control Drive Board (Reagent)

1 3 2

17 18

J12

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

J17

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

J18

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

J19

+ C Reagent carousel outer - ring home position sensor E

5 VCC Red 1 6 RGOD_PHO_C White 4 7 GND Black 2 8 GND Green 3

+ C E

9 10 11 12

+ C Reagent carousel inner - ring home position sensor E

VCC Red 1 RGID_PHO White 4 GND Black 2 GND Green 3

13 VCC Red 1 14 RGID_PHO_C White 4 15 GND Black 2 16 GND Green 3 17 VCC Red 1 18 RRI_PHO White 4 19 GND Black 2 20 GND Green 3 21 VCC Red 1 22 RRI_PHO_C White 4 23 GND Black 2 24 GND Green 3

+ C E

Reagent carousel outer ring coder sensor

+ C R1 E

rotary home position sensor

+ C E

R1 rotary coder sensor

25 26 27 28

VCC Red 1 RU1_PHO White 4 GND Black 2 GND Green 3

+ C E

R1 vertical sensor

29 30 31 32

VCC Red RS1_PHO White GND Black GND Green

1

+ C E

R1 syringe sensor

VCC Red RR2_PHO White GND Black GND Green

1

+ C R2 E

rotary home position sensor

33 34 35 36

4 2 3 4 2 3

37 VCC Red 1 38 RR2_PHO_C White 4 39 GND Black 2 40 GND Green 3

+ C E

R2 rotary coder sensor

41 42 43 44

VCC Red RU2_PHO White GND Black GND Green

1 4 2 3

+ C E

R2 vertical sensor

45 46 47 48

VCC Red RS2_PHO White GND Black GND Green

1

+ C E

R2 syringe sensor

4 2 3

B

MINDRAY TITLE:

Control Drive Board (Reagent) Diagram_1/2

DWG NO. SHEET 9 OF 2

C

Reagent carousel inner ring coder sensor

J20

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

VCC Red 1 RGOD_PHO White 4 GND Black 2 GND Green 3

1

J15

4

3 2

1

4

J14

4 Probe R2 vertical motor cable 009-000401-00 1 A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

D

4

3 2

J13

4 Probe R2 rotary motor cable 009-000400-00 1 A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

J4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

9

1

1 2 3 6

7

13 14

3 2

R1 syringe motor

R1 syringe motor cable 009-000399-00 1 A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 5 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

5

4

Probe R1 vertical motor

3 4 6

35 37 39

3

1

1

Probe R1 vertical motor cable 009-000398-00 1 A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

3 2

1 3 4 6

30 32 34

1

4

Probe R1 rotary motor

Probe R1 rotary motor cable 009-000397-00 1 A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 6 B- Brown 4

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

1

C

10

3 4

3 2

Reagent carousel inner ring rotary motor

8

4

Reagent carousel outer ring rotary motor

Reagent carousel outer ring motor cable 009-000395-00 1 A+ Red 1 1 2 A- Yellow 2 2 4 B+ Orange 3 4 5 B- Brown 4 5 Reagent carousel inner ring motor cable 009-000396-00 1 A+ Red 1 1 2 A- Yellow 2 2 4 B+ Orange 3 4 5 B- Brown 4 5

6

1

D

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Reagent control drive board communication cable 009-000389-00

Main control board 2

3

4

5-104

5

6

7

BS-800 17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

2

9 10

9

V05

2

1

2

3

4

7

3

4

5

6

5

6

8

7

8

7

8

9 14

9 10 11 12

9 10

10

13 14

J5

4

6

7

8

8

7

8 10

J25

J24

6 7

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

9 10

10

2

GND Black 1 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2

3

LEVEL Green 4

J11

2

5 6

VDC Red

3

+12V Red

4

6

Txd White

1

7

Rxd Brown

9

3

2

3

24V Red GND Black GND Black

4

+12V Red

5 6

1 2

3

3 RI_VALUE_OUT Black 1

4 5

J23

J22

6 7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4

+12V Red

5 RI_VALUE_IN Black 6

2

24V Red

4

+12V Red

2 1 2

1

2

3

4

5

6

Interior wash valve cable

Probe R1 interior wash valve

Exterior wash valve cable

Probe R1 exterior wash valve

Interior wash valve cable

Probe R2 interior wash valve

7 RI_VALUE_OUT Black 1

8

Exterior wash 8 +12V Red 2 valve cable Reagent control drive board wash valve cable 009-000420-00

Probe R2 exterior wash valve

MINDRAY TITLE:

Bytes

Date

Time

DWG NO. SHEET 10 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

2

3

4

5-105

5

B

AC drive board

A

File

C

Shielded layer

J5

1

P04_CTRL Black

3

1 RI_VALUE_IN Black

2

4

2

3

1

3

1

8

R-IN-PRESS Red GND Black

2

R2 level sense cable 009-000435-00 1

3

6

5

Inner ring control button

GND Black

3

J3

5 9

4

4

Outer ring control button

J2

1

Interior wash gear pump drive cable 009-000471-00

3

Reagent carousel panel button indicator cable 009-000421-00 R-OUT-PRESS Red 1

1

10 Shield

2

B

Txd White Rxd Brown

J12

5-probe/mixer conversion board

Reagent bar code reader tieline 009-000418-00 1 VCC 1 2 RXD 3 3 TXD 2 NC 5 4 NC 5 GND 4 6 CTS 10 7 RTS 6 8 TRIG 9 9 NC NC 7

1

Reagent carousel proximity sensor connection cable 009-000422-00 R-OUT-NEAR Yellow 1 Reagent carousel GND Black 2 cover sensor

SGND Black

J7

Control Drive Board (Reagent)

3

7

14

9 10

10

6 7

Shielded layer

D

Reagent bar code module BA40-30-61986

J1

2

6

DC power supply conversion board

6

7

4

2

5

1

13

5

5

10

12

4

4

9

11

3

3

8

10

GND Black GND Black

2

2

9

8 9

7

1

8

4 1 2 14 5 6

1

A5V Red 2 C+12V Blue 3 B+24V Orange 4 B+24V Orange 5 -12V(E) White 6 GND Black 7 GND Black 8

1

D12V Yellow 3

4

9 10

6

7

3

9

3

+12V Red

1

J4

C

2

LEVEL Green 4

4

J3

Reagent control drive board power cord 009-000415-00

1

GND Black 1 RAM Blue 2 LLS Green 3 ＋12V Red 4 NC 5 RXD White 6 NC 7 TXD Brown 8 NC 9

J1

GND Black 1 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2

3

R2 level sense board BX50-30-89635

5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8

9 10

10

R2 level sense tieline 009-000417-00

J21

6

7

2

3

4

5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2

2

3

4

J2

+12V

1

2

3

1

Degassed water return valve (V05) cable

Interior wash return valve drive cable 009-000740-00 V05 3

SGND Black

1

1

3

13 14

R1 level sense cable 009-000434-00

5-probe/mixer conversion board cable

J3

GND Shield

J2

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2

11 12

P04

1

GND Black RAM Blue LLS Green ＋12V Red NC RXD White NC TXD Brown NC

1

8

R1 level sense tieline 009-000416-00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8

4

7

8

7

R1 level sense board BX50-30-89635

6

7

6

3

5

1

5

2

3

Reagent/Sample probes interior wash valve cross control cable 009-000739-00 2 6 GND 6 4

4

J2

D

3

1

Sample control drive board

1

6

7

Control Drive Board ® Diagram_2/2 BS-800 17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 TXD1TXD1+ RXD1+ RXD1RST1 GND CTL1 GND TXD2TXD2+ RXD2+ RXD2RST2 GND CTL2 GND TXD3TXD3+ RXD3+ RXD3RST3 GND CTL3 GND TXD4TXD4+ RXD4+ RXD4RST4 GND CTL4 GND TXD5TXD5+ RXD5+ RXD5IN1 GND IN12 GND

Sample control drive board position sensor tieline 009-000427-00

2

4

6

8

10

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

30 32 34

35 37 39

1

3

5

7

9

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

29 31 33

36 38 40

J10

4

3 2

D

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1 2 3 4

1

13 14 15 16

4

3 2

1

11 12

J14

J15

21 22

J12

4

3 2

1

19 20 23 24

3 2

1

29 30 31 32

Control Drive Board (Sample)

J16

4

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

J17

45 46 49 50

J20

Bytes

Date

Time

Outer sample carousel home position sensor

5 VCC Red 1 6 SOD_PHO_C White 4 7 GND Black 2 8 GND Green 3

+ C E

Outer sample carousel coder sensor

9 10 11 12

1 4 2 3

+ C E

Inner sample carousel home position sensor

13 VCC Red 1 14 SID_PHO_C White 4 15 GND Black 2 16 GND Green 3

+ C E

Inner sample carousel coder sensor

VCC Red SID_PHO White GND Black GND Green

17 VCC Red 18 SR_PHO White 19 GND Black 20 GND Green 21 VCC Red 22 SR_PHO_C White 23 GND Black 24 GND Green

1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3

25 26 27 28

VCC Red SU_PHO White GND Black GND Green

1 4 2 3

+ C E

Sample probe vertical sensor

29 30 31 32

VCC Red SS_PHO White GND Black GND Green

1 4 2 3

+ C E

Sample syringe sensor

+ CSample E

1

VCC Red SMU_PHO White GND Black GND Green

45 46 47 48

VCC Red 3 RMU_PHO White 2 GND Black 4 GND Green 1

probe rotary coder sensor

+ CSample mixer rotary home position sensor E

4 2 3

41 42 43 44

1

+ C E

4 2 3

B

Sample mixer vertical sensor

1 2

J4

J9

Sample mixer motor cable 009-000438-00 3 Blue VCC + 4 Black GND C Sample mixer rotation 1 Purple GND - speed detection sensor E 2 Green PHO

MINDRAY

Control Drive Board (Sample) Diagram_1/2

TITLE: DWG NO. 11

1 2

C

+ CSample probe rotary home position sensor E

J19

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

+ C E

5-probe/mixer conversion board

5-probe/mixer conversion board

File

1 4 2 3

33 VCC Red 34 SMR_PHO White 35 GND Black 36 GND Green

43 44

J18

VCC Red SOD_PHO White GND Black GND Green

8 1 3 2 4

2

J3

9 10

1

1

J5

1

3 2

Sample mixer motor

4

A

36 38 40

47 48

8

1 1 A+ Red 6 2 A- Yellow 7 2 4 B+ Orange 8 4 5 5 B- Brown 9

29 31 33

25 26

9

Sample mixer motor cable 009-000437-00

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

9

Sample mixer vertical motor

9

1 2

Sample mixer rotary motor

7

3 4

B

5

27 28

3 2

Sample syringe motor

35 37 39

3

4

Sample probe vertical motor

30 32 34

1

1

Sample probe vertical motor cable 009-000406-00 1 A+ Red 1 3 A- Yellow 2 3 4 B+ Orange 3 4 6 B- Brown 4 6 Sample syringe motor cable 009-000407-00 1 A+ Red 1 1 3 A- Yellow 2 3 4 B+ Orange 3 4 6 B- Brown 4 6 Sample mixer rotary motor cable 009-000408-00 1 A+ Red 1 1 3 A- Yellow 2 3 4 B+ Orange 3 4 6 B- Brown 4 6 Sample mixer vertical motor cable 009-000409-00 1 A+ Red 1 1 3 A- Yellow 2 3 4 B+ Orange 3 4 6 B- Brown 4 6 Sample mixer motor tieline 009-000428-00 1 A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 3 B+ Orange 3 J9 4 B- Brown 4 1

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

17 18

3 2

Sample probe rotary motor

10

4

C

J13

8

1

Inner sample carousel rotary motor

3 2

1 2 4 5 Inner sample carousel motor cable 009-000404-00 1 A+ Red 1 1 2 A- Yellow 2 2 4 B+ Orange 3 4 5 B- Brown 4 5 Sample probe rotary motor cable 009-000405-00 1 A+ Red 1 1 3 A- Yellow 2 3 4 B+ Orange 3 4 6 B- Brown 4 6

Outer sample carousel rotary motor

6

4

Outer sample carousel motor cable 009-000403-00 1 A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 4 B+ Orange 3 5 B- Brown 4

1

D

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Sample control drive board communication cable 009-000388-00

Main control board 2

3

4

5-106

5

6

7

BS-800

REV 2.0

17

SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

5

6

Clog detection cable 009-000425-00 1

VPP Red

7

8

9 10

11 13

J3

J10

3

+12V Red

4

6

Txd White

1

7

Rxd Brown

3

D

3

10

LEVEL Green 4

J3

SGND Black

6

GND Black 1 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2

3

2

9

3

4

10 12 14

1

2

5

6

7

8

GND Black 9 RXD Orange 10 TXD Brown 11 RST Brown 12 NC 13 Shielded layer 14

10

4

5

2

1

8

9 10

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4

7

2

Sample level sense board BX50-30-89635

6

7

8

9

10

4

5

1

3

5

6

7

8

3

Sample level sense board cable 5-probe/mixer 009-000436-00 conversion board cable 1

1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9

2

1 3

4

5

6

2

GND Black RAM Blue LLS Green ＋12V Red NC RXD White NC TXD Brown NC

J2

3

J2

J4

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8

1

4

7 3 4 6 5

7

Sample level sense tieline 009-000424-00

1

2 VEE Blue 3 3 CLOT_YES White 2 4 CLOT_MAY Grey 4 5 CLOT_NOSAM Yellow 5 8 GND Black 6 6 INT Green 7 7 INTEN Purple 8

2

1

D

2

Clog detection conversion board

J3

4

9

Shielded layer

J2 Sample control drive board power cord 009-000423-00 D12V Yellow

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 10

Reagent control drive board

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12

1

2

3

4

8

V05

8

5

6

9

GND

9

7

8

Shild

14

J22

13 14

2 3

2

+12V Red

1

2

3

4

5 SM_VALVE_1 Black

1

5

6

6

2

7

8

4

+12V Red

+12V Red

2

7 SM_VALVE_2 Black 1 8

+12V Red

2

Interior wash valve cable

Sample probe interior wash valve

Exterior wash valve cable

Sample probe exterior wash valve

Sample mixer wash valve 1

Sample mixer wash valve 1

Sample mixer wash valve 2

Sample mixer wash valve 2

B

2 4

S-OUT-LED Black

5

+24V Red

6

4

GND Black

3

8

MINDRAY

8

7

+24V Red

J23

6 7

S-IN-LED Black

5

Inner sample carousel indicator

S-IN-PRESS Red

1

2

1

Outer sample carousel indicator

GND Black

1 S_VALUE_IN Black

3 S_VALUE_OUT Black 1

J5

Inner sample carousel control button

C

10 Shield

J5

Sample carousel panel button indicator cable 009-000430-00 S-OUT-PRESS Red 1

Outer sample carousel control button

GND CTS RTS TRIG

1 3 2 NC 5 4 10 6 9 NC 7

Sample control drive board wash valve cable 009-000429-00

9 10 11 12

13 14

9

Reagent/Sample probes interior wash valve cross control cable 009-000739-00 1 2 6 GND 6 3 4 7 P04 7

Control Drive Board (Sample)

J1

VCC RXD TXD

Sample bar code module BA40-30-61994

1

7

14

9 10

5

10

6

4

13

9

5

3

12

8

4

2

11

7

3

GND Black GND Black

1

10

8

1 2 3 4 NC 5 6 7 8 9 NC

J7

3 A5V Red 2 4 C+12V Blue 3 1 B+24V Orange 4 2 B+24V Orange 5 14 -12V(E) White 6 5 GND Black 7 6 GND Black 8 9

Sample bar code reader tieline 009-000426-00

1

6

2

9

B

7

1

C

8

DC power supply conversion board

J1

A

TITLE: Control Drive Board (Sample)_2/2 File

Bytes

Date

Time

DWG NO. SHEET 12 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

2

3

4

5-107

5

6

7

BS-800 17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

D

D

Wash temperature control board to cleaning fluid temperature collection board cable 009-000461-00 Shile

Cuvette cleaning fluid temperature sensor

C

Shield Black

1

1

2

AGND Black

2

2

3

NTC Red

3

Shield Black

1

2

AGND Black

2

NTC Red

3

1 2

J2

Cleaning Fluid Temperature J5 Collection Board BX50-30-89639

3

009-000483-00 Whole unit cleaning fluid temperature sensor

1

Shield Black

1

2

AGND Black

2

3

NTC Red

3

1 2

J4

3

Ambient temperature sensor cable BA38-21-88224 1

Ambient temperature sensor

Shield Black

2

AGND Black 3

NTC Red

3

3

1

GND

2

11

+12V

7

3

1

3

J1

9

SDO

1

1

2

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

J3

3

B

3

CS#

1

6 8

SCLK CH2

4 5

10 12 13

CH0 CH0 GND

6

1

4

3

6

5

8

7

10 9

8 10 Shile

2

Wash temperature control board

Cuvette wash solution temperature sensor

5

1

12 11 19

14 13 16 15

2 7 4 9 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

18 17

NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC

20 19

C

J19

B

MINDRAY

A

TITLE: File

Bytes

Date

Time

DWG NO. SHEET13 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board

2

3

4

5-108

5

6

7

BS-800

REV 2.0

17

SIZE A3

A

2

1

D

Reaction carousel heater 009-000451-00

3

VCC Red

1

GND Black

1 2

4

5

6

7

8

D

J4

2

Reaction carousel temperature control communication cable

Temperature sensor 1 009-000479-00

C

Temperature sensor 2 009-000480-00

Temperature sensor 3 009-000481-00

Shield

1

1

Sensor signal

2

2

Sensor signal

3

3

Shield

1

Sensor signal

2

Sensor signal

3

J1

1 2

J2

3

Shield

1

1

Sensor signal

2

2

Sensor signal

3

3

Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board

Brown

1

24V

Red

2

3

24V

Black

3

4

24V

Orange

4

5

HEAT

Green

5

1

2

6

HEAT

Blue

6

3

4

7

HEAT

Yellow

7

5

6

8

HEAT

Purple

8

White

9

7

8

9

DIN

9

10

10

CLK

11

12

11

SYNC

13

14

12

DOUT

15

16

17

18

19

20 J9

J3

24V

2

13

BUSY

14

NC

White-Black10 Grey

11

White-Brown 12 White-Red 13

Slip ring cable BA40-21-61675

009-000464-00 1

1

2

2

3

3

1

4

4

5

2

6

3

7

1

8

4

9

2

10

3

11

1

12

4

13

5

15

NC

16

Shield

White-Purple 14

14

5

17

S2_A

White-Yellow 15

15

2

18

VPP

White-Green 16

16

3

19

AGND

White-Blue 17

17

4

20

S2_B

White-Orange 18

18

1

Slip ring air connection 1 SR1

Slip ring air connection 2 SR2

C

Slip ring air connection 3 SR3

Slip ring air connection 4 SR4

B

B

Reaction temperature protection switch cable 009-000450-00

VCC Red GND Black

1

1 2

2

J5

MINDRAY

A

TITLE: File

Bytes

Date

Time

DWG NO. SHEET14 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board

2

3

4

5-109

5

6

7

BS-800 17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

2 1 2

A24V Red

1

Air connection

1

2 Black

Red 2

4

D Red

2

Radiator 10

3

1

1

Radiator 9

Reagent refrigeration radiator group cable 5 009-000493-00 Black

2

2

1 Red 2

Black

1 Red 3

1

Radiator 8

4

Reagent refrigeration radiator group cable 4 009-000492-00 Black

1

2 Black

Red 2

4

2

1 Red 3

Reagent refrigeration radiator group cable 3 009-000491-00 Black 1

1

2 Black

Red 2

4

1

2 1

Red

Reagent refrigeration radiator group cable 2 009-000490-00 Black

1

2 Black

Red 2

4

1

2 Reagent refrigeration radiator group cable 1 009-000489-00 Black 1

Radiator 7

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

J4

J7

J6

J5

Refrigeration circulating pump cable 009-001010-00 1 24V 1

J25

2

2

7

3

8

4

J20

6

1

C24V Red

4

2

GND Black

8

1

4

1

J8

1

2

3

3

Air connection

Air connection

4

5-110

J9 3 6

1

1

Air connection

2

5

3

4 4 GND Black 2 Air connection

Reagent bar code demisting heater

Temperature protection switch

TITLE:

Reagent Refrigeration Board Diagram

DWG NO.

6

J5

MINDRAY

1

2

Air connection

1

EMA2

ISE module

Demisting heater tieline 009-000471-00 1 12V Red 1

GND Black 2

1

ISE24V Red

3

6

4 GND Black 2

2

EMA1

2

J17

3

3

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

3

Shieled

1 ISE5V Red

GND Black 3

ISE radiating fan

2 5

To enclosure

1

DATA Yellow 2

F12V Red

GND Black

1 3

Lamp radiating fan

1 4

ISE module power cord 009-000478-00

9

2

9

3

10

7

1

8 7 1

F12V Red

DATA Yellow 2

Lamp radiating fan tieline 009-000472-00

3 GND Black 3

3

2 DATA Yellow

1 FAN24V Red 1

2

2

GND Black 3

1 FAN24V Red

DATA Yellow

1

2

Refrigeration fan tieline 009-000476-00

Air connection

8

5

8

Refrigeration fan cable 2

6

3

7

Refrigeration fan cable 1

J23

4

6

6

5

5

TXD1 TXD + 2 RXD+ 3 RXD4 RST 5 GND 6 CTL 7 GND 8 Refrigeration board communication cable 009-000391-00

1 3

4

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3

3

3

GND Black

2

2

8

1

2 1

7

5

J10

J21

6

J24

5

3

P02_CTRL Yellow 2

1

2 4

2

2

2

AC drive board

4

4

Time

AC drive board tieline 009-000470-00 F12V Red 1

J7

1

J1

3

Bytes

Date

3

SHEET 15 OF 7

B

Main control board

3

1

3 4

A

File

GND Black

1

2

2

1 2

F_DATA1 White 2

C

6

1 2 3 4

4

Temperature switch 2

6

J19

5

3

1 2 3 4

5

4

1 2

3

J2

Air pump fan tieline 009-001026-00 FAN24V Red 1

2

Reagent Refrigeration Board

J2 F12V power cord 009-000467-00 F12V Red F12V Red GND Black GND Black

3

Air pump radiating fan 1 2100-20-08144

2

GND Black

2

6

1

F_DATA1 Yellow

Air connection

6

5

Liquid pump radiating fan

1

5

5

4

5

2

Liquid pump radiating fan cable 009-001025-00 4 FAN24V Red 1

3

A24VGND Black

J22

2

2

Contr

4

1

1

Refrigeration temperature protection switch cable 009-000767-00 1 1 Temperature switch 2 2 1

1

Air connection

Radiator 6

4

J3

J2

3

Air connection Radiator 5

Air connection

GND Black

2

Radiator 4

Air connection

B12V Red GND Black

Red

1

2 SEN_RT Red

2

3

Shielded Black

GND White

1

1

2

GND White

SEN_RT Red

J16

Radiator 3

8

Refrigeratio n circulating pump

2

24V power cord 009-000477-00

24V6A power supply board BX50-30-89627

3

2

1

J3

2

12V30A power supply board

1

Radiator 2

7

P2

1

B

3

Radiator 1

6

2

C

2

Air connection

Air connection

1

3 4

1

J15

B12V Red

5

1

Power supply conversion board BA40-30-61627

1

3

12V power cord 009-000468-00

P1

1

D

Thermistor 3001-21-07100

2

Refrigeration temperature sensor cable 009-000473-00 Black Shielded

Thermistor 3001-21-07100

4

3

3

3

2

1

BS-800

REV 2.0

17

SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

D

D Sample control drive board power cord 009-000423-00

2

J3

3

10

4

11

5

10

J2

7

DC Power Supply Conversion Board

1

1

3

2

4

J7 5

2

6

4

3

7

12

5

4

8

13

6

14

7

2 3

10 11

5

10

1

9

4

9

3 4 1 2 14 5 6

8

3

8

GND Black GND Black

9

7

14

2

7

9 10

8

4 6

13

1

6

A5V Red C12V Blue B24V Orange B24V Orange 6 -12V(E) White 7 GND Black 8 GND Black

3

5

12

5

10

9

D12V Yellow

2 3 4 5

7

J4

9

5

2

6 7

2 3 4 5 6 7

B24V Yellow B24V Yellow C12V Blue A5V Red D12V Green GND Black

8 9 10 11 12 1

4

8

9

3

J5

1

2

12

6

6

11

5

5

10

4

4

3

8

3

12

1

7

2

9 11

8

4

9

5

10

J15 1

7

2

8

3

9

4

10

5

11

Power supply input cable 3 009-000454-00

B24V Yellow

8 GND Black 2 9 GND Black 3 10 GND Black 4 11 GND Black 5 12 -12V(E) White 6 Wash temperature control board power cord 009-000456-00

7

3

6

1

7

8

2

10

6

2

C12V Red C12V Red GND Black GND Black 5 C12V Red 6 C12V Red 7 GND Black 8 GND Black

3 4

1 2

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

Analog power supply conversion board power cord 009-000455-00 1 A5V Red 2

1

GND Black 3

Power supply conversion board (power supply assembly)

C

12 J4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

7

1

Wash temperature J1 control board

Power supply input cable 2 009-000453-00 8 A5V Blue 4 5 B24V Red 1 6 B24V Red 2 7 B24V Red 3 1 GND Black 7 2 GND Black 8 3 GND Black 9

8

J6

B

1 -12V(E) Black 10 2 AGND Green 9 4 D12V White 5

J14 1

J1 4

4

9

1

C

6

2

8

Reagent control drive board power cord 009-000415-00

J1

1

2

3

8

J1

Power supply input cable 1 009-000452-00 1 B24V Red 2 2 B24V Red 3 3 A5V Blue 1 4 C12V Yellow 4 6 GND Black 6 7 GND Black 7 10 GND Black 8

1

2

GND Black GND Black

3 4 1 2 14 5 6

9

7

A5V Red C12V Blue B24V Orange B24V Orange 6 -12V (E) White 7 GND Black 8 GND Black

7 1

1

2 3 4 5

9 10

Control drive board (reagent)

D12V Yellow

8

6

Control drive board (sample)

1

3

J1

B

Analog power supply conversion board

J8

MINDRAY

A

TITLE: DC Power Supply Conversion Board File

Bytes

Date

Time

DWG NO. SHEET 16 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

2

3

4

5-111

5

6

7

BS-800 17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

2

3

10

4

3 2

3 2 4 1

Rotation speed detection sensor tieline 009-000439-00

31 32

VCC Red 3 RMU_PHO White 2 GND Black 4 GND Green 1

3 2

29 30 31 32

J16 29 30 39 40

Wash temperature control board

6

7

8

10

1 3 2 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4

5

6

7

8

R1 level detection cable 009-000434-00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

9 10

J1

SGND Black

10

J2

1 2

GND Black 1 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2

3

LEVEL Green 4

6 7 9

4

Txd White

1

Rxd Brown

3

Shield

J12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

R2 level detection cable 009-000435-00

9 10

1 2

GND Black 1 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2

3

LEVEL Green 4

7

Txd White

1

Rxd Brown

3

Shield

3

9

4

5-112

5

J3

2

3

3 4

1

6

+12V Red

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J11 2

3

+12V Red

MINDRAY TITLE:

5-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board

DWG NO. SHEET17 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

B

3

10

Reagent mixer motor

R2 level sense board BX50-30-89635

Time

1

2

Bytes

Date

J8

1 2 4 5 6

J2

3

1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9

6 A+ Red 1 7 A- Yellow 2 8 B+ Orange 4 9 B- Brown 5

1

2

GND Black RAM Blue LLS Green ＋12V Red NC RXD White NC TXD Brown NC

5 Shild

Reagent mixer motor cable 009-000438-00

3

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

+ C Sample mixer - rotation speed E detection sensor

J3

File

J7

R2 level detection tieline 009-000417-00

9 10 A

10

3 Blue VCC 4 Black GND 1 Purple GND 2 Green PHO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2

J3

SGND Black

C

Sample mixer motor

1

Control drive board (reagent)

1 2 4 5

4

9 10

6 A+ Red 1 7 A- Yellow 2

8 B+ Orange 4 9 B- Brown 5

R1 level sense board BX50-30-89635

5

1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9

5 Shild

Sample mixer motor cable 009-000437-00

3

4

GND Black RAM Blue LLS Green ＋12V Red NC RXD White NC TXD Brown NC

+ Sample mixer C rotation speed E detection sensor

2

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3 Blue VCC 4 Black GND 1 Purple GND 2 Green PHO

J2

2

3

Shield

1

J2

1

R1 level detection tieline 009-000416-00

1

J6

4

1 3 2 4

J7

Txd White Rxd Brown

6

Wash temperature control board to reagent mixer motor tieline 009-000443-00

1 A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 3 B+ Orange 3 4 B- Brown 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J9

4

2

1

J4

4

39 40 C

B

5-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board

1

VCC Red RMU_PHO White GND Black GND Green

3 2

45 46 47 48

47 48

6 7

D

J5

2

J12 45 46

4

9

J10

1

1

1 A+ Red 1 2 A- Yellow 2 3 B+ Orange 3 4 B- Brown 4

3

+12V Red

3

Sample control drive board to sample mixer motor tieline 009-000428-00

LEVEL Green 4

J3

1

9 10

GND Black 1 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2

3

2

J19

Control drive board (sample)

SGND Black

8

1 2

1

10

6

7

3 2

9 10

5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4

8

4

Sample level sense board BX50-30-89636

6

7

2

3

3

5

1

8

Sample level detection cable 009-000436-00

J3

2

4

7

J2

2

3

6

1

D

1

5

4

J2

4

Sample level detection tieline 009-000424-00 1 GND Black 1 2 RAM Blue 3 3 LLS Green 2 4 ＋12V Red 4 5 NC 5 6 RXD White 6 7 NC 7 8 TXD Brown 8 9 NC 9

1

1

6

7

BS-800 17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

D

D

Power switch input cable ba40-20-61666

To enclosure Air pump AC switch input cable 009-000868-00 L Brown 1 3

E Yellow green Power socket

AC switch

1(Y) L Brown

1a

2(X) N Light blue

2a

1 2

N Light blue

J1

2

1

3

1

4

2

3

3

Air Pump Drive Board Air pump module to whole unit cable 009-000870-00 Inside

Enclosure

Red SIGN

3

Fan 2

1

Blue

4

Brown

C

N

2

L

Fan 1

J3

1

1 2

Outside

L

Air pump drive cable 009-000867-00

Internal probe Red GND 1

Enclosure Outside

N

1

4

Air pump input control cable 009-000439-00 2

J5

3

BS-800 rear panel BNC connector

Inside

Blue Brown

Fan drive cable 009-000866-00

J2

C

1 4

1

Blue

43

Brown

N L

Air pump

3

J4

B

B

MINDRAY

A

File

Bytes

Date

Time

Air Pump Drive Board

DWG NO.

BS-800

SHEET17 OF

Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1

TITLE:

2

3

4

5-113

5

6

7

17

REV 2.0 SIZE A3

A

5-114

6

Hydropneumatic System

6-1

6.1 Overview The Hydropneumatic system of the instrument includes the pneumatic part and hydraulic part. The major function of the pneumatic part is: To provide vacuum for the cuvette wash station, sampling unit and ISE unit. The major function of the hydraulic part is: •

To provide the whole unit with deionized water via the water supply unit.

•

To provide wash solution (water and detergent) for the cuvette wash station and probe units.

•

To discharge waste fluid produced during measurements via the drainage module.

This chapter describes the working principles and repairing methods of the Hydropneumatic system.

6-2

6.2 Hydropneumatic Diagram T011 I03

T010

T013

T253

V04

T251

COM

I02 T702

I05

T706

P12

T707

I06 T708

Graphic legend

T014

T012

Primary vacuum PRE01

ZQX20

I01

NO NC

T557 T518 T555 T516 T520 T522

T242

ISE module

R2

ZQZ42

T603 T602 T601

ZQZ43

V02

COM

D40

T222

T224

PRE04

T223

T226 D42

T227

CAN04 Buffer

D32

T228

250uL

T507

ZQZ41

D22

ZQZ40

T509

S

D43

T250 T240 T211 T221 M1001

T207

D04

SM2 RM1 RM2

SM1

S

R1

1 2 3

T514

T620

ZQZ12

High-conc secondary vacuum container CAN05

ZQZ11

T549

T506

T505

4 5 67 8

T610

Low-conc secondary vacuum container CAN06

W50

RU12

W10

W14

W11

D51

ZQZ08

ZQZ07

WQ42

T206

WQ43

T916

T918

T917

W51

W13 WQ53

RU06

W03 W02

ZQX10 W30

T205 WQ31

D23

WQ11

D33 D03

D44

OUT

OUT

T352

IN

ZQZ06

T274

ZQX12

WQ30 WQ20

D50

OUT

OUT T612

T611

OUTT624 ZQX16

T621 ZQX15

IN

W41

ZQX13

IN

M1002

W12 ZQX17

T401 T851 W31

D01

Cleaning fluid T502preheat 100WT503

J18 ZQZ01

W60

Wash solution preheat 100WZQZ38

WQ01

V06

ZX02 T403

T008 ZX13

J17

FIL02

T114

T413 ZX14

T414 ZX12 T007

T301

FIL03

T813

PRE06

ZX03

T009

T544

T004

T112

T412

P05

T005

J16

W60

J12

IN

CAN03

T111

P03

T640

IN

ZQZ34

W70

T821

CAN09

ZX11 T415 ZX10

FL09

J11

OU T

T873

T861

W73

T870

ZQX40

T871

ZQX51 ZQX50 ZQX44

T636 T635

Vacuum pump

OU T

IN

T642

T643

T644

T645

OUT

ZQX47

OUT

T647

FL06

W74

ZQZ31

ZQX37

FIL04

W71

Diluted wash solution tankT540

T874

T862

IN

ZQZ29

IN

OUT

Concentrated wash solution tank ZQZ30 T539

IN

P06

OUT

W72

OUT

ZQX48 ZQX49

T845

V27

P07

T877

Vacuum silencer

T878

Low-concentration waste

T844

FIL01

T875

T863

T876 W75

W62

W76

W63

T104

V01

T864

External water tank

Inlet

T867

T103 J02

Water quality check J06

IN

P10

T654 ZQX36

ZQX35 T655

T648

ZQX45

T641

ZQX46 T646

W61

FL05

IN

T652

T653

ZX14

CAN02 ZX10

T650 T651

ZQX43

Vacuum pump control

ZQX34

P08

T541 T411

ZQX42

Primary vacuum container

W70

T543

T866

High-concentration waste

ZQX33

T542

T865

ZQX31

T658 T841

T870

PRE08

T632

T546

T006

OUT

T003

J15

High-concentration waste level

T631

ZQZ32 T113

FL01

T120

T630

Low-conc waste T812 collector

T803

ZQZ35

ZQZ37

ZQZ33

J10

ZQX30

T625

CAN08

ZX13

OUT

IN

T860

W15

ZQZ36

M1003

Inlet filter, maintained by users

T002 T110 T001

T615

IN

T118 ` T201

J13

W56

T852

FL11

T545

T404

J20

T115

CAN07

T548

T547

T402

PRE05 T119

T121

W53

T853

ZQX21

500W

T279

J14

FL10 High-conc waste T831 collector

ZX01

T116

FL04

FIL05

T820

ZQX22

W55

W05

T280

CAN01

PRE07

Reaction carousel waste W54

OUT

DGS

T310 T330 T350 T340 T320 T302

Water tank

RU08

OUT T622

WQ10 T281 T283 T282

J19

T914

RU07

IN T623

ZQX23 T613

T614

ZQZ39

ZQX11

V25

WQ50

T117

P02

RU11

RU02

WQ51

T351

T332 WQ40

T331

IN

D07

T910 T911

Refrigeration unit

V26

T321

V11

T312

T341

T342

V10

T311

T322

V09

N O T272 NC T271

V08

T273

RU09

W20

V07

D02

V28

D53

P09

RU10 RU07

T843

V21

WQ41 T833

COM

OUT

T801

T912

T913

V22

IN

T202

D52

T275

WQ21

T832

M1004

T203

D54

T343

W04

W01

T501

T353

ZQX14

INW40

T842

T802

V24

IN

OUT

T919

T830

V23

V05

P04

T213

IN

T909

W53

T504 T840

T212

RU03

RU01

T811

T810 WQ52

RU05

W52

T915

R2

OUT

D06

T513

T256

T246

T229

T511

ZQZ10 ZQZ09

NO

Reagent compartment

T512

V19

T225

T510

T508

Small sample compartment

ZQX04 ZQX05 ZQX06 ZQX07 ZQX08

T604 T605 T606 T607 T608

T553

T552

V18

R1

D41

T550

V16

Clog detection

NC

T551

ISE waste

V17

ISE buffer T245

V14

T244 D20

V15

1mL

D21 D30

Refrigerant tube Vacuum tube

ZQX01 ZQX02 ZQX03

1 2 3 4 5 6 M1005 1 2 3 4 5 6 T554 T515 T519 T521 T556 T517

NO

T241

ZQZ44 ZQZ45 ZQZ13 ZQZ14 ZQZ15 ZQZ16

ISE vacuum

T255

1mL

V03

COM

T254

D31

Cleaning fluid tube Concentrated wash solution tube

T701

T252

T243

Diluted wash solution tube High-concentration waste tube Low-concentration waste tube

Deionized water tube

Pressure detection board

T015

NC

T704 T703 I04 M1004 T705

V29

Primary degasser PRE02 vacuum ISE vacuum

T106

T105

HV01

J05

J04

T108

T107

FIL01 T102

WQM1

6-3

J01

J03 T101

FL13 Water unit High-conc waste tank CAN10

Drain outlet

6.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System The Hydropneumatic system is composed of the sampling unit, cuvette wash station, water supply unit, waste unit, and ISE Hydropneumatic unit. See the figure below.

6.3.1 Sampling Unit The sampling unit consists of 1 sample probe, 2 reagent probes, 4 mixers, and 3 syringes. The sample syringe has a volume of 250μl and the 2 reagent syringes have a volume of 1ml. This unit is mainly used for fixed-quantity sampling and probe/mixer cleaning. •

Fixed-quantity sampling is realized through cooperation of the syringes, solenoid valves and probes with the aim of delivering fixed-quantity reagent and sample.

•

Probe/mixer cleaning, driven by fluidic pumps, is to clean the interior/exterior of the sample probe and reagent probes as well as the exterior of the mixers so as to eliminate carryover among chemistries.

•

To ensure accurate sampling, the deionized water used for cleaning the probe interior needs to be degassed, that is, to be produced by passing through a degasser.

The schematic diagram of the sampling unit is as shown below.

6-5

Primary degasser vacuum ISE vacuum PRE03

T253

NC T251

T252

NO

COM

Pressure detection board

T243

NC

COM

NO

T241

T242

T254

T255

1mL

Primary vacuum container R2

D31

1mL

D21 T244

D30

T245

D20

Clog detection

NC D41

PRE06

T225

T224

COM

D40

T228

250uL

PRE04

T222

D32

R1

D42 T227

T226

D22

T223

T210

NO

D43

S T250 T240 T208 T221

D08

SM1

SM2 RM1 RM2

T211

T256 M1001 T209

D04

T246

T229

T211 T207

S

R2

R1

W10

W14

W11 W13

OUT

D06

D05

T206

WQ33 WQ23 WQ12

T212 IN

T323

T810 WQ52

T811 WQ53

W03

T333

T205

T802 W01 WQ31 T204 T202

D03 M1004 T203

T353

T801 WQ41

WQ21

T501

D33

T343

W04

D51 D23

D44

WQ43

W02

WQ13 T313

IN

WQ32

WQ22

P04

T213 OUT

WQ42

WQ11

D54 T342

T322 COM OUT

T276

NO T272

T273 D02

T277

WQ51

T341

T312

T311

T352

T271

T331

WQ40 T332

T351

NC

P09

WQ50

D52 WQ30

IN T275

D50

T274

WQ20 ZQZ01

WQ10 T310 T330 T350 T304 T320 T340 T303 T302

M1002

T305

D07 D01

WQ01

J18 T116

T117

PRE05 J19 T119

FL04

J20 T115 J17

FIL02

Water Tank

T114

T118 `T201 T301 T401 M1003 T113

J13

CAN01

J16 Inlet filter, maintained by users

FL01 T112 J12 T110

OUT IN

J10

P03

T111 J11

Figure 6.1 Schematic diagram of sampling unit

6.3.2 Cuvette Wash Unit The cuvette wash unit is divided into dispense module and aspirate module, which cooperate with each other to clean the reaction cuvettes for 8 phases. Fluidic pumps are employed to provide diluted wash solution (alkaline) for phase 1 and 2 and deionized water for phase 3-6. No fluid is dispensed or aspirated during phase 7 and 8. An air pump is used to discharge the waste fluid and wipe the cuvettes after cleaning. High-concentration waste is generated during phase 1-3 and low-concentration waste during phase 4-8. Wipe blocks are provided to absorb the remaining wash solution inside cuvettes during phase 7 and 8. The cuvette wash unit makes reuse of cuvettes possible by means of repeated aspirate-dispense actions. The cuvette wash unit is composed of the following secondary units: •

Deionized water circulation unit 6-6

•

Cuvette wash unit

•

Predilution

•

Pneumatic unit

•

Preheating unit

The cuvette wash unit has the major aim of cleaning cuvettes. The deionized water and diluted wash solution used for cleaning cuvettes, coming from the deionized water circulation unit and auto predilution unit, are driven by the pneumatic unit and preheated by the preheating unit. The schematic diagram of the cuvette wash unit is as shown below.

Figure 6.2 Schematic diagram of cuvette wash unit

6.3.3 Water Supply Unit The water supply unit supplies water automatically for the instrument, checking water quality, and filtering the supplied water between the module itself and the internal water tank of the instrument. Moreover, the water supply unit is capable of checking fluid level and giving an alarm when the water tank contains insufficient water. Also the water supply unit allows manual cutting off water supplying in emergent situations. The water supply unit is composed of the following components: •

Water inlet filters: inside and outside the instrument

•

Inlet valve

•

Ball valve

•

Water quality detection device

•

Internal water tank

•

Level sense device

•

Tubes and connectors 6-7

6.3.4 Waste Unit The waste unit is capable of: Collecting all high-/low-concentration waste into corresponding containers and then discharging them off via a waste pump. Discharging high-/low-concentration waste separately. Detecting fluid level inside the high-concentration waste tank. All waste containers are equipped with an overflow alarm device. The waste unit consists of the following components: •

High-concentration waste collector

•

Low-concentration waste collector

•

Waste pump

•

External high-concentration waste tank

•

Level sense device

•

Tubes and connectors

The secondary vacuum container used for cuvette cleaning is one part of the waste unit, because it is responsible for absorbing waste fluid from cuvettes during each wash period and then discharging it to corresponding high-/low-concentration waste collectors. High-concentration waste includes the waste produced during cuvette cleaning in phase 1-3 and the waste fluid of ISE measurements. Low-concentration waste mainly comes from the following sources: •

Cleaning interior/exterior of sample probe and reagent probes

•

Mixer cleaning

•

Auto cuvette cleaning in phase 4-8

•

Condensate water of the reagent carousel

•

Condensate water of the sample carousel (STAT sample positions)

•

Overflowed fluid of the reaction carousel

The first three are the major sources and account for over 99% of low-concentration waste. The schematic diagram of the cuvette wash unit is as shown below.

6-8

ISE measurements waste

1 2 3

4 567 8

T610

T620

Low-conc Waste

High-conc Waste

CAN06

CAN05

Mixer wash waste T840 T830

W40

ZQX10 W30

Probe wash waste

V22

IN OUT

V21 W20

ZQX14

IN

OUT

V25

ZQX12

V23

OUT

T624

OUT

Reaction carousel waste W54

W41

W12 W31

W55

FL10 T820

W53 W56

T852

T853

T831

Strong

Small sample compartment waste

ZQX17

T851 W05

Reagent compartment condensate water

T622 IN

ZQX13

IN

T614

T621

V24

IN T623 ZQX15

T612

T611

T613

V26

ZQX16 OUT IN ZQX11

OUT

T615

T625

ZQX30

T630

T631

CAN07

High-concentration waste level FL11

T813

T860

T63 2

T812

Weak ZQX21

ZQX31

W15 CAN08 T841

T870

ZQX33 I N

T65 0

T65 1

CAN09

T65 OU3 T ZQX35T65 5

T87 1

W74

W64 T636

T65 4OUT

ZQX36

IN T874

T862

IN

V27

T877

T878

Low-concentration waste W77

OUT

P07 OUT

OUT

W62

I T65N 2

ZQX37

W71

W61

ZQX34

P08

T873 W73

T863

High-concentration waste

Main Vacuum

W70

W60

IN

T866

ZQX40

T803

T861

T865

T875

W72 T876

W75

W76 FL13

H. conc waste tank

Drain outlet

W63

CAN10

Figure 6.3 Schematic diagram of waste unit

6.3.5 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit The ISE Hydropneumatic unit is capable of: •

Pipetting sample via a sample probe.

•

Providing negative pressure for degassing of the ISE module.

•

Monitoring pressure.

•

Controlling pressure.

•

Giving an alarm for overpressure or low pressure.

•

The waste fluid produced by the ISE module is of high concentration.

This unit does not include the Hydropneumatic system that has been integrated with the ISE module. The schematic diagram of the ISE Hydropneumatic unit is as shown below.

6-9

I03

I04

V29

Pressure detection board

I02

ISE vacuum PRE02

I05

I06

P12

I07

M1004

I01

ISE Vacuum

ISE module

ISE Buffer

ISE Waste

Buffer

Figure 6.4 Schematic diagram of ISE Hydropneumatic unit

6.3.6 Other The Hydropneumatic system of the instrument contains six external interfaces, as shown in the figure below. Where, •

Two fluidic outlets: used for discharging high-/low-concentration waste.

•

One fluidic inlet: used for supplying deionized water.

•

One pneumatic outlet: used for connecting the external air pump.

•

Two control cable connectors: used for connecting the external vacuum pump and high-concentration waste level sense device.

Fluidic interfaces No. Name 1 Low-conc waste outlet 3 High-conc waste outlet 4 High-conc waste sensor 6 DI water inlet 7 Vacuum pump interface 8 Vacuum pump control interface

Legend

Std

Optional

Waste

Vacuum

Waste pump provided Vacuum pump for selection High-conc waste tank provided

3

4

7

8

1

6

Water

Sensor

Figure 6.5 External fluidic interfaces of the instrument

6-10

6.4 Removing Components

and

Installation

of

Hydropneumatic

This section describes removing and installation methods of the Hydropneumatic components, and provides schematic diagrams and pictures of components for service engineers to refer.

6.4.1 Overview When an alarm is displayed on the operating software, service engineers can analyze the instrument status and finally locate the failure source, and if necessary, replace the failed part or component. Generally, service engineers are not recommended to remove the electric devices, such as pumps, solenoid valves, clog detection device, syringes, etc. Only when both hardware and software are confirmed normal but the Hydropneumatic alarm still remains are service engineers suggested to remove the relevant device and then analyze or replace it. Prior to removing Hydropneumatic components, make sure that all pumps and solenoid valves of the Hydropneumatic system have been turned off, and both the analyzing unit power switch and main power switch have been placed to the OFF position. Table 6.1 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components

Name

Requirement

Qty

Cross head screwdriver

/

1

Socket screwdriver

/

1

Flathead screwdriver

/

1

Cable strap

/

Several

Diagonal pliers

/

1

Tube cutter

/

1

head

6-11

6.4.2 Sampling Unit

(a) Front view

(b) Right rear view Figure 6.6 Assembly drawing of whole unit – Sampling unit

No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Syringe 250μl

801-3101-00001-00

2

Syringe 1ml

801-BA80-00047-00

6-12

Remarks

No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

gauge (with

Remarks

3

Pressure assembly connector)

801-BA80-00077-00

4

Degasser assembly

801-BA80-00084-00

5

Degassing solenoid valve assembly

801-BA80-00155-00

6

Degassing vacuum pump assembly

801-BA80-00081-00

7

Interior wash assembly

pump

801-BA80-00080-00

8

Clog detection Y piece assembly

801-BA40-00139-00 801-BX50-00088-00

9

Interior wash valve assembly

return

801-BA80-00089-00

10

Interior wash solenoid valve assembly

801-BA80-00088-00

6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit

Figure 6.7 Assembly drawing of whole unit (rear view) – Cuvette wash unit

No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Auto wash solenoid valve assembly (with connector)

801-BA80-00086-00

2

Wash solenoid valve assembly

/

3

Concentrated wash solution pump

801-BA80-00096-00

6-13

Remarks

No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

4

Whole unit preheating assembly (220V)

801-BA80-00003-00

5

Deionized water circulating pump

801-BA80-00095-00

6

Diluted wash solution pump

801-BA80-00097-00

7

Refrigeration PD-E051IT3

circulating

pump

Remarks

801-BA80-00154-00

Figure 6.8 Auto wash tubes connection diagram

No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Adapter tube (1.5mm-3mm) (Mould MR13339)

801-BA80-00123-00

2

8-phase wash probe assembly

801-BA80-00038-00

Remarks

Removing/Installing wash probe assembly When to Do When fluid overflows the cuvettes or the dispensed cleaning fluid is less than the normal volume, probably a wash probe is clogged and needs to be removed and unclogged. Removing steps •

Manually loosen the retaining screws on the wash probe bracket.

•

Remove the wash probe assembly and place it in a container.

•

Turn on the dispense valves and vacuum valves, and then locate the clogged wash probe.

•

Use a needle to unclog the probe. 6-14

Installation steps •

Align the locating holes on the wash probe assembly with the stop studs on the bracket, and then slightly tighten the retaining screws.

•

Lower the wash probe assembly, use an alignment tool or eyes to check the phase 7/8 wipe blocks corresponding to the cuvette wall, and then slightly adjust the wash probe assembly to prevent the wash probes from colliding with the cuvettes.

•

After finishing the second step, completely tighten the retaining screws on the wash probe assembly.

NOTE Operate carefully to prevent liquid from dropping into the reaction carousel and cuvettes.

Removing/Installing a pump When to Do •

The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.

•

The pump flow and pressure is low.

•

The pump has leaks.

•

Noise is produced when the pump is working.

Removing steps •

Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.

•

Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from being confused.

•

Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings to prevent liquid from dropping entering the instrument.

•

Loosen the screws fixing the pump and then remove the pump.

Installation steps •

Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube clamps.

•

Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.

•

Make sure that the power cord of the DC pump is connected correctly.

•

In the case of an AC pump, ensure that the grounding wire has been connected with the instrument frame.

NOTE Exercise caution to avoid confusing the gas tube with the fluidic tube, and the inlet tube with the outlet tube. In the case of a DC pump, make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct positive and negative ends; in the case of an AC pump, ensure that the grounding wire has been connected correctly.

6-15

Reagent refrigeration circulating pump

DI water circulating pump

Diluted wash solution pump

Concentrated wash solution pump

Figure 6.9 Details of pump FRUs

Removing/Installing solenoid valve When to Do When a solenoid valve cannot be turned on or has leaks, it needs to be removed and then analyzed or replaced. Removing steps •

Disconnect the solenoid valve’s power cord connector.

•

Mark the installation direction of the valve and the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes to prevent them from being confused.

•

Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings to prevent liquid spraying.

•

Loosen the screws fixing the solenoid valve and then remove the solenoid valve.

Installation steps •

Check the installation direction according to the marks, connect the inlet and outlet tubes, and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.

•

Tighten the retaining screws to fix the solenoid valve.

•

Make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct positive and negative ends.

•

If the solenoid valve has a grounding wire, check if the grounding wire has been connected with the instrument frame.

6-16

Auto wash solenoid valve assembly (with connector)

Figure 6.10 Details of auto wash solenoid valve assembly (with connector) FRUs

Wash solenoid valve assembly

Figure 6.11 Details of wash solenoid valve assembly

Locations of the whole unit wash preheating assembly and cuvette wash preheating assembly on the instrument are shown in the figure below. No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Whole unit preheating assembly (220V)

801-BA80-00003-00

2

Cuvette wash preheating assembly (220V)

801-BA80-00002-00

6-17

Remarks

Cuvette wash preheat assembly

Whole unit wash preheat assembly

Figure 6.12 Locations of cuvette wash preheating assembly and whole unit wash preheating assembly

Removing/Installing cuvette wash preheating assembly When to Do •

The heater is damaged.

•

The temperature sensor is damaged.

•

The temperature protection switch is damaged.

•

The canister has leaks.

•

The connectors are leaking.

Removing steps •

Switch off the power supply of the instrument.

•

Remove the rear panel.

•

Mark the connection modes of the following parts: inlet/outlet tubes, heater, temperature protection switch and temperature sensor for wash solution, and inlet/outlet tubes, heater, temperature protection switch and temperature sensor for deionized water.

•

Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.

•

Loosen the grounding screws.

•

Loosen the two hexagon socket head screws fixing the cuvette wash preheating assembly.

•

Apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.

•

Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes.

Installation steps •

Prepare a new cuvette wash preheating assembly.

•

Connect the tubes according to the marks.

•

Use hexagon socket head screws to fix the preheating assembly.

•

Connect the connectors according to the marks.

•

Install the grounding wire. 6-18

•

Check if the preheating assembly is complete.

•

Restore the instrument.

NOTE Operate carefully to prevent liquid from entering the instrument. Connect the tubes and connectors correctly. Exercise caution to distinguish the 110V preheating assembly with the 220V preheating assembly.

Figure 6.13 Structure of cuvette wash preheating assembly

Removing/Installing whole unit wash preheating assembly When to Do •

The heater is damaged.

•

The temperature sensor is damaged.

•

The temperature protection switch is damaged.

•

The canister has leaks.

•

The connectors are leaking.

Removing steps •

Switch off the power supply of the instrument.

•

Remove the rear panel.

•

Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.

•

Loosen the grounding screws.

•

Loosen the three screws fixing the whole unit preheating assembly.

•

Apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.

•

Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes.

Installation steps •

Prepare a new preheating assembly.

•

Connect the tubes.

•

Fix the preheating assembly.

•

Connect the connectors.

•

Install the grounding wire. 6-19

•

Check if the preheating assembly is complete.

•

Restore the instrument.

NOTE Operate carefully to prevent liquid from entering the instrument. Connect the tubes and connectors correctly. Exercise caution to distinguish the 110V preheating assembly with the 220V preheating assembly. Heater/ Sensor Protection switch

Outlet

Inlet

Figure 6.14 Structure of whole unit wash preheating assembly

6.4.4 Water Supply Unit

(a) Front view

6-20

(b) Right rear view Figure 6.15 Assembly drawing of whole unit –Water supply unit

No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Water tank fluid level sensor assembly

801-BA80-00012-00

2

Water tank assembly

801-BA80-00011-00

3

Deionized water filter assembly

801-BA80-00019-00

4

Concentrated wash sensor assembly

solution

801-BA80-00018-00

5

Diluted wash solution fluid level sensor assembly

801-BA80-00017-00

6

Diluted wash assembly

801-BA80-00015-00

7

MR buffer solution

/

8

Ball valve assembly (with bracket)

801-BA80-00079-00

9

Inlet solenoid valve assembly

801-BA80-00094-00

solution

tank

Remarks

Removing/Installing water tank When to Do

The water tank should be maintained regularly. Removing steps •

Turn off the ball valve.

•

Find the floater cable connector on the front panel of the instrument and then unplug it. Remove the floater and keep it properly to prevent damage.

•

Disconnect the CPC quick connector at the bottom of the water tank, slightly pull out the water tank, and then remove the tube from it.

•

Apply straps on the tube’s opening or place the tube in a container to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.

6-21

•

Remove the water tank from the instrument and then clean it.

Installation steps •

Connect the floater to the water tank.

•

Insert the tube into the bottom of the water tank and adjust the tube to prevent tangling.

•

Plug the floater connector into the front panel of the instrument.

•

Connect the CPC quick connector with the water tank.

•

Turn on the ball valve.

The deionized water filter assembly (115-005402-00) also includes the following two FRUs. No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Stainless steel filter core

801-BA80-00020-00

2

Washer, O-shaped, 28*3.55, ternary ethylenepropylene rubber, A70, black

801-BA80-00021-00

Remarks

Removing/Installing deionized water filter When to Do

The deionized water filter should be maintained regularly. Removing steps •

Turn off the ball valve.

•

Disconnect the CPC quick connectors and then take out the filter.

•

Open the filter, and then clean it or replace the filter core.

Note: While removing the filter, exercise caution to prevent getting injured by the filter bracket and prevent liquid inside the filter from spraying out. Installation steps •

Install the filter.

•

Fix the filter on the bracket according to the direction indicates on the instrument panel.

•

Connect the CPC quick connectors at the top and bottom of the filter.

•

Turn on the ball valve.

The deionized water tube assembly (115-005412-00) contains another FRU as described in the table below. No. 1

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU) Water tank filter assembly

6-22

FRU Code 801-BA80-00087-00

Remarks

1 2 3 4

Figure 6.16 Water supply module

The external water supply module contains the following FRUs. No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Pressure switch PS41-30-4MNB-B-SP-V-10A-FS2.2BARR

801-BA80-00145-00

2

Washer, O-shaped, 84*4, silicon gel, A65 semi-transparent, filter shell accessory

801-BA80-00161-00

3

Buffer tank assembly for water supply module

801-BA80-00144-00

4

External water inlet filter for whole unit

801-BA80-00170-00

6.4.5 Waste Unit 1 2

3 Reagent refrigeration board

4 5 6 7 8 9

10

Figure 6.17 Assembly drawing of whole unit (rear view) – Waste unit

6-23

Remarks

No. 1

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

Low-concentration secondary vacuum container assembly

waste

2

High-concentration secondary vacuum container assembly

waste

3

Secondary vacuum suction valve assembly

801-BA80-00085-00

4

Primary vacuum container assembly

801-BA80-00013-00

5

Secondary vacuum release valve assembly

801-BA80-00152-00

6

Waste discharge assembly

valve

801-BA80-00004-00

7

Low-concentration container assembly

waste

801-BA80-00111-00

8

High-concentration container assembly

waste

801-BA80-00110-00

9

Vacuum pump assembly

801-BA80-00082-00

10

Waste pump assembly

801-BA80-00083-00

Remarks

801-BA80-00113-00

801-BA80-00112-00

Secondary vacuum suction valve assembly

Secondary vacuum release valve assembly

Waste discharge valve assembly

Figure 6.18 Details of waste unit solenoid valve assembly

Removing/Installing primary/secondary vacuum containers When to Do

When the containers have leaks or need to be maintained regularly. Removing steps

6-24

•

Confirm and record all tubes connected with the container, and distinguish the inlet tube from the outlet tube.

•

Remove the tubes, and then apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid inside the tubes from spraying out.

•

Use a screwdriver to remove the container.

•

Replace or maintain the container.

Installation steps •

Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the recorded connection mode, and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.

•

Fix the container on the instrument.

•

When the instrument will be used at an altitude greater than 2000m, an external air pump module is required to ensure the cuvette wash effects. The external air pump assembly is as shown below.

Gas interface Gas control interface

Power switch Power socket

Silencing filter

Figure 6.19 External air pump 6-25

The external high-concentration waste tank assembly (115-005661-00) contains a FRU. No. 1

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

External high-concentration waste sensor assembly

801-BA80-00114-00

Remarks

6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit

1 2

(a) Right view

(b) Front view Figure 6.20 Assembly drawing of whole unit (right view) – ISE Hydropneumatic unit

6-26

No.

Name (Field Replaceable Unit, FRU)

FRU Code

1

Rotational diaphragm pump assembly

801-BA34-00001-00

2

ISE degassing solenoid valve

801-BA40-00214-00

3

Degassing membrane (FRU)

801-BA80-00213-00

4

ISE level detection sensor (FRU)

801-BA80-00212-00

6-27

Remarks

6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials 6.5.1 Pumps No.

Name

Product Number

P03

Deionized water circulating pump

801-BA80-00095-00

P04

Degassed booster pump

water

801-BA80-00080-00

P05

Concentrated solution pump

wash

801-BA80-00096-00

P06

Diluted wash solution pump

801-BA80-00097-00

P07

Waste pump

801-BA80-00083-00

P08

Cuvette wash vacuum pump

801-BA80-00082-00

P09

Degassing pump

801-BA80-00081-00

P10

(Optional) external air pump

115-006146-00 (domestic) 115-006144-00 (220V for overseas) 115-006296-00 (110V for overseas)

P11

(Optional) external water supply module

115-006145-00 (domestic) 115-006142-00 (overseas)

P12

ISE degasser pump

801-BA34-00001-00

vacuum

6.5.2 Solenoid Valves No.

Name

Product Number

V01

Water inlet valve

801-BA80-00094-00

V02

Sample probe interior wash valve

801-BA80-00088-00

V03

Probe R1 wash valve

interior

801-BA80-00088-00

V04

Probe R2 wash valve

interior

801-BA80-00088-00

V05

Interior wash return valve

801-BA80-00089-00

V06

Dilution valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V07

Sample probe exterior wash valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V08

Probe R1 wash valve

801-BA40-00214-00

exterior

6-28

No.

Name

Product Number

V09

Probe R2 wash valve

exterior

801-BA40-00214-00

V10

Sample mixer 1 wash valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V11

Reagent mixer 1 wash valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V14

Cuvette wash phase-1 dispense valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V15

Cuvette wash phase-2 dispense valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V16

Cuvette wash phase-3 dispense valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V17

Cuvette wash phase-4 dispense valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V18

Cuvette wash phase-5 dispense valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V19

Cuvette wash phase-6 dispense valve

801-BA40-00214-00

V21

High-concentration waste discharge valve

801-BA80-00004-00

V22

Low-concentration waste discharge valve

801-BA80-00004-00

V23

High-concentration waste suction valve

801-BA80-00085-00

V24

Low-concentration waste suction valve

801-BA80-00085-00

V25

High-concentration waste vacuum release valve

801-BA80-00152-00

V26

Low-concentration waste vacuum release valve

801-BA80-00152-00

V27

Vacuum container waste discharge valve

801-BA80-00004-00

V29

ISE degassing vacuum valve

801-BA40-00214-00

6.5.3 Connectors ID

Product Number

T006 T007 T008

049-000213-00

T009 T105

043-000492-00

ID

Product Number

ID

Product Number

T322

082-000317-00

T610

082-000342-00

T331

082-000317-00

T620

082-000342-00

T332

082-000317-00

T830

043-000492-00

T341

082-000317-00

T840

043-000492-00

T342

082-000317-00

T611

082-000345-00

6-29

ID

Product Number

ID

Product Number

ID

Product Number

T106

043-000492-00

T351

082-000317-00

T621

082-000345-00

T107

043-000492-00

T352

082-000317-00

T613

082-000344-00

T108

043-000492-00

T401

M90-100073---

T623

082-000344-00

T120

M6Q-030067---

T402

T614

M6Q-030015---

T121

M6Q-030067---

T403

M6Q-030061--082-000317-00

T624

M6Q-030015---

T110

082-000306-00

T404

082-000317-00

T612

082-000346-00

T003

082-000307-00

T547

T622

082-000346-00

T111

041-001371-00

T548

082-000317-00 082-000317-00

T615

082-000342-00

T112

082-000342-00

T631

082-000342-00

T005

082-000307-00

M6Q-030065--082-000319-00 Conical seal

T625

T004

041-001371-00 082-000307-00

T630

M6Q-030102---

T113

043-000492-00

T301

M90-100073---

T201

M90-100073---

T118

T411 T538 T539 T541

082-000503-00 082-000307-00 M6Q-030101---

T820

043-000492-00

T831

043-000492-00

T860

043-000492-00

082-000343-00

T542

082-000308-00

T853

043-000492-00

T114

043-000492-00

T543

082-000308-00

T852

043-000492-00

T115

/

T544

M6Q-030061---

T813

043-000492-00

T116

/

T545

M6Q-030043---

T812

043-000492-00

T117

043-000492-00

T801

M6Q-030101---

T803

043-000492-00

T122

043-000492-00

T802

M6Q-030096---

T841

043-000492-00

T123

M6Q-030064---

T810

M6Q-030096---

T870

043-000492-00

T279

041-002376-00

T811

M6Q-030096---

T820

M6Q-030067---

T271

M6Q-030015---

T343

M6Q-030043---

T821

M6Q-030067---

T273

M6Q-030015---

T353

M6Q-030043---

T848

M6Q-030067---

T274

082-000343-00

T010

M6Q-030059---

T849

M6Q-030067---

T275

082-000343-00

T011

M6Q-030059---

T850

M6Q-030101---

T202

043-000660-00

T012

M6Q-030059---

T870

M6Q-030101---

T203

M90-100073---

T701

M6Q-030068---

T871

043-000492-00

T501

082-000317-00

T702

M6Q-030109---

T861

082-000308-00

T502

082-000317-00

T703

M6Q-030109---

T873

082-000308-00

T503

082-000317-00

T704

082-000115-00

T864

082-000308-00

T205

082-000311-00

T705

082-000115-00

T876

082-000308-00

T206

082-000311-00

T706

082-000317-00

T862

041-001369-00

T207

082-000311-00

T555

T863

041-001369-00

T874

041-001369-00

T875

041-001369-00

T651

M6Q-030102---

T652

M6Q-030102---

T653

M6Q-030102---

T221 T240 T250 T211 T212

M6Q-030065--082-000319-00 Conical seal M6Q-030065---

T557 T516 T518 T520 T522 6-30

M6Q-030065--M6Q-120021--Conical seal

ID

Product Number

ID

Product Number

ID

Product Number

T554

082-000317-00

T654

M6Q-030102---

T213

082-000319-00 Conical seal

T556

082-000317-00

T655

M6Q-030064---

T210

M6Q-030015---

T515

082-000317-00

T650

M6Q-030064---

T222

M6Q-030065--082-000319-00 Conical seal

T517

082-000317-00

T658

082-000340-00

T519

082-000317-00

T632

M6Q-030080---

T521

082-000317-00

T103

042-001262-00

T550

082-000317-00

T104

042-001262-00

T551

082-000317-00

T877

042-002313-00

T552

082-000317-00

T635

082-000341-00

T553

082-000317-00

T865

042-002313-00

T507

082-000317-00

T867

BA40-20-61345

T508

082-000317-00

T915

M6Q-030067---

T509

082-000317-00

T916

M6Q-030067---

T510

082-000317-00

T918

M6Q-030067---

T511

082-000317-00

T919

M6Q-030067---

T512

082-000317-00

T917

043-000492-00

T513

082-000317-00

T913

043-000492-00

T514

082-000317-00

T851

043-000492-00

T504

M6Q-030043---

T912

041-001371-00

T505

M6Q-030043---

T911

041-001371-00

T506

M6Q-030043---

T909

082-000308-00

T549

M6Q-030043---

T910

082-000308-00

T241 T251 T223

T242 T252 T224

T243 T253 T225 T226 T227

T228

0040-10-32304 0040-10-32305 Conical seal M6Q-030065--M6Q-120021--Conical seal M6Q-030065--M6Q-120021--Conical seal M6Q-030065--082-000319-00 Conical seal M6Q-030065--M6Q-120021--Conical seal 0040-10-32304 0040-10-32305 Conical seal

T244

T601

T350

082-000317-00

M6Q-030065--082-000319-00 Conical seal

T602

T320

082-000317-00

T330

082-000317-00

T340

082-000317-00

T229

BA30-20-06758

T605

T311

082-000317-00

T246

082-000318-00

T606

T312

082-000317-00

T256

082-000318-00

T607

T321

082-000317-00

T310

082-000317-00

T608

T245 T254 T255

T603 T604

6-31

M6Q-030065--M6Q-120021--Conical seal

6.5.4 Tubes No.

Tube ID

Product Number

No.

Tube ID

Product Number

No.

Tube ID

Product Number

1

J01

M6G-020028---

59

ZX03

082-000314-00

117

ZQX16

082-000427-00

2

J02

M6G-020028---

60

ZX10

082-000316-00

118

ZQX17

082-000427-00

3

J03

082-000313-00

61

ZX11

082-000316-00

119

ZQX18

M6G-020026---

4

J04

082-000313-00

62

ZX12

082-000316-00

120

ZQX19

M6G-020026---

5

J05

082-000356-00

63

ZQZ01

082-000314-00

121

ZQX20

M6G-020026---

6

J10

082-000356-00

64

ZQZ06

082-000314-00

122

ZQX21

M6G-020026---

7

J11

082-000356-00

65

ZQZ07

082-000314-00

123

ZQX22

M6G-020026---

8

J12

082-000315-00

66

ZQZ08

082-000314-00

124

ZQX30

082-000427-00

9

J13

082-000315-00

67

ZQZ09

082-000314-00

125

ZQX31

082-000427-00

10

J14

082-000356-00

68

ZQZ10

082-000314-00

126

ZQX32

M6G-020026---

11

J15

082-000356-00

69

ZQZ11

082-000314-00

127

ZQX33

M6G-020026---

12

J16

082-000356-00

70

ZQZ12

082-000314-00

128

ZQX34

M6G-020026---

13

J17

082-000356-00

71

ZQZ13

082-000314-00

129

ZQX35

M6G-020026---

14

J18

082-000356-00

72

ZQZ14

082-000314-00

130

ZQX36

M6G-020026---

15

J19

082-000356-00

73

ZQZ15

082-000314-00

131

ZQX37

M6G-020026---

16

J20

M6G-020026---

74

ZQZ16

082-000314-00

132

ZQX40

082-000427-00

17

D01

082-000357-00

75

ZQZ17

M6G-020049---

133

ZQX42

082-000427-00

18

D02

M6G-020047---

76

ZQZ18

M6G-020049---

134

W01

082-000305-00

19

D03

M6G-020047---

77

ZQZ19

M6G-020049---

135

W02

082-000305-00

20

D04

082-000312-00

78

ZQZ20

M6G-020049---

136

W03

082-000305-00

21

D05

082-000312-00

79

ZQZ29

082-000356-00

137

W04

082-000305-00

22

D06

082-000316-00

80

ZQZ30

082-000356-00

138

W05

082-000305-00

23

D07

082-000316-00

81

ZQZ31

082-000356-00

139

W10

082-000305-00

24

D20

082-000316-00

82

ZQZ32

082-000356-00

140

W11

082-000305-00

25

D21

082-000316-00

83

ZQZ33

082-000357-00

141

W12

082-000305-00

26

D22

082-000316-00

84

ZQZ34

082-000356-00

142

W13

082-000305-00

27

D23

M6G-020049---

85

ZQZ35

082-000357-00

143

W14

082-000305-00

6-32

No.

Tube ID

Product Number

No.

Tube ID

Product Number

No.

Tube ID

Product Number

28

D30

082-000316-00

86

ZQZ36

082-000314-00

144

W15

082-000305-00

29

D31

082-000316-00

87

ZQZ37

M6G-020026---

145

W20

082-000305-00

30

D32

082-000316-00

88

ZQZ38

082-000314-00

146

W21

082-000305-00

31

D33

M6G-020049---

89

ZQZ39

082-000314-00

147

W30

082-000305-00

32

D40

082-000316-00

90

ZQZ40

082-000314-00

148

W31

082-000305-00

33

D41

M6G-020049---

91

ZQZ41

082-000314-00

149

W40

082-000305-00

34

D42

M6G-020049---

92

ZQZ42

082-000314-00

150

W41

082-000305-00

35

D43

0040-10-32301

93

ZQZ43

082-000314-00

151

W50

082-000305-00

36

D44

M90-000026---

94

ZQZ44

M6G-020049---

152

W51

082-000305-00

37

D50

M6G-020026---

95

ZQZ45

M6G-020049---

153

W52

082-000305-00

38

D51

M6G-020026---

96

I01

M6G-020046---

154

W53

082-000305-00

39

D52

M6G-020026---

97

I02

M6G-020026---

155

W54

082-000305-00

40

D53

M6G-020026---

98

I03

M6G-020026---

156

W55

082-000305-00

41

D54

M6G-020026---

99

I04

M6G-020026---

157

W56

082-000305-00

42

WQ01

082-000357-00

100

I05

M6G-020009---

158

W57

082-000305-00

43

WQ10

082-000314-00

101

I06

082-000314-00

159

W60

082-000305-00

44

WQ11

082-000314-00

102

I07

082-000314-00

160

W61

082-000357-00

45

WQ20

082-000314-00

103

ZQX01

M6G-020049---

161

W62

082-000357-00

46

WQ21

082-000314-00

104

ZQX02

M6G-020049---

162

W63

082-000305-00

47

WQ30

082-000314-00

105

ZQX03

M6G-020049---

163

W64

M6G-020028---

48

WQ31

082-000314-00

106

ZQX04

M6G-020049---

164

W70

082-000305-00

49

WQ40

082-000314-00

107

ZQX05

M6G-020049---

165

W71

082-000305-00

50

WQ41

082-000314-00

108

ZQX06

M6G-020049---

166

W72

082-000305-00

51

WQ42

082-000314-00

109

ZQX07

M6G-020049---

167

W73

082-000305-00

52

WQ43

082-000314-00

110

ZQX08

M6G-020049---

168

W74

082-000305-00

53

WQ50

082-000314-00

111

ZQX10

082-000427-00

169

W75

082-000357-00

54

WQ51

082-000314-00

112

ZQX11

082-000427-00

170

W76

082-000357-00

55

WQ52

082-000314-00

113

ZQX12

082-000427-00

171

W77

082-000305-00

6-33

No.

Tube ID

Product Number

No.

Tube ID

Product Number

56

WQ53

082-000314-00

114

ZQX13

082-000427-00

57

ZX01

082-000357-00

115

ZQX14

082-000427-00

58

ZX02

082-000314-00

116

ZQX15

082-000427-00

6-34

No. 172

Tube ID W78

Product Number M6G-020028---

7

Alignment and Maintenance

7-1

7.1 Basic Operations 7.1.1 Overview Screen description Alignment can be performed by selecting Utility -> Maintenance -> Commands. See the figure below.

1 Maintenance: to perform daily maintenance for the instrument. 2 Diagnostics: to diagnose the sample system, reagent system, reaction system, Hydropneumatic system and ISE system. 3 Alignment: to align the whole unit from various aspects, among which position, Pyrology and Hydropneumatics are most-frequently used. The Alignment window provides alignment options for the following units: photoelectric unit, reaction unit, sample carousel, reagent carousel, probe R1 unit, probe R2 unit, sample probe unit, sample mixer unit, reagent mixer unit, cuvette wash station, bar code unit, Hydropneumatic unit, and Pyrology unit.

7-2

7-3

7.2 Alignment Procedure NOTE 1) Before starting alignment, ensure that the moving parts can move normally without being blocked by any objects and the cables are connected correctly. 2) Every alignment procedure must be finished; otherwise, the updated parameters cannot be saved. 3) Perform alignment according to the instructions displayed on the software screen. 4) If you perform the alignment without using an alignment tool, make sure that the probes and mixers are aligned with the center of the corresponding cuvettes; the cuvette wash station is adjusted with its wipe blocks located at the center of corresponding cuvettes; the reagent probes R1/R2 are at the center of the reagent bottle opening; and the sample probe is at the center of a sample cup or Microtube. The basic alignment commands of each smart module are summarized on the corresponding tab page and described in the following sections.

7.2.1 Photoelectric Unit

The photometric unit contains the following alignment commands: 1. Light intensity adjustment, 2. Photoelectricity collection position adjustment, and 3. Photoelectric gain adjustment. Choose the desired alignment command, and then operate as instructed by the operating software.

Light intensity adjustment The Light Intensity Adjustment command is used to adjust the light intensity. Select 6 Index Setup to display the following window.

7-4

Photoelectric collection position adjustment The Photoelectric Collection Position Adjustment is used to adjust the photoelectric collection positions and the photoelectric collection curves for each channel. AD collection starting signal, middle of flat area

Flat area of all channels should be normal.

1. Select Start, and then operate according to the instructions displayed on the software screen. 2. When the lamp has been turned for over 10 minutes, select OK. 3. Adjust the reaction carousel position sensor till the photoelectric collection 7-5

position is in the middle of the flat area and the curves for each channel are almost level. The left direction is clockwise and the right direction is counterclockwise.

Reaction carousel position sensor

Photoelectric gain adjustment The Photoelectric Gain Adjustment command is used to check if the water blank value and dark current exceed the indices.

1

Select 3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.

2

Operate according to the instructions displayed on the software screen.

3

Check if the photoelectric gain is greater than 65 for 340nm, 30 for 380nm, and 20 for other channels. Check if the water blank AD value is within 47000-50000, and the dark current is less than 200.

4

If the water blank value exceeds 50000, decrease the target voltage by 0.1V for every excessive 1000, and then readjust the light intensity and photoelectric gain.

7.2.2 Reaction Carousel Unit Only the Reaction Carousel Rotary procedure is performed based on the whole unit.

7-6

Reaction carousel rotary 1. Select 2 Reaction Carousel Rotary on the Reaction Unit tab page. 2. Place a cuvette alignment tool in the sample dispense position and diluting position as well as dispense positions of probes R1/R2. When setting the cuvette alignment tool, please note that the longer side should be taken as the alignment direction, and an alignment tool should be laid in the sample dispense position and diluting position as well as dispense positions of probes R1/R2. 3. Manually rotate the sample probe and reagent probes 1/2 to make them go to the center of the alignment tool. If they failed, loosen the three alignment screws on the probe arm, and then adjust the arm length and the reaction carouse rotation position parameters.

4. Check the alignment effect of step 3. 5. The alignment procedure is complete.

7.2.3 Sample Carousel Unit The sample carousel unit contains six alignment commands, which are: 1. Inner 7-7

sample carousel outer ring radial position, 2. Inner sample carousel inner ring radial position, 3. Outer sample carousel outer ring radial position, 4. Outer carousel outer ring reversed stop position compensation, 5. Outer sample carousel inner ring radial position, and 6. Outer carouse inner ring reversed stop position compensation. Alignment procedure: 1. Choose the desired alignment command. 2. Adjust the sample probe to make it align with the center of the sample carousel, and then lay the alignment tool. See the figure below.

3. When the sample probe is powered off, manually rotate it to the sample carousel by passing through the center of the alignment tool. 4. Select the left arrow to adjust the sample carousel radial position till the sample probe is at the center of corresponding sample cup. 5. Confirm the sample carousel radial position. 6. The alignment procedure is complete. Note that the modified parameters can be saved only after the alignment procedure is complete.

7.2.4 Reagent Carousel Unit The reagent carousel unit contains four alignment commands, which are Reagent carousel 1 circumferential position adjustment, Reagent carousel 1 reversed rotary compensation, Reagent carousel 2 circumferential position adjustment, and Reagent carousel 2 reversed rotary compensation. Choose the desired alignment command and then operate as instructed by the software prompts. 7-8

Lay the alignment tool as shown in the figure below.

7.2.5 Probe and Mixer Units The probes can be aligned in similar ways, and this section will take the reagent probe as an example to describe alignment methods. Alignment positions of probes and mixers: •

…rotary to…: to align…horizontally to….

•

…height: to align…vertically to….

•

…reversed rotary stop position adjustment: to align…reversed-horizontally to stop position of….

•

Large step: set the number of steps for alignment.

•

Small step: a micro step.

•

Left arrow: to rotate clockwise; right arrow: to rotate counterclockwise.

•

Up/Down arrows: to move upward or downward for the specified steps.

7-9

Alignment of probe units To align a reagent probe horizontally to the reaction carousel: 1. Select the desired alignment command. The reagent probe, reagent carouse, and reaction carousel reset mechanically. 2. Select Continue to proceed to the next step. 3. Loosen the retaining screw of the probe arm and then adjust the radial position of the arm. If you find that the reagent probe is not aligned to the radial position of the probe arm, readjust the arm clockwise or counterclockwise. 4. Confirm the adjustment effect of step 3 and then close the window. You should perform other steps as instructed by the software screens. Note: When performing an alignment command containing “…probe…height…”, use a 0.15mm clearance gauge to measure a gap. When aligning a probe to the vertical extreme position of a carousel, adjust four positions and then take the average of the four to configure the parameters. When aligning a probe to the wash well, refer to the figure below, and make sure that the alignment tool is locked on the wash well edge and the nozzle.

7-10

Note: The alignment tool used for aligning the sample probe with the ISE module is as shown below. Lay the alignment tool on the ISE sample inject cup and then tighten the alignment tool.

Alignment of mixer units This section takes the Sample mixer rotary to cuvette as an example.

7-11

1. Select the desired alignment command. The reaction carousel and sample mixer reset mechanically. 2. Loosen the retaining screws of the probe arm and mixer motor, and then adjust the mixer assembly to make the mixer go to the center of the alignment tool. The alignment tool for adjusting the mixer assembly is as shown below. Please note that the smaller hole should face upwards during horizontal position adjustment and the bigger hole should face upwards during vertical position adjustment.

3. Select the left or right arrows to tune the radial position of the sample mixer till requests are met. 4. Check and confirm the alignment effect. 5. The alignment procedure is complete. To align the mixer 2 and 3, adjust the parameters. When adjusting the vertical position of the mixer, lower it to the middle of the alignment tool to make the Go Gauge pass instead of the No-go Gauge.

7-12

The reagent mixers can be aligned in the same way as the sample mixers.

Alignment of cuvette wash unit To adjust the cuvette wash unit, place alignment tools with square openings for the wipe blocks and the one with breached opening for the first phase. Wipe phase Phase 1

To adjust the vertical position of the wash unit, load cuvettes to the corresponding 8-phase wash positions. If the stop blocks are lifted for at least 0.5mm when the wash unit lowers down, it means that the wash unit position is correct.

7.2.6 Bar Code Units The bar code units include sample bar code unit and reagent bar code unit. The sample bar code unit contains Outer sample carousel scanning position adjustment, Inner sample carousel scanning position adjustment, and Sample bar code stability test. Only the first two commands are needed for ordinary alignment.

7-13

Outer sample carousel scanning position adjustment

1. Open the bar code alignment window. Lay the alignment tool according to the figure below.

7-14

2. Loosen the retaining screws fixing the bar code reader and bracket, and then adjust the light beam transmitted from the bar code reader to make it pass through the center of the bar code scanning window. 3. If the previous step is not satisfied, tune the light beam again. 4. Scan a bar-coded sample cups or reagent bottles and check if the bar code information is correct. 5. The alignment procedure is complete.

Inner sample carousel scanning position adjustment Open the alignment window and then operate as instructed by the software screen. Note: The bar code reader will be initialized during the alignment procedure, and this is the same for both the reagent bar code reader and sample bar code reader. Lay the alignment tool according to the figure below.

The reagent bar code unit can be aligned in the same way as the sample bar code unit. Lay the alignment tools according to the figure below.

7-15

7.2.7 Hydropneumatic Unit The Hydropneumatic unit contains alignment commands to test the pumps/valve, to inquire the current status of fluidic containers, to prime the fluidic path, and to check/adjust the probe interior wash pressure.

Valve and floater test

Prerequisites to test the valves in batch: You have completely understood the functions and relations of all valves. The probes and mixers that may be affected by the alignment are currently at their wash wells. 7-16

Pump check The Pump Check option is used to align the fluidic/air pumps and inquire the vacuum pressure.

Time: pressure data sampling period. Range: Y-axis display range of the pressure curve. Start: select this button to start receiving pressure data and displaying it on the screen. To pause, stop or resume the sampling, select Pause, Stop and Resume.

Select the down arrow on the right of the pull-down list box, and then choose an option to display the curve.

Fluidic prime The Fluidic Prime option is used to prime the interior/exterior of probes and cuvette wash station. Operate according to the instructions displayed on the screen.

7-17

When the system is priming the cuvette wash station, place an opening container below the wash probes to prevent overflow.

Probe interior wash pressure adjustment When the probe interior wash pressure decreases beyond the valid range, align the pressure as instructed by the software screen. Remove the right rear panel, and then spin the blue knob on the AC drive board. The knob has been marked with a red dot, which means that the pressure has been adjusted to an appropriate value before the instrument leaves the factory.

7-18

AC drive board

Probe interior wash pressure check

The Check Probe Interior Wash Pressure option is used to inquire the probe interior wash pressure. Select Check Probe Interior Wash Pressure to display the window as shown above. If the probe interior wash pump is off, turn it on. The interior wash valve will be turned on automatically, and the three probes will then be washed. Homing mechanical parts is forbidden during the cleaning process. To inquire the interior wash pressure, select Start on the upper-right corner of the window to start inquiring the probe interior wash pressure.

7.2.8 Pyrology Unit This section provides a summary of the alignment procedures of the Pyrology unit.

7-19

Sensor configuration The Sensor Configuration option is used to calculate, configure and inquire the temperature sensor parameters, ∆AD values and sensor lead length of the reaction carousel. The alignment window is as shown below. To check and configure the temperature sensor parameters of the reaction carousel, 1) Choose a sensor in the left part of the alignment window. 2) Enter the resistance values for three temperature points of the sensor. 3) Select Calculate to calculate the parameters and then check if the sensor is qualified. 4) Select Config to configure the sensor parameters.

7-20

Reaction carousel heater control The following alignment options are provided: 2. Turn on reaction carousel heater, 3. Turn off reaction carousel heater, 4. Reaction carousel temperature test. Open the alignment window and then operate according to the instructions displayed on the screen.

Temperature curves Options 5-7 allow you to view the temperature curves of the reaction carousel, wash solution and reagent refrigeration. See the figure below: The operation method is similar to that of the pressure check. The system allows turning on/off the heater, collecting real-time data, and selecting sensors.

7-21

To inquire the heater power and sensor temperature of the reaction carousel, 1) Set the sampling times and the interval between two sampling. 2) Set the Y-axis display range of the temperature curve. 3) Select Start to collect the heater power and sensor temperature. For the collected data, you are allowed to: •

adjust the Y-axis display range of the temperature curve during data collecting.

•

zoom in the temperature curve.

To turn on or off the reaction carousel heater, Click the Turn on Heater or Turn off Heater button on the alignment window. If it does not work, click the two buttons again.

Fan status query The Fan Status Query option is used to inquire the current status of each fan.

7-22

7-23

7-24

8 Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Alarms and Troubleshooting

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

A00001

Instruction error

Instruction error due to software logic error during controlling system execution

/

Equipment instruction execute error

Switch off the analyzing unit power and switch on it again. Recover failure by performing the Home maintenance procedure. If this message appears for 3 times, contact our R&D department.

A00006

Instruction error

Main control unit E2PROM read/write error

/

E2PROM read/write error

Switch off the analyzing unit power and switch on it again. Recover failure by performing the Home maintenance procedure. If this message appears for 3 times, contact our R&D department.

A01006

Sample unit

Sample probe vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find

/

Sample probe vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driver circuit error;

Sample probe vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a

probe

8-1

Event ID

Component

Event Description the zero position 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating 4. Collision error remains 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Sample probe horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position Sample syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

3) Vertical motor error; 4) Vertical sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the sample probe; 3) Incorrect sample probe positioning; 4) Incorrect sample carousel positioning; 4. Collision error remains: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the sample probe; 3) Collision sensor is not blocked due to deformation of blocking plate’s driving spring; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position: Software error

new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly; 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains, adjust positioning parameters; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning parameters; 4. Collision error remains: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate again; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position: Home instrument or sample probe unit. Sample probe horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly;

Sample probe horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 8-2

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position: Software error Sample syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error; 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose.

3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position: Home instrument or sample probe unit. Sample syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly.

A01007

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating:

/

Sample probe vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the sample probe; 3) Incorrect sample probe positioning; 4) Incorrect sample carousel positioning;

Sample probe vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains, adjust positioning parameters; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning parameters.

A01021

Sample unit

probe

Clog detection board communication

/

1. Connection error between clog detection board and wash control driver board;

1. Check cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit;

8-3

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

error.

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2. Clog detection board malfunction

2. Check if the power indication light for clog detection board is on properly; check if clog detection board is working correctly; 3. Replace clog detection board if malfunction has been identified.

A01022

Sample unit

probe

Sample syringe aspirates too much

/

The aspirate volume is beyond the range of the syringe.

Define the aspirate volume correctly.

A01023

Sample unit

probe

Sample syringe dispenses too much

/

The dispense volume is beyond the range of the syringe.

Define the dispense volume correctly.

A01024

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe fails to detect liquid level when aspirating 1. Sample probe fails to detect liquid level when aspirating on sample carousel; 2. Sample probe fails to detect liquid level when aspirating on reaction carousel; 3. No liquid level is detected when aspirating diluted wash solution

/

1. No sample is loaded on the designated position; 2. Insufficient sample; 3. Sample probe level detection board error.

1. Check if there is sufficient sample, and run the test again; 2. If there are level detection error, check sample probe, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A01026

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe dispenses insufficient sample

/

1. Sample probe is clogged when aspirating; 2. Sample probe aspirates nothing; 3. Syringe assembly error.

1. Check if the sample meets requirement and is sufficient in volume, and then run the test again; 2. Check if there is any abnormity of syringe assembly.

A01027

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe aspirates nothing

/

1. No sample is designated position;

1. Check if there is sufficient sample, and run the test again;

8-4

loaded

on

the

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2. Insufficient sample; 3. Sample probe level detection error; 4. Clog detection error.

2. If level detection error is identified, check sample probe, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified; 3. If clog detection error is identified, check if there is loose connection or liquid leakage in sample probe hydro system.

A01028

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe fails to detect liquid level during cleaning 1. No liquid level is detected in wash well during unit homing procedure; 2. No liquid level is detected in wash well during cleaning procedure

/

1. No DI water or hydro error; 2. Sample probe level detection error.

1. Check if hydro is normal; troubleshoot if there is any abnormity; 2. If level detection error is identified, check sample probe, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A01029

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe is clogged when aspirating

/

1. Sample contains clots or insufficient sample; 2. Sample probe hydro error; 3. Clog detection system error.

1. Check if sample has been pre-processed properly; check if sample contains foreign matters such as clot; check if there is sufficient sample; 2. Clean the sample probe with diluted wash solution. If the problem remains, remove the sample probe and unclog it. 3. Check if hyro is normal, especially if there is any air bubbles in clog detection pressure sensor; 4. Check clog detection board and clog detection pressure sensor, if previous two possible causes have been eliminated.

A01030

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe is clogged during

/

1. Sample probe is clogged;

1. Clean the sample probe with diluted wash solution. Remove the sample

8-5

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

cleaning.

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2. Sample probe hydro error.

probe and unclog it. 2. Check if sample probe tubing, pump and valve for interior wash is normal; 3. Check clog detection board and clog detection pressure sensor.

A01031

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe parameters are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Reset sample probe position parameters; if problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A01033

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe fails to detect liquid level on reaction carousel when dispensing

/

1. There is no reagent or insufficient reagent in the cuvette; 2. Incorrect vertical extreme position parameter for sample probe on reaction carousel; 3. Sample probe level detection error.

1. Check if R1 volume is sufficient and the reagent bottle is free of air bubbles, and then try again; 2. Check if the vertical extreme position parameter for sample probe on reaction carousel is correct; 3. If level detection error is identified, check sample probe, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A01034

Sample unit

probe

Liquid level at ISE sample injection port is too high

/

The electrodes are blocked; the ISE tubes have leak or are clogged; The sample probe is low in sample injection position of the ISE module; Sample probe level detection error.

1. Check if liquid volume within ISE injection port is correct, and run the test again; 2. Check if ISE module is leaking or clogged; 3. Adjust the horizontal and vertical position from sample probe to ISE injection port; 4. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A01035

Sample unit

probe

Liquid level at ISE sample injection port is too low

/

Tube is leaking or clogged. The sample probe is high in sample injection position of the ISE module. Sample probe level detection error.

1. Check if there is any leaking or clogging, and troubleshoot if any. 2. Adjust the horizontal and vertical position from sample probe to ISE injection port.

8-6

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

A01036

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe level detection board data reception error

/

1. Error of communication cable between level detection board and smart modules

Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit.

A01037

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe level detection board self calibrating failed

/

1. Error of communication cable between level detection board and smart modules; 2. Sample probe error, or connection error between sample probe and level detection board; 3 Sample probe level detection board error.

1. Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit; 2. Check if sample probe is installed correctly; check if sample probe is bent, cracked or loose; 3. Check if level detection board is normal; replace it if not.

A01038

Sample unit

probe

Sample probe clog detection board working model setting failed

/

1. Check if connection between clog detection board and wash control is normal; 2. Clog detection board error.

1. Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit; 2. Check if the power indication light for clog detection board is on properly; check if clog detection board is working correctly; 3. Replace clog detection board if malfunction has been identified.

A02006

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating 4. Collision error remains 5. Vertical movement is not

/

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driver circuit error; 3) Vertical motor error; 4) Vertical sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure;

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly; 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating:

8-7

Event ID

Component

Event Description allowed in current horizontal position Probe R1 horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position Probe R1 syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the reagent probe; 3) Incorrect reagent probe positioning; 4) Incorrect reagent carousel positioning; 4. Collision error remains: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the reagent probe; 3) Collision sensor is not blocked due to deformation of blocking plate’s driving spring; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position: Software error Reagent probe horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position:

1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains, adjust positioning parameters; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning parameters; 4. Collision error remains: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate again; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position: Home instrument or reagent probe unit. Reagent probe horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed

8-8

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

Reagent syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error; 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose.

in current vertical position: Home instrument or reagent probe unit. Reagent syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly.

Software error

A02007

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating

/

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the reagent probe; 3) Incorrect reagent probe positioning; 4) Incorrect reagent carousel positioning;

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains, adjust positioning parameters; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning parameters

A02021

Probe R1 unit

R1 syringe aspirates too much

/

The aspirate volume is beyond the range of the syringe.

Define the aspirate volume correctly.

A02022

Probe R1 unit

R1 syringe dispenses too much

/

The dispense volume is beyond the range of the syringe.

Define the dispense volume correctly.

A02023

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 fails to detect liquid level on reagent carousel

/

1. There is no reagent or insufficient reagent on the designated position; 2. Probe R1 level detection error.

1. Check if the reagent is sufficient, and then try again. 2. If there is level detection error, check probe R1, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

8-9

Event ID

Component

Event Description

A02025

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 dispenses insufficient reagent

A02026

Probe R1 unit

A02027

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

/

1. The reagent probe aspirates nothing. 2. Syringe assembly error.

1. Check if the reagent meets the requirement and is sufficient in volume, and then try again. 2. Check if there is any abnormity of syringe assembly.

Probe R1 fails to detect liquid level during cleaning. 1. No liquid level is detected in wash well during unit homing procedure; 2. No liquid level is detected in wash well during cleaning procedure

/

1. No DI water or hydro error; 2. Probe R1 level detection error.

1. Check if tubing, pump and valve for exterior wash of probe R1 is normal; 2. If level detection error is identified, check probe R1, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 detects liquid level in empty cuvette

/

DI water residual exists in cuvette

Check if aspirating tubing and solenoid valves of wash station is normal; check if system vacuum is normal.

A02028

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 parameters are within critical range.

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Reset position parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A02029

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 fails to detect liquid level when checking reagent inventory

/

1. There is no reagent or insufficient reagent on the designated position; 2. Probe R1 level detection error.

1. Check if the reagent is sufficient, and then try again. 2. If level detection error is identified, check probe R1, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A02030

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 level detection board data reception error

/

1. Cable error for communication between level detection board and smart modules

Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit.

A02031

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 detection

/

1. Cable error for communication between level detection board and

1. Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or

level board

Flag

8-10

Event ID

Component

Event Description self failed

Flag

calibrating

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

smart modules; 2. Probe R1 error or level detection board connection error; 3. Probe R1 level detection error.

short circuit; 2. Check if probe R1 is installed correctly; check if probe R1 is bent, cracked or loose; 3. Check if level detection board is normal; replace it if not.

A02032

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 aspirates nothing on reagent carousel

/

Air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle.

1. Check if the reagent bottle contains air bubbles, and then try again. 2. Check if the reagent bottle meets requirements.

A02033

Probe R1 unit

Probe R1 fails to detect liquid level after dispensing

/

1. Insufficient reagent, or air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle. 2. Probe R1 level detection error.

1. Check if the reagent is sufficient and the reagent bottle contains air bubbles, and then try again. 2. If level detection error is identified, check probe R1, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A03006

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. . Failed to find the zero position 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating 4. Collision error remains 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Probe R2 horizontal movement error

/

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driver circuit error; 3) Vertical motor error; 4) Vertical sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the reagent probe; 3) Incorrect reagent probe positioning;

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly; 3. Collision occurs during operation other than aspirating: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or adjust probe to be

8-11

Event ID

Component

Event Description 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position Probe R2 syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

4) Incorrect reagent carousel positioning; 4. Collision error remains: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the reagent probe; 3) Collision sensor is not blocked due to deformation of blocking plate’s driving spring; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position: Software error Reagent probe horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position: Software error Reagent syringe movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose.

vertical; if problem remains, adjust positioning parameters; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning parameters; 4. Collision error remains: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate again; 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position: Home instrument or reagent probe unit. Reagent probe horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 3. Collision occurs during horizontal movement: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position: Home instrument or reagent probe unit. Reagent syringe movement error

8-12

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error; 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose.

1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly.

A03007

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating

/

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable failure; 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when assembling the reagent probe; 3) Incorrect reagent probe positioning; 4) Incorrect reagent carousel positioning;

Reagent probe vertical movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Rotate positioning sensor to remove dust or adjust probe to be vertical; if problem remains, adjust positioning parameters; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning parameters

A03021

Probe R2 unit

R2 syringe aspirates too much

/

The aspirate volume is beyond the range of the syringe.

Define the aspirate volume correctly.

A03022

Probe R2 unit

R2 syringe dispenses too much

/

The dispense volume is beyond the range of the syringe.

Define the dispense volume correctly.

A03023

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 fails to detect liquid level on reagent carousel

/

1. There is no reagent or insufficient reagent on the designated position; 2. Probe R1 level detection error.

1. Check if the reagent is sufficient, and then try again. 2. If there is level detection error, check probe R2, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A03025

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 dispenses insufficient reagent

/

1. The reagent probe aspirates nothing. 2. Syringe assembly error.

1. Check if the reagent meets the requirement and is sufficient in volume, and then try again. 2. Check if there is any abnormity of

8-13

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions syringe assembly.

A03026

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 fails to detect liquid level during cleaning. 1. No liquid level is detected in wash well during unit homing procedure; 2. No liquid level is detected in wash well during cleaning procedure

/

1. No DI water or hydro error; 2. Probe R1 level detection error.

1. Check if pump and valve for exterior wash of probe R2 is normal; 2. If level detection error is identified, check probe R2, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A03028

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 parameters are within critical range.

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Reset position parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A03029

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 fails to detect liquid level when checking reagent inventory

/

1. There is no reagent or insufficient reagent on the designated position; 2. Probe R2 level detection error.

1. Check if the reagent is sufficient, and then try again. 2. If level detection error is identified, check probe R2, level detection board and connecting cable; replace if any abnormity is identified.

A03030

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 level detection board data reception error

/

1. Cable error for communication between level detection board and smart modules

Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit.

A03031

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 level detection board self calibrating failed

/

1. Cable error for communication between level detection board and smart modules; 2. Probe R2 error or level detection board connection error; 3. Probe R2 level detection error.

1. Check relevant cable for any signs of fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or short circuit; 2. Check if probe R2is installed correctly; check if probe R2 is bent, cracked or loose; 3. Check if level detection board is normal; replace it if not.

A03032

Probe R2 unit

Probe R2 aspirates

/

Air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle.

1. Check if the reagent bottle contains

8-14

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

nothing on reagent carousel A04006

A04015

Sample unit

Sample unit

mixer

mixer

Corrective Actions air bubbles, and then try again. 2. Check if the reagent bottle meets requirements.

Sample mixer vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Sample mixer horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position

/

Sample mixer rotation error

/

Sample mixer vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driver circuit error; 3) Vertical motor error; 4) Vertical sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Software error Sample mixer horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position Software error 1. Mixer motor error; 2 Gear is jammed; 3. Mixer rotational speed sensor error 8-15

Sample mixer vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly; 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Home instrument or unit. Sample mixer horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position Home instrument or unit. 1. Replace motor; 2. Adjust gear or replace assembly; 3. Replace sensor, or relevant cable, or

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions circuit

A04016

Sample unit

mixer

Sample mixer parameters are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A05006

Reagent mixer unit

Reagent mixer vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Reagent mixer horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the zero position 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position

/

Reagent mixer vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) The assembly is jammed; 2) Driver circuit error; 3) Vertical motor error; 4) Vertical sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose;

Reagent mixer vertical movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten properly; 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Home instrument or unit. Reagent mixer horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position Home instrument or unit.

Reagent

/

A05016

Reagent mixer

mixer

3. Vertical movement is not allowed in current horizontal position Software error Reagent mixer horizontal movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or belt pulley is loose. 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in current vertical position Software error 1. Mixer motor error; 8-16

1. Replace motor;

Event ID

Component

Event Description

unit

rotation error

A05017

Reagent mixer unit

Reagent mixer parameters are within critical range

A06006

Reaction carousel unit

A07006

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2 Gear is jammed; 3. Mixer rotational speed sensor error

2. Adjust gear or replace assembly; 3. Replace sensor, or relevant cable, or circuit

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

Reaction carousel movement error 1. Failed to find the home position 2. The coder missed steps 3. The reaction carousel missed steps when moving to the home position

/

Reaction carousel movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Home position sensor error; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Assembly is jammed; 2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error; 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. The reaction carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Home position sensor error

Reaction carousel movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Replace sensor or cable; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor or cable; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor assembly; 3. The reaction carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Replace sensor or cable

Reaction carousel unit

Reaction carousel parameters are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

Sample carousel 1 unit

Sample carousel 1 movement error 1. Failed to find the home position 2. The coder missed steps 3. The sample carousel missed steps when moving

/

Sample carousel outer ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Home position sensor error; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Assembly is jammed; 2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error;

Sample carousel outer ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Replace sensor or cable; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB;

8-17

Event ID

Component

Event Description to the position.

Flag

home

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. The sample carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Home position sensor error

3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor or cable; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor assembly; 3. The reaction carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Replace sensor or cable

A07009

Sample carousel 1 unit

Sample bar code reader error

/

Sample bar code reader connection error due to system failure. If this occurs repeatedly, and failure recovery cannot be performed, bar code reader is not initialized correctly, or communication cable is disconnected. If bar code reader is not available, please try again.

Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot be performed, check if bar code reader is connected properly. If problem remains, replace bar code reader or control driver board.

A07010

Sample carousel 1 unit

Bar code data received has no end mark

/

Sample bar coder reader does not work normally due to communication error.

Initialize the sample bar code reader and try again. If problem remains, check bar code reader connection, replace bar code reader and control driver board.

A07011

Sample carousel 1 unit

Sample bar code sending buffer is full

/

Sample bar coder sending buffer is full due to communication error.

Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.

A07012

Sample carousel 1 unit

Parameters of sample carousel 1 are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust position parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A08006

Sample carousel 2 unit

Sample carousel 2 movement error 1. Failed to find the home position 2. The coder missed steps 3. The sample carousel missed

/

Sample carousel inner ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Home position sensor error; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Assembly is jammed; 2) Driving circuit error;

Sample carousel inner ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Replace sensor or cable; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly;

8-18

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

steps when moving to the home position.

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

3) Motor error; 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. The sample carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Home position sensor error

2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor or cable; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor assembly; 3. The reaction carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Replace sensor or cable

A08009

Sample carousel 2 unit

Sample bar code reader error

/

Sample bar code reader connection error due to system failure. If this occurs repeatedly, and failure recovery cannot be performed, bar code reader is not initialized correctly, or communication cable is disconnected. If bar code reader is not available, please try again.

Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot be performed, check if bar code reader is connected properly. If problem remains, replace bar code reader or control driver board.

A08010

Sample carousel 2 unit

Bar code data received has no end mark

/

Sample bar coder reader does not work normally due to communication error.

Initialize the sample bar code reader and try again. If problem remains, check bar code reader connection, replace bar code reader and control driver board.

A08011

Sample carousel 2 unit

Sample bar code sending buffer is full

/

Sample bar coder sending buffer is full due to communication error.

Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.

A08012

Sample carousel 2 unit

Parameters of sample carousel 2 are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust position parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A09006

Reagent carousel 1 unit

Reagent carousel 1 failed to find the home position Reagent carousel 1 movement error 1. Failed to find

/

Reagent carousel outer ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Home position sensor error; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Assembly is jammed;

Reagent carousel outer ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Replace sensor or cable; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a

8-19

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

the home position 2. The coder missed steps 3. The reagent carousel missed steps when moving to the home position.

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error; 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. The reagent carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Home position sensor error

new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor or cable; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor assembly; 3. The reagent carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Replace sensor or cable

A09009

Reagent carousel 1 unit

Reagent carousel cover is opened compulsively during reagent carousel 1 rotation

/

The reagent carousel cover is removed.

Restore the reagent carousel cover.

A09011

Reagent carousel 1 unit

Reagent bar code reader error

/

Reagent bar code reader connection error due to system failure. If this occurs repeatedly, and failure recovery cannot be performed, bar code reader is not initialized correctly, or communication cable is disconnected. If bar code reader is not available, please try again.

Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot be performed, check if bar code reader is connected properly. If problem remains, replace bar code reader or control driver board.

A09012

Reagent carousel 1 unit

Bar code data received has no end mark

/

Communication error. Reagent bar code instruction buffer is full.

Initialize the sample bar code reader and try again. If problem remains, check bar code reader connection, replace bar code reader and control driver board.

A09014

Reagent carousel 1 unit

Reagent bar code sending buffer is full

/

Reagent bar coder sending buffer is full due to communication error.

Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.

A09015

Reagent carousel 1 unit

Parameters of reagent carousel 1 are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust position parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

8-20

Event ID

Component

Event Description

A09016

Reagent carousel 1 unit

Reagent carousel is opened compulsively during scanning

A10006

Reagent carousel 2 unit

A10009

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

/

The reagent carousel stops rotating and scanning is terminated, because the reagent carousel cover is removed during scanning.

Restore the reagent carousel cover and recover the failure, and then try again.

Reagent carousel 2 movement error 1. Failed to find the home position 2. The coder missed steps 3. The reagent carousel missed steps when moving to the home position.

/

Reagent carousel inner ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Home position sensor error; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Assembly is jammed; 2) Driving circuit error; 3) Motor error; 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. The reagent carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Home position sensor error

Reagent carousel inner ring movement error 1. Failed to find the home position Replace sensor or cable; 2. The coder missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace motor; 4) Replace sensor or cable; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor assembly; 3. The reagent carousel missed steps when moving to the home position Replace sensor or cable

Reagent carousel 2 unit

Reagent carousel cover is opened compulsively during reagent carousel 2 rotation

/

The reagent carousel cover is removed.

Restore the reagent carousel cover.

A10011

Reagent carousel 2 unit

Reagent bar code reader error

/

Reagent bar code reader connection error due to system failure. If this occurs repeatedly, and failure recovery cannot be performed, bar code reader is not initialized correctly, or communication cable is disconnected. If bar code reader is not available, please try again.

Recover the failure. If the error remains, initialize the sample bar code reader. If initialization cannot be performed, check if bar code reader is connected properly. If problem remains, replace bar code reader or control driver board.

A10012

Reagent carousel 2 unit

Bar code data received has no

/

Communication error. Reagent bar code instruction buffer is full.

Initialize the sample bar code reader and try again. If problem remains,

8-21

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

end mark

Corrective Actions check bar code reader connection, replace bar code reader and control driver board.

A10014

Reagent carousel 2 unit

Reagent bar code sending buffer is full

/

Reagent bar coder sending buffer is full due to communication error.

Recover the failure or reboot the analyzing unit.

A10015

Reagent carousel 2 unit

Parameters of reagent carousel 2 are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust position parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A10016

Reagent carousel 2 unit

Reagent carousel is opened compulsively during scanning

/

The reagent carousel stops rotating and scanning is terminated, because the reagent carousel cover is removed during scanning.

Restore the reagent carousel cover and recover the failure, and then try again.

A11005

Wash station

Wash station movement error 1. Sensor status error 2. Failed to find the home position 3. The wash station collides with an obstacle when moving.

/

Wash station movement error 1. Sensor status error Belt pulley is loose; 2. Failed to find the home position 1) Driving circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home position sensor error; 4) Belt pulley is loose; 3. The wash station collides with an obstacle when moving 1) Wash probes are not vertical; 2) Reaction carousel positioning is deviated; 3) Collision sensor or circuit error

Wash station movement error 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so; 2. Failed to find the home position 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly; 3. The wash station collides with an obstacle when moving 1) Align wash probes; 2) Align reaction carousel positioning; 3) Replace sensor, cable or PCB

A11010

Wash station

Releasing failed

/

1. Solenoid valves V23-V27 go wrong. 2. The vacuum pump goes wrong. 3. The vacuum sensor goes wrong.

1. Check if solenoid valves V23, V24, V25, V26 or V27 can be on and off normally; 2. Check if vacuum pump can be turned

vacuum

8-22

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions off; 3. Check if vacuum sensor is normal.

A11012

Wash station

Water supplying is too slow

/

1. The water unit goes wrong. 2. The water supply valve goes wrong. 3. The water supply ball valve is not opened. (The handle is horizontal when it is opened) 4. The water supply ball valve goes wrong. 5. The low-level floater of the water tank goes wrong. 6. The water supply tube is bent. 7. The outlet filter of the water supply tube is clogged.

1. Check the water unit. 2. Check if the water supply ball valve is opened and the handle is horizontal. 3. Check if the water supply ball valve is blocked. 4. Check if water supply valve can be turned on and off normally. 5. Check if low-level floater signal is correct. 6. Check if water supply tube is smooth. 7. Check if outlet filter of water supply tube is clogged.

A11013

Wash station

Water empty

is

/

1. The water unit goes wrong. 2. The water supply valve goes wrong. 3. The water supply ball valve is not opened. (The handle is horizontal when it is opened) 4. The water supply ball valve goes wrong. 5. The low-level floater of the water tank goes wrong. 6. The water supply tube is bent. 7. The outlet filter of the water supply tube is clogged.

1. Check the water unit. 2. Check if the water supply ball valve is opened and the handle is horizontal. 3. Check if the water supply ball valve is blocked. 4. Check if water supply valve can be turned on and off normally. 5. Check if low-level floater signal is correct. 6. Check if water supply tube is smooth. 7. Check if outlet filter of water supply tube is clogged.

A11014

Wash station

Priming diluted wash solution is slow

/

1. The solenoid valve V06 goes wrong. 2. The restrictor ring is clogged. 3. The inlet filter at the front panel is clogged. 4. The DI water circulating pump goes wrong.

1. Check solenoid valve V06. 2. Check restrictor ring. 3. Check if inlet filter at the front panel is clogged. 4. Check if DI water pump is on and the pressure gauge reads between

tank

8-23

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

5. The water tank is empty. 6. The concentrated wash solution tank is empty. 7. The concentrated wash solution pump goes wrong. 8. The low-level floater of the diluted wash solution tank goes wrong.

40kPa-50kPa. 5. Check the floater of the deionized water tank. 6. Check the floater of the concentrated wash solution tank. 7. Check concentrated wash solution pump. 8. Check diluted wash solution low-level floater.

A11015

Wash station

Diluted solution empty

wash tank is

/

1. The solenoid valve V06 goes wrong. 2. The restrictor ring is clogged. 3. The inlet filter at the front panel is clogged. 4. The DI water circulating pump P03 goes wrong. 5. The water tank is empty. 6. The concentrated wash solution tank is empty. 7. The concentrated wash solution pump P05 goes wrong. 8. The low-level floater of the diluted wash solution tank goes wrong.

1. Check solenoid valve V06. 2. Check restrictor ring. 3. Check if inlet filter at the front panel is clogged. 4. Check if DI water pump is on and the pressure gauge reads between 40kPa-50kPa. 5. Check the floater of the deionized water tank. 6. Check the floater of the concentrated wash solution tank. 7. Check concentrated wash solution pump. 8. Check diluted wash solution low-level floater.

A11016

Wash station

Concentrated wash solution tank is empty

/

1. Concentrated wash solution is exhausted and the floater status is Empty. 2. The low-level floater of the concentrated wash solution tank goes wrong.

1. Check if the concentrated wash solution is exhausted and the floater status is Empty. If yes, fill more concentrated wash solution. 2. Check if concentrated wash solution tank floater goes wrong.

A11017

Wash station

Liquid accumulates in primary vacuum container

/

1. The solenoid valve V27 goes wrong. 2. The waste pump P07 goes wrong. 3. The low-concentration waste drain tube is bent.

1. Check solenoid valve V27. 2. Check if waste pump can be turned on and off normally. 3. Check if low-concentration waste

8-24

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions drain tube is smooth.

A11018

Wash station

High concentration waste collector is full

/

1. The waste pump P07 goes wrong. 2. The high-concentration waste drain tube is bent.

1. Check if waste pump can be turned on and off normally. 2. Check if high-concentration waste drain tube is smooth.

A11019

Wash station

Low concentration waste collector is full

/

1. The waste pump P07 goes wrong. 2. The low-concentration waste drain tube is bent.

1. Check if waste pump can be turned on and off normally. 2. Check if high-concentration waste drain tube is smooth.

A11020

Wash station

High concentration waste tank is full

/

1. The high concentration waste tank is full 2. The floater of the high concentration waste tank goes wrong.

1. Check the high-concentration waste tank. If it is full, replace the waste tank, close the full tank and dispose of the waste properly. 2. Check if high-concentration waste goes wrong.

A11021

Wash station

ISE pressure is low

/

1. The solenoid valve V29 goes wrong. 2. The ISE vacuum sensor goes wrong. 3. The ISE degasser goes wrong.

1. Check if solenoid valve V29 can be turned off. 2. Check ISE vacuum sensor. 3. Check if ISE degasser is clogged.

A11022

Wash station

ISE pressure is high

/

1. The solenoid valve V29 goes wrong. 2. The ISE degasser pump P12 goes wrong. 3. The ISE vacuum sensor goes wrong. 4. The ISE degasser goes wrong. 5. The connectors and tubes go wrong.

1. Check if solenoid valve V29 can be turned on. 2. Check if ISE degasser pump P12 can be turned on normally. 3. Check ISE vacuum sensor. 4. Check if ISE degasser is leaking air. 5. Check if connector and tubing are leaking air.

A11023

Wash station

Insufficient vacuum

/

1. The primary vacuum pump P08 goes wrong. 2. The primary vacuum sensor goes wrong. 3. The connectors and tubes go wrong. 4. The primary vacuum container goes

1. Check if primary vacuum pump P08 can be turned on and off normally. 2. Check primary vacuum sensor. 3. Check if connectors and tubing related to primary vacuum are leaking air. 4. Check if primary vacuum container is

8-25

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

wrong. 5. Solenoid valves V23, V24, V25 or V26 go wrong

leaking air. 5. Check if solenoid valves V23, V24, V25 and V26 can be turned on and off normally.

A11024

Wash station

Degassing pump pressure is low

/

1. The solenoid valve V28 goes wrong. 2. The degasser vacuum sensor goes wrong. 3. The degasser goes wrong.

1. Check if solenoid valves V28 can be turned off. 2. Check degasser vacuum sensor. 3. Check if degasser is clogged.

A11025

Wash station

Degassing pump pressure is high

/

1. The solenoid valve V28 goes wrong. 2. The degassing pump P09 goes wrong. 3. The degasser vacuum sensor goes wrong. 4. The degasser goes wrong. 5. Connectors and tubing go wrong.

1. Check if solenoid valves V28 can be turned on. 2. Check if degassing pump P09 can be turned on normally. 3. Check degasser vacuum sensor. 4. Check if degasser is leaking air. 5. Check if connectors and tubing are leaking air.

A11026

Wash station

Wash unit parameters are within critical range.

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A12005

Temperature unit

Reaction carousel temperature is out of range

T1

1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 3. The temperature protection switch goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 4. The heater goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 5. PCB error 6. Parameters are lost. 7. Electromagnetic interference exists.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Observe ambient temperature through the Status screen, to check if temperature is out of range. 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections are secure. 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if protection switch is shut and connections are secure. 5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal temperature is correct, and connections are secure.

8-26

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions 6. PCB failure. 7. Parameters are lost: check if temperature control parameters are correct. 8. Electromagnetic interference exists.

A12006

Temperature unit

Temperature of wash solution for cleaning cuvettes is out of range

/

1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 3. The temperature protection switch goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 4. The heater goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 5. PCB error 6. Parameters are lost. 7. Electromagnetic interference exists.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Observe ambient temperature through the Status screen, to check if temperature is out of range. 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections are secure. 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if protection switch is shut and connections are secure. 5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal temperature is correct, and connections are secure. 6. PCB failure. 7. Parameters are lost: check if temperature control parameters are correct. 8. Electromagnetic interference exists.

A12007

Temperature unit

Temperature of DI water for cleaning cuvettes is out of range

/

1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 3. The temperature protection switch goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 4. The heater goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 5. PCB error 6. Parameters are lost.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Observe ambient temperature through the Status screen, to check if temperature is out of range. 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections are secure. 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if protection switch is shut and connections are secure.

8-27

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

7. Electromagnetic interference exists.

5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal temperature is correct, and connections are secure. 6. PCB failure. 7. Parameters are lost: check if temperature control parameters are correct. 8. Electromagnetic interference exists.

A12008

Temperature unit

Temperature of DI water for cleaning the instrument is out of range

/

1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 3. The temperature protection switch goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 4. The heater goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 5. PCB error 6. Parameters are lost. 7. Electromagnetic interference exists.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Observe ambient temperature through the Status screen, to check if temperature is out of range. 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections are secure. 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if protection switch is shut and connections are secure. 5. Heater error: check if resistance under normal temperature is correct, and connections are secure. 6. PCB failure. 7. Parameters are lost: check if temperature control parameters are correct. 8. Electromagnetic interference exists.

A12009

Temperature unit

Internal temperature of the instrument is out of range

/

1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 2. The cooling fan goes wrong. 3. The dust screen is blocked. 4. The air vent is blocked in the specified range.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Observe ambient temperature through the Status screen, to check if temperature is out of range. 3. Check if cooling fan is OK. 4. Check if dust screen is blocked and needs cleaning. 5. Check if air vent is blocked within

8-28

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions specified distance.

A12012

Temperature unit

Temperature unit parameters are within critical range.

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A13006

ISE module

reserved command

/

Software error

Recover the failure and then reboot the operating software.

A13007

ISE module

no normal calibration data available

/

Software error

Recalibrate the ISE module.

A13008

ISE module

Abnormally completed sending command

/

ISE module error

Recover the failure and then reboot the operating software.

A13009

ISE module

Parameter abnormal

/

The configured parameters exceed the allowable values.

Enter the ISE parameters again, or restore them to the default values.

A13010

ISE module

No command acceptable

is

/

ISE module error

Recover the failure and then reboot the operating software.

A13011

ISE module

No identical Specimen ID in request command(o) and that in pipette command(i)

/

Software error

Recover the failure and then reboot the operating software.

A13012

ISE module

Not enough data for CV calculation

/

The test data is insufficient calculating the CV value.

for

Perform the precision test again for at least 2 times.

A13013

ISE module

A/D converter initialize error

/

1. The ISE electrodes, ground terminal and temperature sensor are not connected correctly. 2. ISE module ADC error.

1. Check the connection of electrodes, ground terminal and temperature sensor, and then recover the failure. 2. Switch off the main power and then switch on it again after 10 seconds. Perform the startup procedure. 3. Replace CPU board of ISE module.

A13014

ISE module

Exceeding

ADC

1. The ISE electrodes, ground terminal

1. Check the connection of electrodes

with E

valid

8-29

Event ID

Component

Event Description range of converter

Flag

A/D

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

and temperature sensor are not connected correctly. 2. Temperature sensor or electrodes error. 3. ISE temperature sensor and ISE CPU board are disconnected. 4. ISE ADC error.

and ground terminal connection, and then recover the failure. 2. Switch off the main power and then switch on it again after 10 seconds. Perform the startup procedure. 3. Replace electrodes or temperature sensor. 4. Replace CPU board of ISE module.

A13016

ISE module

Exceeding valid range of thermistor

T2

1. The ISE temperature sensor is not connected correctly. 2. ISE temperature sensor error. 3. ISE temperature sensor and ISE CPU board are disconnected.

1. Check the connection of temperature sensor, and then recover the failure. 2. Replace ISE temperature sensor. 3. Replace CPU board of ISE module.

A13018

ISE module

dilution ratio out of range error

DILO

The calibrator is stored for too long time, or the electrode is degenerated. The electrode is not installed correctly.

1. Replace the calibrator and recalibrate. 2. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that an O-shape washer is mounted correctly. There should be only one O-shaped washer existing between every two electrodes, and between the electrode and the module. 3. Replace the electrode. 4. Check if volume of ISE buffer being aspirated back is normal.

A13019

ISE module

dilution ratio calculation error

DILE

The calibrator is stored for too long time, or the electrode is degenerated. The electrode is not installed correctly.

1. Replace the calibrator and recalibrate. 2. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that an O-shape washer is mounted correctly. There should be only one O-shaped washer existing between every two electrodes, and between the electrode and the module. 3. Replace the electrode.

A13020

ISE module

slope out of range

SLO

The calibrator is stored for too long time, or the electrode is degenerated.

Replace the calibrator and recalibrate. If the electrode is new, activate it and

8-30

Event ID

Component

Event Description

calculation

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

The electrode is not installed correctly.

then recalibrate. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that an O-shape washer is mounted correctly. There should be only one O-shaped washer existing between every two electrodes, and between the electrode and the module. Replace the electrode.

SLE

The calibrator is stored for too long time, or the electrode is degenerated. The electrode is not installed correctly.

Replace the calibrator and recalibrate. If the electrode is new, activate it and then recalibrate. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that an O-shape washer is mounted correctly. There should be only one O-shaped washer existing between every two electrodes, and between the electrode and the module. Replace the electrode.

A13021

ISE module

slope error

A13022

ISE module

Cl-ISE bias value over range

BIAS

The Cl electrode is dirty. The Cl electrode is degenerated.

1. Clean the electrode repeatedly and then recalibrate. 2. Replace the Cl electrode.

A13023

ISE module

Calibration times

REPL

The dispensing repeatability of the sample probe is poor. ISE electrodes performance is abnormal.

1. Replace the calibrator and recalibrate. 2. If the electrode is new, activate it and then recalibrate. 3. Check ISE tubing connection. 4. Check sample probe dispensing performance. 5. Replace the electrode.

A13024

ISE module

STD output over the preset value (D instruction S Parameter)

SEN

1. The calibrator is placed in an incorrect position. 2. The electrode is degenerated. 3. The sample probe aspirates or dispenses incorrectly. (The error occurs

1. Check the calibrator position and replace the calibrator, check if the electrode is connected correctly, and then recalibrate. 2. If the electrode is new, activate it

over

8-31

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

for several ISE chemistries.)

and then recalibrate. 3. Replace the electrode. 4. Check sample probe tubing.

A13025

ISE module

STD output over the preset value (D instruction D Parameter)

SEN

1. The calibrator is placed in an incorrect position. 2. The electrode is degenerated. 3. The sample probe aspirates or dispenses incorrectly. (The error occurs for several ISE chemistries.)

1. Check the calibrator position and replace the calibrator, and then recalibrate. 2. If the electrode is new, activate it and then recalibrate. 3. Replace the electrode. 4. Check sample probe tubing.

A13026

ISE module

calibration out of range

DUP

If calibration fails, the probable causes are: 1. ISE tubing is leaking. 2. Sample probe dispensing repeatability is poor.

If the calibration is succeeded, ignore the error; If the calibration is failed, take relevant actions according to the alarm.

A13027

ISE module

invalid sequence

analysis

/

Operating software error.

Recover the failure. Reboot operating software. Contact our R&D department.

A13028

ISE module

Failure for initializing buffer pump (home sense timeout)

/

1. ISE syringe missed steps. 2. ISE syringe home sensor error.

Recover the failure. Replace the assembly.

A13029

ISE module

Failure for initializing buffer pump (home escape timeout)

/

1. ISE syringe missed steps. 2. ISE syringe home sensor error.

Recover the failure. Replace the assembly.

A13030

ISE module

No home sense detected after operation of moving buffer pump to a home position

/

1. ISE syringe missed steps. 2. ISE syringe home sensor error.

Recover the failure. Replace the assembly.

A13031

ISE module

No home detected

/

1. ISE syringe missed steps.

Recover the failure.

escape after

8-32

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

operation of removing buffer pump from a home position pump

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

2. ISE syringe home sensor error.

Replace the assembly.

A13032

ISE module

buffer error

up

/

The syringe already reaches the top.

Stop clicking on the Buffer Syringe Up button.

A13033

ISE module

buffer pump down error

/

The syringe bottom.

the

Stop clicking on the Buffer Syringe Down button.

A14005

Reagent refrigeration unit

Parameters of reagent refrigeration unit are within critical range

/

Parameters of the control unit are incorrect.

Adjust parameters. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

A14006

Reagent refrigeration unit

Reagent refrigeration temperature is out of range

/

1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 3. The temperature protection switch goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 4. The radiator goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 5. The fan goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 6. The circulating pump goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 7. The refrigerant goes wrong. 8. PCB error 9. Parameters are lost. 10. Electromagnetic interference exists.

1c 2. Observe ambient temperature through the Status screen, to check if temperature is out of range. 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections are secure. 4. Temperature protection switch error: check if protection switch is shut and connections are secure. 5. Radiator error: check if radiator is broken, and connections are secure. 6. Fan error: check if fan is working normally, and connections are secure. 7. Circulating pump error: check if circulating pump is working normally, and connections are secure. 8. Refrigerant error: check if there is sufficient refrigerant (check after power off). 9. PCB error.

8-33

already

reaches

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions 10. Parameters are lost: reconfigure parameters. 11. Electromagnetic interference exists.

A14007

Reagent refrigeration unit

Temperature refrigeration module is low

of

/

1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 3. The circulating pump goes wrong. (component error, cable error) 4. The refrigerant goes wrong. 5. PCB error 6. Parameters are lost. 7. Electromagnetic interference exists.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Observe ambient temperature through the Status screen, to check if temperature is out of range. 3. Temperature sensor error: check for any signs of short circuit or broken circuit; check if connections are secure. 4. Circulating pump error: check if circulating pump is working normally, and connections are secure. 5. Refrigerant error: check if there is sufficient refrigerant (check after power off). 6. PCB error. 7. Parameters are lost: reconfigure parameters. 8. Electromagnetic interference exists.

A14008

Reagent refrigeration unit

Liquid pump fan is abnormal

/

1. The fan is blocked. 2. The fan is damaged. 3. The power supply goes wrong.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket. 3. Check if power supply for fan is normal. 4. Clean dust off the fan. 5. Replace fan.

A14011

Reagent refrigeration unit

Reagent refrigerating fan 1 is abnormal

/

1. The fan is blocked. 2. The fan is damaged. 3. The power supply goes wrong.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket. 3. Check if power supply for fan is normal. 4. Clean dust off the fan. 5. Replace fan.

8-34

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

A14012

Reagent refrigeration unit

Reagent refrigerating fan 2 is abnormal

/

1. The fan is blocked. 2. The fan is damaged. 3. The power supply goes wrong.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket. 3. Check if power supply for fan is normal. 4. Clean dust off the fan. 5. Replace fan.

A14013

Reagent refrigeration unit

Light source fan is abnormal

/

1. The fan is blocked. 2. The fan is damaged. 3. The power supply goes wrong.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket. 3. Check if power supply for fan is normal. 4. Clean dust off the fan. 5. Replace fan.

A14014

Reagent refrigeration unit

Air pump fan is abnormal

/

1. The fan is blocked. 2. The fan is damaged. 3. The power supply goes wrong.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket. 3. Check if power supply for fan is normal. 4. Clean dust off the fan. 5. Replace fan.

A14015

Reagent refrigeration unit

ISE fan is abnormal

/

1. The fan is blocked. 2. The fan is damaged. 3. The power supply goes wrong.

1. Reproduce failure. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket. 3. Check if power supply for fan is normal. 4. Clean dust off the fan. 5. Replace fan.

C00001

Operating system

Operating error

/

The operating system is not Windows XP.

Reinstall Windows XP and the operating software.

C00002

Operating system

Insufficient memory

/

Memory is less than 2G

Install a memory above 2G and then reboot the operating system.

C00003

Operating system

Resolution error

/

The screen resolution is not 1280*1024.

Set the screen resolution to 1280*1024.

C00004

Operating system

Color error

/

The color is below 16 bit.

Set the color to above 16 and then reboot the operating system.

system

8-35

Event ID

Component

Event Description disk

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

/

The remaining disk space is less than 4G.

Rearrange the hard disk and delete the useless files.

C00005

Operating system

Insufficient space

C00006

Operating system

Out of disk space

/

The remaining disk space is less than 1G.

Rearrange the hard disk and delete the useless files.

C00007

Operating system

CPU low

performance

/

The CPU is too busy.

Reboot the computer and operating software. If this message appears for 3 times, contact our customer service department or your local distributor.

C00008

Operating system

Printer cannot be connected

/

The printer is not powered on; the printer cable is not connected; or no driver is installed.

Check the printer connection; check if the printer is powered on and if the driver and default printer have been installed.

C00009

Operating system

Printer failure

/

Paper jam. No paper. No ink

Check for paper jam. Check if printer is busy, and print tasks are too many.

C00010

Operating system

Print paper running out

/

Paper jam. No paper. No ink

Check for paper jam. Check if printer is busy, and print tasks are too many.

C00012

Operating system

Sound card failure

/

No sound card is installed. Sound card failure. Incorrect sound card driver.

Reinstall the sound card or the sound card driver.

C01001

Instrument communication

Instrument cannot be connected

/

The serial cable is not connected; or the analyzing unit power is switched off.

Check the serial port connection. Replug the cable. Check if the analyzing unit is powered on. Start the initialization again. Restart the computer and analyzing unit. If three continuous attempts are failed, contact our customer service department or your local distributor.

C01002

Instrument communication

Instruction execution error (no response or response error)

/

Communication error

Check the serial port cable and replug it. Switch off the analyzing unit power and switch on it again. Recover failure by performing the Home maintenance procedure. If this message appears for 3 times, contact our R&D department.

C02001

Database

Database initialization failed

/

Database software is not installed; database is not established; database

Install database software; re-establish database; if problem remains, contact

8-36

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

system or database file is damaged or lost; database is opened exclusively

our R&D department

C02002

Database

Database failed

upgrade

/

Database is severely damaged; database does not exist; database is not private for BS-800; database is opened exclusively

Install database software; re-establish database; if problem remains, contact our R&D department

C02004

Database

Database failed

backup

/

Database record is under use; database is locked

Back up database again; if problem remains, contact our R&D department

C02005

Database

Reading/Writing database failed

/

Cannot read or write necessary information from or into database

Check if database has been damaged; contact our R&D department

C03001

Result calculation

Response calculation error

RCE

Absorbance data for calculation is incomplete, or the dividend is 0.

Investigate the cause of photoelectric data loss; contact our R&D department

C03002

Result calculation

Absorbance out of range

ABS

The absorbance measured at the primary and secondary wavelength is greater than 3.4A.

Check the sample for foreign matters or interferents; check if the reagent is qualified and placed in the correct position; check if the cuvette is clean; check if the photometric system is working normally.

C03003

Result calculation

R1 blank absorbance out of range

RBK

The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or insufficient reagent is dispensed.

Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed; check if reagent is sufficient, without air bubbles; check if chemistry parameters are reasonable; if previous problems do not exist, replace reagent and rerun the test.

C03004

Result calculation

Substrate depletion

BOE

The sample concentration is too high, and substrate depletion occurs during fixed-time measurements.

Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.

C03005

Result calculation

Interval cannot be calculated

ENC

The sample concentration is too high, and substrate depletion occurs within the lag time of rate check measurements.

Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.

C03006

Result calculation

Non-linear

LIN

The measuring points for result calculation are nonlinear, because the sample concentration is too high, or the substrate depletion limit is not

Check the reaction curve and the substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test with diluted sample.

8-37

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

specified or unreasonable. C03007

Result calculation

Prozone error

check

PRO

Antigen excess occurs due to too high sample concentration.

Check the reaction curve and the prozone check parameters. Rerun the test with diluted sample.

C03008

Result calculation

Sample concentration is higher than that of the highest-level calibrator

RRN

The sample concentration exceeds the high limit of the calibrator concentration.

Rerun the test with diluted sample.

C03009

Result calculation

Mixed blank absorbance out of range

MBK

The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or insufficient reagent is dispensed.

Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed; check if reagent is sufficient, without air bubbles; check if chemistry parameters are reasonable; if previous problems do not exist, replace reagent and rerun the test.

C03010

Result calculation

Blank response out of range

BLK

The reagent goes wrong; insufficient reagent is dispensed; the cuvette contains air bubbles; the light drifts; or the cuvette is overflowed.

Check if cuvette is overflowed; check if reagent is sufficient, without air bubbles; check if chemistry parameters are reasonable; check if light source is drifted; if previous problems do not exist, replace reagent and rerun the test.

C03011

Result calculation

Calibration repeatability error

DUP

The difference between the maximum and minimum response of the calibrator exceeds the specified limit.

Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable, troubleshoot the error, and then recalibrate.

C03012

Result calculation

Calibration sensitivity error

SEN

The difference of final response of the maximum and minimum concentration calibrators exceeds the specified limit.

Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.

C03013

Result calculation

Calibration curve standard deviation out of range

CSD

The calculated standard deviation of the calibration curve exceeds the specified limit.

Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.

C03014

Result calculation

Calibration curve fitting out of range

DET

The calculated fit of the calibration curve exceeds the specified limit.

Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the reagent and

8-38

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions calibrator are recalibrate.

normal,

and

then

C03015

Result calculation

Calibration slope different out of range

FAC

The slope difference is applicable to linear calibration only and refers to the K factor (slope) difference between two adjacent calibrations. It exceeds the specified limit.

Check if the acceptance limit is reasonable and the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate.

C03016

Result calculation

Calibration curve not monotonic

MON

The calibration data and calibration curve are not monotonic.

Check if the calibrator is defined and placed correctly, and then recalibrate.

C03017

Result calculation

Calibration curve not convergent

COV

For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying base cannot be calculated and no calibration curve is drawn.

Check that the reagent and calibrator are normal, and then recalibrate. If troubleshooting fails, choose other calibration rules and recalibrate.

C03018

Result calculation

12S

12S

The QC result is between ±2 and ±3 standard deviations from the assigned mean concentration.

No actions are required.

C03019

Result calculation

13s

13s

The QC result is greater than ±3 standard deviations from the assigned mean concentration.

Check if the reagent is qualified and control is normal. Check if instrument status is normal

C03020

Result calculation

22s

22s

Results of two controls or two results of one control within a run are simultaneously greater than +2 or -2 standard deviations from the assigned mean.

Check if the reagent is qualified and control is normal. Check if instrument status is normal

C03021

Result calculation

R4S

R4S

One result of a run is greater than +2 standard deviations from the assigned mean and the other greater than -2SDs.

Check if the reagent is qualified and control is normal. Check if instrument status is normal

C03022

Result calculation

41s

41s

Results of two runs in two-control evaluation or four continuous results of a control are greater than +1 or -1 standard deviation from the assigned mean concentration.

Check if the reagent is qualified and control is normal. Check if instrument status is normal

C03023

Result calculation

10x

10x

Results of five runs in two-control evaluation or ten continuous results of a control that are being compared are

Check if the reagent is qualified and control is normal. Check if instrument

8-39

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

on the same side.

status is normal

C03024

Result calculation

CC test period time out. Cannot continue

/

1. Software error 2. Operating system error

Rerun the test. Reboot the operating software and analyzing unit. If problem remains, contact our R&D department

C03025

Result calculation

ISE test period time out. Cannot continue (It lasts more than 50s from ISE test programming to returning ISE test result)

/

1. Software error 2. Calculation of ISE calibration factor is time out due to incorrect response.

1. Restore the system and rerun the test. 2. Replace the calibrator and recalibrate. 3. Replace the electrode.

C03026

Result calculation

Photoelectric data is lost

/

Communication error.

If the error persists, contact our R&D department

C03029

Result calculation

Photoelectric measurement period is out of reasonable range

/

/

/

C03030

Result calculation

Photoelectric measurement period is out of specified range

/

1. Software error

1. Reboot the operating software. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit. 3. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

C03031

Result calculation

Multiple photometric measurements are time out

/

1. Software error

1. Reboot the operating software. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit. 3. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

C04001

Sample code

bar

Sample bar code already exists.

/

Duplicate bar code is used.

Replace the duplicate sample bar code label.

C04002

Sample code

bar

Corresponding program information does not exist

/

The sample of the bar code has not been programmed.

Program the sample of the bar code.

C04006

Sample code

bar

Sample is expired

/

The sample is loaded after its shelf life is exceeded.

The sample is expired. Replace the sample and program it again. Reject

8-40

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions the expired sample. If the sample shelf life is too short, change it to a reasonable one.

C04007

Sample code

bar

Sample bar code contains invalid characters

/

The bar code contains invalid characters rather than number and letter.

Redefine the bar code with numbers and letters.

C04008

Sample code

bar

Sample barcode is too long

/

The bar code length is greater than the maximum value of 27 digits.

Redefine the bar code with no more than 27 digits.

C04009

Sample code

bar

Sample bar code is shorter than 3 digits

/

The bar code length is less than the minimum value of 3 digits.

Redefine the bar code with no less than 3 digits.

C04010

Sample code

bar

Sample bar code parameter configuration error

/

Query result of configuration parameters does not match the defined ones. The probable causes are: bar code reader does not receive configuration instruction due to communication error between bar code reader and smart modules; or the received instruction can not be configured correctly due to communication error; or other errors occurred in bar code reader module.

Reconfigure the bar code reader. If configuration error remains, perform bar code reader diagnosis procedure to troubleshoot.

C04011

Sample code

bar

No bar code is detected in sample position

/

1. No sample is loaded. 2. Sample bar code is too poor to be identified. 3. Sample bar code label is not applied correctly. 4. Sample bar code scanning window is dirty. 5. Symbology, digits and check digit of sample bar code are not set correctly.

1. Load the samples. 2. Use clear and complete sample bar code. 3. Adjust the sample bar code label to make it face the gap on the sample cup adapter. 4. Clean the sample bar code scanning window. 5. Check if the symbology, digits and check digit of sample bar code are set correctly. 6. If problem remains, troubleshoot according to sample bar code diagnosis

8-41

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions feature.

C05001

Reagent code

bar

Reagent corresponding to the bar code has already been loaded

/

Incorrect reagent or reagent bar code is being used, or an invalid reagent bar code is being used in a closed-reagent system. Closed-reagent bar code is aligned with closed reagents, and cannot be used again for new reagent when a reagent is exhausted.

Reprint the reagent bar code, or replace the reagent bottle with an invalid bar code.

C05002

Reagent code

bar

Reagent bar code information error

/

Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, or reagent bar code is not configured reasonably. The reagent bar code contains incomplete or incorrect reagent information, such as expiration date, reagent volume, etc. The reagent is placed in an incorrect position, e.g. R1 on reagent carousel 2, or R2 on reagent carousel 1.

Print the new reagent bar code with correct settings and check the bar code against the settings. In the case of a closed-reagent system, replace the reagent bottle, or contact the reagent supplier. If the reagent is placed incorrectly, adjust them to the correct positions, that is, R1 to reagent carousel 1 and R2 to reagent carousel 2.

C05003

Reagent code

bar

Reagent bar code error, not meeting analysis rules

/

Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, or reagent bar code settings are incorrect. Non-closed reagent bar code is being used in a closed-reagent system. The system is failed to extract reagent information from the bar code.

Check the reagent bar code settings, or reprint the reagent bar code against the settings. In the case of a closed-reagent system, contact the reagent supplier.

C05004

Reagent code

bar

Reagent exceeded maximum times

has the using

/

Reagents in a closed-reagent system are used with maximum aspirate/dispense volume and exhausted. Replace the reagent bottle. User may have added same reagent of other lot number or bottle number into the reagent bottle, hoping to continue to use the same bottle.

Actions such as user using same reagent bottle repeatedly to add more reagent should be discouraged. Replace the closed reagent. If the error remains on the new reagent, contact the reagent supplier. If the error remains on the new reagent, contact the reagent supplier to provide correct reagent bar code.

C05005

Reagent code

bar

Reagent has been expired

/

The reagent is expired and cannot be used for measurements.

Replace the reagent.

8-42

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

C05006

Reagent code

bar

Reserved reagent position has been occupied by other reagents

/

Reagent rather than wash solution is placed in the fixed wash solution position on reagent carousel 1.

Load the reagent again. Remove other reagent from the reserved position.

C05007

Reagent code

bar

Reserved reagent position has been occupied by other reagents

/

Reagent rather than wash solution is placed in the fixed wash solution position on reagent carousel 2.

Load the reagent again. Remove other reagent from the reserved position.

C05008

Reagent code

bar

Reserved reagent position has been occupied by other reagents

/

Reagent rather than physiological saline is placed in the fixed physiological saline position on reagent carousel 1.

Load the reagent again. Remove other reagent from the reserved position.

C05009

Reagent code

bar

Reagent bar code reader configuration error

/

Query result of configuration parameters does not match the defined ones. The probable causes are: bar code reader does not receive configuration instruction due to communication error between bar code reader and smart modules; or the received instruction can not be configured correctly due to communication error; or other errors occurred in bar code reader module.

Reconfigure the bar code reader. If configuration error remains, perform bar code reader diagnosis procedure to troubleshoot.

C06001

Host communication

LIS initialization error

/

Host file is damaged or does not exist.

Reboot operating software; initialize LIS module

C06002

Host communication

LIS communication parameter error

/

Host parameters error

Check system configuration parameters; re-connect LIS

C06003

Host communication

LIS communication error

/

Communication error

If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive the instruction again. If the error occurs for several times, contact LIS vendor; if problem remain, contact our R&D department.

C06004

Host communication

LIS host cannot be connected

/

Abnormal network connection; LIS host is not started.

Check LIS connection and network cable. Check if LIS host and LIS station is started normally.

8-43

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

C06005

Host communication

Sending sample results failed.

/

Communication error

If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive again. If the error occurs for several times, contact LIS vendor; if problem remain, contact our R&D department.

C06006

Host communication

Sending sample information failed

/

Communication error

If the error occurs accidentally, send or receive again. If the error occurs for several times, contact LIS vendor; if problem remain, contact our R&D department.

C06007

Host communication

Inquiring sample information failed

/

LIS host failure

If the error occurs accidentally, neglect it. If the error occurs for several times, contact LIS vendor; if problem remain, contact our customer service department or your local distributor.

C06008

Host communication

Downloading sample failed

/

Incorrect channel settings; or insufficient or redundant chemistries on the LIS host.

Check and re-set the chemistry correspondence between the operating software and the LIS host.

C07003

Light source

Light intensity is too weak

/

1. The lamp is not installed correctly. 2. The cuvette is contaminated. 3. The lamp is aging. 4. The wash station dispenses liquid incorrectly.

1. Check if the lamp is installed correctly. 2. Perform the diluted wash procedure and then the lamp check procedure. 3. Replace the lamp. 4. Check if the wash station dispenses liquid with correct volume to reaction cuvettes. 5. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

C07004

Light source

Cuvette blank out of range

/

1. The cuvette is contaminated. 2. The lamp is aging. 3. The lamp is not installed correctly. 4. The wash station dispenses liquid incorrectly. 5. The photoelectric collection board

1. Open the reaction carousel and check if the lamp is turned on. If it is not, rerun the operating software. 2. Check if the lamp is installed correctly. 3. Perform the diluted wash procedure and then the cuvette check procedure.

8-44

Corrective Actions

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

goes wrong.

4. Replace or clean the failed cuvette. 5. Replace the lamp. 6. Check if the wash station dispenses liquid with correct volume to reaction cuvettes. 7. If problem remains, contact our R&D department.

C07005

Light source

Lamp is not turned on

/

1. The lamp is damaged. 2. The lamp cable is not connected properly. 3. The power board of the lamp is not connected properly. 4. The power supply of the analyzing unit is disconnected. 5. The photoelectric collection board goes wrong.

1. Open the reaction carousel and check if the lamp is turned on. If it is not, rerun the operating software. 2. Check if the lamp cable is tightened. 3. Replace the lamp. 4. Check if the connect of the lamp power board is loose, and if necessary, reinsert the connector. 5. Check if PCB works normally.

C07006

Light source

Light intensity is too strong

/

1. A cuvette position has no cuvette installed. 2. The circuit gain is too high and beyond the measurement range.

1. Check if all cuvette positions have cuvettes installed. 2. Adjust gains.

C07007

Light source

Dark current is too high

/

1. The circuit gain is too high and beyond the measurement range. 2. The power board of the lamp is not connected properly. 3. The photoelectric collection board goes wrong.

1. Perform dark current fluctuation test to identify failure. 2. Check if abnormal channel is relevant with channel gains. Adjust gains if it is caused by gains being to large. 3. Check if connect of lamp power supply board is loose; pull off and plug in the connector.

C07012

Other error of operation unit

Storage device error. Cannot import data

/

No floppy disk or USB drive is inserted. No file is found in the floppy disk or USB drive, or file error, or file is damaged. The floppy disk or USB drive is locked or damaged.

Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is inserted or full. Check if the storage device is damaged.

8-45

Event ID

Component

Event Description

C07013

Other error of operation unit

Storage device error. Cannot export data

C07014

Other error of operation unit

C07015

Flag

Probable Causes

Corrective Actions

/

No floppy disk or USB drive is inserted. Insufficient disk space. The floppy disk or USB drive is locked or damaged.

Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is inserted or full. Check if the storage device is damaged.

CC reagent exhausted

/

All reagents of the reagent type for the chemistry are less than the minimum limit. All reagents of the type are too little to be detected.

Refill or replace the reagent.

Other error of operation unit

ISE reagent exhausted (Parameter A is 1 in Instruction H)

/

1. The ISE buffer tank is empty. 2. The liquid level sensor of the ISE module is not connected. 3. The liquid level sensor of the ISE module goes wrong.

1. Load the ISE buffer. 2. Reconnect the liquid level sensor of the ISE module. 3. Make sure that the liquid level sensor of ISE module is connected correctly. 4. Replace the liquid level sensor of ISE module.

C07016

Other error of operation unit

Insufficient reagent probe wash solution

/

Insufficient wash reagent carousel.

the

Refill the wash solution on the reagent carousel.

C07017

Other error of operation unit

Reagent probe wash solution is exhausted

/

The wash solution on the reagent carousel is exhausted.

Refill the wash solution on the reagent carousel.

C07018

Other error of operation unit

Insufficient sample probe wash solution

/

Insufficient sample probe wash solution

Refill the wash solution.

C07019

Other error of operation unit

Sample probe wash solution is exhausted

/

Sample probe exhausted

Refill the wash solution.

C07020

Other error of operation unit

Software upgrading failed

/

Software upgrading failed

Upgrade for 3 continuous times; re-install operating system and operating software; if problem remains, contact our R&D department

C07022

Other error of operation unit

Less than X tests are left in cc reagent (X is definable)

/

All reagents of the reagent type for the chemistry are less than the minimum limit. All reagents of the type are too little to be detected.

Refill or replace the reagent.

8-46

solution

wash

on

solution

is

Event ID

Component

Event Description

Flag

Probable Causes

C07023

Other error of operation unit

Calibration of one or more chemistries will be expired

/

The calibration factors are about to be expired.

Recalibrate the chemistries.

C07027

Other error of operation unit

One or more calibrators will be expired

/

The calibrator is expired.

Replace the calibrator.

C07028

Other error of operation unit

One or more reagents will be expired

/

The reagent is expired.

Replace the reagent.

C07029

Other error of operation unit

Uncapping time of one or more reagents will be exceeded

/

The uncapping time of the reagent pack is too long.

Replace the reagent.

C07030

ISE module

ISE reference electrode performance is degenerated

REF

Reference electrode performance is degenerated

Replace the reference electrode

C07033

Other error of operation unit

ISE reagent inventory is less than X% (X is definable)

/

Inventory of the ISE buffer solution is lower than the alarm limit.

Check the inventory, and refill ISE buffer solution if necessary.

C07034

Other error of operation unit

Insufficient physiological saline on reagent carousel

/

Insufficient physiological reagent carousel

Refill the physiological saline on the reagent carousel.

C07035

Other error of operation unit

Physiological saline is exhausted

/

Physiological saline is exhausted

8-47

Corrective Actions

saline

on

Refill the physiological saline on the reagent carousel.

8-48

9

Scheduled Maintenance List

All the maintenance items below should be performed on the client by the authorized customer servicing personnel every one year. No.

Item

Material Name

Material Code

Qty

Maintenance Period

1

De-dusting the cooling fan and the cooling fin (fan of the analyzer, fans of ISE/refrigeration/lamp module)

None

/

/

12 months

2

Maintain reagent refrigeration recycle filter

None

/

/

12 months

3

Check coolant in reagent refrigeration recycle tube

Heat conductive liquid

801-BA80-00165-0 0

1

12 months

4

Clean lens assembly

None

/

/

12 months

5

Replace consumables waste pump (P07)

of

APN-P085 Pump maintenance package

New material. Code is being requested…

1

12 months or running more than 2000 hours

6

Replace primary (P08)

consumables of vacuum pump

APN-P215 Pump maintenance package

New material. Code is being requested…

1

24 months or running more than 5,000 hours

7

Replace consumables of external vacuum pump (P10)

APN-P Pump maintenance package

New material. Code is being requested…

1

12 months or running more than 2,000 hours

8

Replace interconnecting tubes of auto wash tube

Interconnecti ng tube (1.5mm – 3mm) (mould MR13339)

0030-20-13339

16

12 months

in

gratings

9-1

No.

Item

Material Name

Material Code

Qty

Maintenance Period

9

Concentrated wash solution filter

Plate-shape filter

801-BA40-00288-0 0

1

12 months

10

Maintain water inlet filter

None

/

/

12 months

9-2

P/N: 046-001556-00(1.0)